The Adventures of Louis de Rougemont by Louis de Rougemont
Author: Unknown
Date: 0101-01-01T00:00:00+00:00

Project Gutenberg Etext of Adventures of Louis de Rougemont by himself

Copyright laws are changing all over the world, be sure to check
the copyright laws for your country before posting these files!!

Please take a look at the important information in this header.

We encourage you to keep this file on your own disk, keeping an
electronic path open for the next readers. Do not remove this.

**Welcome To The World of Free Plain Vanilla Electronic Texts**

**Etexts Readable By Both Humans and By Computers, Since 1971**

These Etexts Prepared By Hundreds of Volunteers and Donations

Information on contacting Project Gutenberg to get Etexts, and
further information is included below. We need your donations.

The Adventures of Louis de Rougemont
by Louis de Rougemont

December, 1997 [Etext #1194]

Project Gutenberg Etext of Adventures of Louis de Rougemont by himself

******This file should be named advlr10.txt or advlr10.zip******

Corrected EDITIONS of our etexts get a new NUMBER, advlr11.txt.

VERSIONS based on separate sources get new LETTER, advlr10a.txt.

This etext was prepared by David Price, email
ccx074@coventry.ac.uk, from the 1899 George Newnes edition.

We are now trying to release all our books one month in advance
of the official release dates, for time for better editing.

Please note: neither this list nor its contents are final till
midnight of the last day of the month of any such announcement.

The official release date of all Project Gutenberg Etexts is at

Midnight, Central Time, of the last day of the stated month. A
preliminary version may often be posted for suggestion, comment
and editing by those who wish to do so. To be sure you have an
up to date first edition [xxxxx10x.xxx] please check file sizes
in the first week of the next month. Since our ftp program has
a bug in it that scrambles the date [tried to fix and failed] a
look at the file size will have to do, but we will try to see a
new copy has at least one byte more or less.

Information about Project Gutenberg (one page)

We produce about two million dollars for each hour we work. The
fifty hours is one conservative estimate for how long it we take
to get any etext selected, entered, proofread, edited, copyright
searched and analyzed, the copyright letters written, etc. This
projected audience is one hundred million readers. If our value
per text is nominally estimated at one dollar then we produce $2
million dollars per hour this year as we release thirty-two text
files per month, or 384 more Etexts in 1997 for a total of 1000+

If these reach just 10% of the computerized population, then the
total should reach over 100 billion Etexts given away.

The Goal of Project Gutenberg is to Give Away One Trillion Etext

Files by the December 31, 2001. [10,000 x 100,000,000=Trillion]

This is ten thousand titles each to one hundred million readers,
which is only 10% of the present number of computer users. 2001
should have at least twice as many computer users as that, so it
will require us reaching less than 5% of the users in 2001.

We need your donations more than ever!

All donations should be made to “Project Gutenberg/CMU”: and are
tax deductible to the extent allowable by law. (CMU = Carnegie-Mellon University).

For these and other matters, please mail to:

Project Gutenberg

P. O. Box 2782

Champaign, IL 61825

When all other email fails try our Executive Director:

Michael S. Hart <hart@pobox.com>

We would prefer to send you this information by email

(Internet, Bitnet, Compuserve, ATTMAIL or MCImail).

******

If you have an FTP program (or emulator), please

FTP directly to the Project Gutenberg archives:

[Mac users, do NOT point and click…type]

ftp uiarchive.cso.uiuc.edu
login: anonymous
password: your@login
cd etext/etext90 through /etext96
or cd etext/articles [get suggest gut for more information]

dir [to see files]

get or mget [to get files…set bin for zip files]

GET INDEX?00.GUT
for a list of books
and

GET NEW GUT for general information
and

MGET GUT* for newsletters.

**Information prepared by the Project Gutenberg legal advisor**

(Three Pages)

***START**THE SMALL PRINT!**FOR PUBLIC DOMAIN ETEXTS**START***

Why is this “Small Print!” statement here? You know: lawyers.

They tell us you might sue us if there is something wrong with
your copy of this etext, even if you got it for free from
someone other than us, and even if what’s wrong is not our
fault. So, among other things, this “Small Print!” statement
disclaims most of our liability to you. It also tells you how
you can distribute copies of this etext if you want to.

BEFORE! YOU USE OR READ THIS ETEXT

By using or reading any part of this PROJECT GUTENBERG-tm
etext, you indicate that you understand, agree to and accept
this “Small Print!” statement. If you do not, you can receive
a refund of the money (if any) you paid for this etext by
sending a request within 30 days of receiving it to the person
you got it from. If you received this etext on a physical
medium (such as a disk), you must return it with your request.

ABOUT PROJECT GUTENBERG-TM ETEXTS

This PROJECT GUTENBERG-tm etext, like most PROJECT GUTENBERG-tm etexts, is a “public domain” work distributed by Professor

Michael S. Hart through the Project Gutenberg Association at

Carnegie-Mellon University (the “Project”). Among other
things, this means that no one owns a United States copyright
on or for this work, so the Project (and you!) can copy and
distribute it in the United States without permission and
without paying copyright royalties. Special rules, set forth
below, apply if you wish to copy and distribute this etext
under the Project’s “PROJECT GUTENBERG” trademark.

To create these etexts, the Project expends considerable
efforts to identify, transcribe and proofread public domain
works. Despite these efforts, the Project’s etexts and any
medium they may be on may contain “Defects”. Among other
things, Defects may take the form of incomplete, inaccurate or
corrupt data, transcription errors, a copyright or other
intellectual property infringement, a defective or damaged
disk or other etext medium, a computer virus, or computer
codes that damage or cannot be read by your equipment.

LIMITED WARRANTY; DISCLAIMER OF DAMAGES

But for the “Right of Replacement or Refund” described below,

[1] the Project (and any other party you may receive this
etext from as a PROJECT GUTENBERG-tm etext) disclaims all
liability to you for damages, costs and expenses, including
legal fees, and [2] YOU HAVE NO REMEDIES FOR NEGLIGENCE OR

UNDER STRICT LIABILITY, OR FOR BREACH OF WARRANTY OR CONTRACT,

INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO INDIRECT, CONSEQUENTIAL, PUNITIVE

OR INCIDENTAL DAMAGES, EVEN IF YOU GIVE NOTICE OF THE

POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES.

If you discover a Defect in this etext within 90 days of
receiving it, you can receive a refund of the money (if any)

you paid for it by sending an explanatory note within that
time to the person you received it from. If you received it
on a physical medium, you must return it with your note, and
such person may choose to alternatively give you a replacement
copy. If you received it electronically, such person may
choose to alternatively give you a second opportunity to
receive it electronically.

THIS ETEXT IS OTHERWISE PROVIDED TO YOU “AS-IS”. NO OTHER

WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, ARE MADE TO YOU AS

TO THE ETEXT OR ANY MEDIUM IT MAY BE ON, INCLUDING BUT NOT

LIMITED TO WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A

PARTICULAR PURPOSE.

Some states do not allow disclaimers of implied warranties or
the exclusion or limitation of consequential damages, so the
above disclaimers and exclusions may not apply to you, and you
may have other legal rights.

INDEMNITY

You will indemnify and hold the Project, its directors,
officers, members and agents harmless from all liability, cost
and expense, including legal fees, that arise directly or
indirectly from any of the following that you do or cause:

[1] distribution of this etext, [2] alteration, modification,
or addition to the etext, or [3] any Defect.

DISTRIBUTION UNDER “PROJECT GUTENBERG-tm”

You may distribute copies of this etext electronically, or by
disk, book or any other medium if you either delete this

“Small Print!” and all other references to Project Gutenberg,
or:

[1] Only give exact copies of it. Among other things, this
requires that you do not remove, alter or modify the
etext or this “small print!” statement. You may however,
if you wish, distribute this etext in machine readable
binary, compressed, mark-up, or proprietary form,
including any form resulting from conversion by word processing or hypertext software, but only so long as

EITHER:

[*] The etext, when displayed, is clearly readable, and
does not contain characters other than those
intended by the author of the work, although tilde

(~), asterisk (*) and underline (_) characters may
be used to convey punctuation intended by the
author, and additional characters may be used to
indicate hypertext links; OR

[*] The etext may be readily converted by the reader at
no expense into plain ASCII, EBCDIC or equivalent
form by the program that displays the etext (as is
the case, for instance, with most word processors);

OR

[*] You provide, or agree to also provide on request at
no additional cost, fee or expense, a copy of the
etext in its original plain ASCII form (or in EBCDIC
or other equivalent proprietary form).

[2] Honor the etext refund and replacement provisions of this

“Small Print!” statement.

[3] Pay a trademark license fee to the Project of 20% of the
net profits you derive calculated using the method you
already use to calculate your applicable taxes. If you
don’t derive profits, no royalty is due. Royalties are
payable to “Project Gutenberg Association/Carnegie-Mellon

University” within the 60 days following each
date you prepare (or were legally required to prepare)

your annual (or equivalent periodic) tax return.

WHAT IF YOU WANT TO SEND MONEY EVEN IF YOU DON’T HAVE TO?

The Project gratefully accepts contributions in money, time,
scanning machines, OCR software, public domain etexts, royalty
free copyright licenses, and every other sort of contribution
you can think of. Money should be paid to “Project Gutenberg

Association / Carnegie-Mellon University”.

ENDTHE SMALL PRINT! FOR PUBLIC DOMAIN ETEXTS*Ver.04.29.93END

THE ADVENTURES OF LOUIS DE ROUGEMONT

CHAPTER I

Early life—Leaving home—I meet Jensen—I go pearling—Daily
routine—Submarine beauties—A fortune in pearls—Seized by an
octopus—Shark-killing extraordinary—Trading with the natives—

Impending trouble—Preparing for the attack—Baffling the savages.

I was born in or near Paris, in the year 1844. My father was a
fairly prosperous man of business—a general merchant, to be
precise, who dealt largely in shoes; but when I was about ten years
old, my mother, in consequence of certain domestic differences,
took me to live with her at Montreux, and other places in

Switzerland, where I was educated. I visited many of the towns
near Montreux, including Lausanne, Geneva, Neufchatel, &c. The
whole of the time I was at school I mixed extensively with English
boys on account of their language and sports, both of which
attracted me.

Boys soon begin to display their bent, and mine, curiously enough,
was in the direction of geology. I was constantly bringing home
pieces of stone and minerals picked up in the streets and on the
mountains, and asking questions about their origin and history. My
dear mother encouraged me in this, and later on I frequently went
to Freiburg, in the Black Forest, to get a practical insight into
smelting. When I was about nineteen, however, a message arrived
from my father, directing me to return to France and report myself
as a conscript; but against this my mother resolutely set her face.

I fancy my father wanted me to take up the army as a career, but in
deference to my mother’s wishes I remained with her in Switzerland
for some time longer. She and I had many talks about my future,
and she at length advised me to take a trip to the East, and see
what the experience of travel would do for me. Neither of us had
any definite project in view, but at length my mother gave me about

7000 francs and I set out for Cairo, intending eventually to visit
and make myself acquainted with the French possessions in the Far

East. My idea was to visit such places as Tonkin, Cochin-China,

Madagascar, Mauritius, Seychelles, &c. My mother was of the
opinion that if I saw a bit of the world in this way I would be
more inclined to settle down at home with her at the end of my
wanderings. The primary cause of my going away was a little love
episode. Whilst at Montreux I fell in love with a charming young
lady at a boarding-school near my home. She was the daughter of
some high personage in the court of Russia—but exactly what
position he held I cannot say. My mother was quite charmed with
the young lady and viewed our attachment with delight. But when my
father heard of the matter he raised a decided objection to it, and
ordered me to return to France and join the army. He had, as I
have previously intimated, made his own plans for my future, even
to the point of deciding upon a future wife for me, as is customary
in France; but I resolutely declined to conform to his wishes in
this respect, and my mother quite sided with me. I never quite
knew how he got to hear of my love affair, but I conclude that my
mother must have mentioned it to him. I only stayed a few days in
the wonderful metropolis of Egypt; its noises, its cosmopolitanism,
its crowds—these, and many other considerations, drove me from the
city, and I set out for Singapore.

I had not been many days in that place when, chancing to make
inquiries at a store kept by a Mr. Shakespeare, I was casually
introduced to a Dutch pearl-fisher named Peter Jensen. Although I
describe him as a Dutch pearler I am somewhat uncertain as to his
exact nationality. I am under the impression that he told me he
came from Copenhagen, but in those days the phrase “Dutchman” had a
very wide application. If a man hailed from Holland, Sweden,

Norway, or any neighbouring country, he was always referred to as a

Dutchman. This was in 1863. We grew quite friendly, Jensen and I,
and he told me he had a small forty-ton schooner at Batavia, in
which sturdy little craft he used to go on his pearling
expeditions.

“I am now,” he said, “about to organise a trip to some untouched
pearling grounds off the south of New Guinea, but have not
sufficient capital to defray the preliminary expenses.”

This hint I took, and I offered to join him. He once agreed, and
we commenced our preparations without delay—in Batavia. Now when
a pearler engaged a crew of native divers there in those days, he
had to deposit beforehand with the Dutch Government a certain sum
for each man entering his service, this money being a guarantee
that the man would get his wages. Well, I placed all the money
that I had with me at Captain Jensen’s disposal, provided he gave
me a share in the venture we were about to undertake. “We will
not,” he said to me in Singapore, “draw up an agreement here, but
will do so at Batavia,” and forthwith we set sail for that place.

Before leaving Singapore, however, Jensen bought some nautical
instruments he could not get at Batavia—including compasses,
quadrant, chronometer, &c. Strange to say, he did not tell me that
his ship was named the Veielland until we had arrived at Batavia.

Here the contract was duly drawn up, and the vessel fitted out for
the voyage. I fancy this was the first time Jensen had embarked on
a pearling expedition on a craft of the size of the Veielland, his
previous trips having been undertaken on much smaller vessels, say
of about ten tons. Although the fitting out of the ship was left
entirely in his hands, I insisted upon having a supply of certain
stores for myself put aboard—things he would never have thought
about. These included such luxuries as tinned and compressed
vegetables, condensed milk, &c. Jensen did not even think of
ship’s biscuits until I called his attention to the oversight. He
demurred at first about buying them, but I told him I would not go
until we had the biscuits aboard. Jensen was a very bluff,
enigmatic sort of fellow, as I afterwards found out. He was of a
sullen, morose nature, and I could never get much out of him about
his past. He would not speak about himself under any
circumstances, and at no time of our acquaintance was he any sort
of a sociable companion. He was very hard upon the sailors under
him, and was much addicted to the use of strong language. I admit
that I was an absolute “muff” in those days, and Jensen was quick
to grasp the fact. He was very fond of schnapps, whilst I hated
the smell of the stuff. Moreover, he was a great smoker, and here
again our tastes differed.

Our preparations in Batavia complete, we next went over to the
islands of the Dutch Archipelago, and engaged forty experienced

Malay divers to accompany us. Jensen was very particular in
selecting the men, each being required to demonstrate his
capabilities before us. The way he tested them prior to actually
engaging them was to make each dive after a bright tin object
thrown into so many fathoms of water. Altogether he spent several
weeks choosing his crew. He had engaged a couple of Malays at

Batavia to help in the work of navigating the ship, but besides
being sailors these men were also good divers. The majority of the
other Malays were only useful as divers, and took no part in the
working of the ship. A native SERANG, or “boss,” was appointed as
chief, or foreman, over the Malays, and he was permitted to take
with him his wife and her maid. This “serang” had to be a first-class diver himself, and had also to be acquainted with the
manoeuvring of a small boat. He was also required to have a
smattering of navigation generally. Above all, he had to be able
to assert authority over the other divers; and in all these
respects our serang was thoroughly proficient.

I may here explain that shortly after leaving Batavia the captain
had the ship repainted a greyish-white colour all over. I never
troubled to look for her name, but one day I saw Jensen painting
the word Veielland on her. There was a totally different name on
the lifeboat, but I cannot remember it. What Jensen’s motive was
in sailing the ship under another name I never understood;
certainly it was a very suspicious circumstance. Perhaps the ship
as originally named had a bad name, and if such were the case—mind
you, I don’t say that it had—the Malays could never have been
induced to go aboard. Once out at sea, however, they would be
absolutely at the mercy of the captain, and he could treat them
just as he pleased. The first thing they did before coming aboard
was to look at the name for themselves. No doubt they knew the
reputation of every pearler. Jensen did on one occasion exercise
his authority to the extent of transferring some of his own Malay
divers to another ship when we were out at sea.

At last everything was ready, and when we sailed for the pearling
grounds, our crew numbered forty-four all told, not including a
fine dog that belonged to the captain. This dog, which played so
important—nay, so vitally important—a part in my strange
afterlife, was given to Jensen at Batavia by a Captain Cadell, a
well-known Australian seaman, who had gained some notoriety by
navigating the Murray River for the first time. Cadell, who was a
great friend of Jensen, was himself a pearler. But he met with a
sad end. He was in a pearling expedition in the neighbourhood of

Thursday Island, and among his crew were some of the very

Australian Blacks who in after years proved so friendly to me.

Cadell treated these men very badly, keeping them at work long
after the time for their return home had expired, and one day they
mutinied and murdered him whilst he was asleep. The black fellow
who called himself “Captain Jack Davies,” of whom I shall have more
to say hereafter, was amongst the crew at the time. I obtained
this information in Sydney from Captain Tucker, a well-known Torres

Straits pearler. Bruno, Jensen’s dog, was something of a greyhound
in build, only that his hind-quarters were heavier.

As you may suppose, my knowledge of seamanship was very limited
indeed, but Jensen interested himself in me, so that I soon began
to pick up a good deal of useful knowledge. He taught me how to
take the sun, I using his old instruments; but I could never grasp
the taking of the lunars. On our voyage out I had no duties to
perform on board, but I found much to interest myself in the
beautiful tropical islands among which we threaded our way; and I
took quite a childish delight in everything I saw. It was really a
grand time for me. I constantly wrote home to my mother, the last
letter I forwarded to her being from Koopang. Occasionally we
landed on one of the islands to buy fresh provisions, in the shape
of fowls, pigs, fruit, &c. We then set sail for the coast of New

Guinea. The voyage thence was accomplished without the slightest
hitch, the divers spending most of their time in singing and
playing like little children,—all in the best of good spirits.

Their favourite form of amusement was to sit round a large fire,
either telling stories of the girls they had left behind, or
singing love melodies. When the weather was at all cold, they
would make a fire in a rather shallow tub, the sides of which were
lined with a layer of sand. They were a wonderfully light-hearted
lot of fellows, and I greatly enjoyed listening to their chants and
yarns. I was more often with them than in Jensen’s company, and it
did not take me long to pick up bits of their language.

The Veielland only drew between seven feet and eight feet of water,
so that we were able to venture very close inshore whenever it was
necessary. At length, about a month after starting, we reached a
likely spot where the captain thought that the precious shells
might be found; here we anchored, and the divers quickly got to
work. I ought to have mentioned that we carried a large whale-boat, and about half-a-dozen frail little “shell” boats for the use
of the divers.

The comings and goings of the various pearling expeditions were of
course regulated by the weather and the state of the tide. The
captain himself went out first of all in the whale-boat, and from
it prospected for shells at the bottom of the crystal sea. The
water was marvellously transparent, and leaning over the side of
the boat, Jensen peered eagerly into his sea-telescope, which is
simply a metal cylinder with a lens of ordinary glass at the
bottom. Some of the sea-telescopes would even be without this
lens, being simply a metal cylinder open at both ends. Although
they did not bring the objects looked at nearer the vision, yet
they enabled the prospector to see below the ruffled surface of the
water.

The big whale-boat was followed at a respectful distance by the
flotilla of smaller boats, each containing from four to six Malays.

When Jensen discerned a likely spot through his peculiar telescope,
he gave the signal for a halt, and before you could realise what
was going to happen, the native divers had tumbled out of their
boats, and were SWIMMING in a weird way down to the bottom of the
translucent sea. As a rule, one man was left in each little boat
to follow the movements of the divers as they returned to the
surface. Not only did these divers wear no mechanical “dress,” but
they used no stimulants or palliatives of any kind to aid them in
their work. All they carried was a small sheath-knife hung from
the waist by a piece of string. The water for the most part was
only two or three fathoms deep, but sometimes it would be as much
as eight fathoms,—which was the greatest depth to which the men
cared to go. When he reached the bottom, the diver would grope
about for shells, and generally return to the surface with a
couple, held in his left hand and hugged against his breast; the
right hand was kept free and directed his movements in swimming.

Each diver seldom remained under water more than one minute, and on
coming to the surface he would take a “spell” of perhaps a quarter
of an hour before going down again.

As fast as each man brought his shells into the boat, they were put
into a separate little pile, which was respected absolutely, and
always recognised as belonging to its owner. The bed of the sea at
these pearling grounds is usually coral, with innumerable holes of
different depths and sizes dotted all over it. It was in these
recesses that the best shells were mostly found.

The marine vegetation down in these seas was always of extreme
beauty; there were stately “trees” that waved backwards and
forwards, as though under the influence of a gentle breeze; there
were high, luxuriant grasses, and innumerable plants of endless
variety and colour. The coral rocks, too, were of gorgeous hues—
yellow, blue, red, and white; but a peculiar thing was that the
moment you brought a piece of this rock up to the surface, the
lovely colour it possessed whilst in the water gradually faded
away. Some of the coral I saw had curious little shoots hanging
from its numerous projections bearing a striking resemblance to
bluebells.

The illusion of a submarine forest was further heightened by the
droves of gaily-coloured fish that flitted in and out among the
branches. Perhaps the most beautiful of all were the little
dolphins. The diving expeditions went away from the ship with the
ebb tide, and returned with the flow. Sometimes their search would
take them long distances away, and on one occasion they were
working fully ten miles from the Veielland. When the water
suddenly became rough, rendering the divers unable to paddle their
own little skiffs back to the ship, they made their way to the
whale-boat, clambered aboard, and returned in her, trailing their
own craft at the stern. The boats, however, were not always
brought back to the ship at night; as a rule they were buoyed near
the pearling beds, whilst the divers returned to their quarters
aboard. I might here explain that the sleeping accommodation for
the Malays was both ample and comfortable. A large room in which
the casks of fresh water were stored was set apart for their use.

These casks were turned on end and a deck of planks placed over
them, on which the Malays laid their sleeping mats and little
wooden pillows. They ranged themselves twenty a side. But you may
be asking, what was I doing during these pearling expeditions?

Well, I was intrusted with the important duty of receiving the
shells from the men, and crediting each with the number he
delivered. Thus I was nearly always left alone on the ship—save
for the dog; because even the two Malay women frequently went out
diving, and they were credited for work done precisely as the men
were.

If I had no shells to open whilst the divers were absent, I filled
in my time by sewing sails, which Jensen himself would cut to the
required shape—and reading, &c. My library consisted of only five
books—a copy of the Bible, and a four-volume medical work in

English by Bell, which I had purchased at Singapore. I made quite
a study of the contents of this work, and acquired much valuable
information, which I was able to put to good use in after years,
more particularly during my sojourn amongst the Blacks. Bruno
generally sat by my side on deck when I was alone,—in fact he was
nearly always with me. He took to me more than to Jensen from the
first. Jensen rarely tried to bully me, though of course I was now
very much in his power, as he emphatically illustrated one day. A

Malay diver had very much annoyed him, and in his fury he picked up
a heavy broom with a stick fully four feet long, and felled the
poor fellow senseless to the deck with it. I was shocked at such
awful brutality, and ventured to protest against it. “Captain,” I
said, “don’t do anything like that again whilst I am aboard.”

Turning round in a great passion he ordered me to keep my own
counsel, otherwise he would have me put in irons. But for all that

Jensen never again let his temper get the better of him to such an
extent in my presence. He was always very gruff in his manner, and
looked upon me as the “darndest fool he had ever met.”

These divers, by the way, never seemed to trouble about the value
of the treasure they were constantly bringing to the surface. They
thought themselves well paid if they were given plenty of rice and
fish, turtles’ eggs and fowls, in addition to such luxuries as
spices, coffee, and “Brummagem” jewellery, of a kind which is too
well known to need description. At the same time it must be
admitted that in addition to their wages, which were paid them when
they were discharged from the ship, the Malays had practically no
opportunity of being dishonest, even though they might have been
inclined that way. They never came into actual contact with the
pearls; they were rewarded according to the number of shells
brought to the surface, and not the value of the pearls they might
contain. All the shells were opened by me. A healthy spirit of
rivalry was maintained among the divers, and the man who had the
best record of shells each week was rewarded with an extra
allowance of rum or tobacco; a choice of some article of jewellery,
or anything else he fancied from among the stock we had on board.

A bottle of chutney or pickles was considered a specially valuable
delicacy. No money was ever given to the divers as wages whilst at
sea, remuneration in kind being always given instead. Each
expedition would be absent perhaps six hours, and on its return
each diver generally had between twenty and forty shells to hand
over to me. These I arranged in long rows on the deck, and allowed
them to remain there all night. Next day I cleaned them by
scraping off the coral from the shells, and then opened them with
an ordinary dinner-knife. Of course, every oyster did not produce
a pearl; in fact, I have opened as many as a hundred consecutive
shells without finding a single pearl. The gems are hidden away in
the fleshy part of the oyster, and have to be removed by pressure
of the thumb. The empty shells are then thrown in a heap on one
side, and afterwards carefully stowed away in the hold, as they
constitute a valuable cargo in themselves, being worth—at that
time, at any rate (1864)—from 200 pounds to 250 pounds, and even

350 pounds a ton. All the pearls I found I placed in a walnut
jewel-case, measuring about fourteen inches by eight inches by six
inches. The value of the treasure increased day by day, until it
amounted to many thousands of pounds; but of this more hereafter.

I did not know much of the value of pearls then—how could I,
having had no previous experience?

Captain Jensen, however, assured me at the end of the season that
we had something like 50,000 pounds worth of pearls aboard, to say
nothing about the value of the shells, of which we had about thirty
tons. It must be clearly understood that this is Captain Jensen’s
estimate—I am utterly unable to give one. The oysters themselves
we found very poor eating, and no one on board cared about them.

Some of the shells contained one pearl, others two, three, and even
four. One magnificent specimen I came across produced no fewer
than a dozen fine pearls, but that of course was very exceptional.

The largest gem I ever found was shaped just like a big cube, more
than an inch square. It was, however, comparatively worthless.

Actually the finest specimen that passed through my hands was about
the size of a pigeon’s egg, and of exquisite colour and shape.

Some of the pearls were of a beautiful rose colour, others yellow;
but most were pure white.

The greatest enemy the divers had to fear in those waters was the
dreaded octopus, whose presence occasioned far greater panic than
the appearance of a mere shark.

These loathsome monsters—call them squids, or devil-fish, or what
you will—would sometimes come and throw their horrible tentacles
over the side of the frail craft from which the divers were
working, and actually fasten on to the men themselves, dragging
them out into the water. At other times octopuses have been known
to attack the divers down below, and hold them relentlessly under
water until life was extinct. One of our own men had a terribly
narrow escape from one of these fearful creatures. I must explain,
however, that occasionally when the divers returned from pearl-fishing, they used to rope all their little skiffs together and let
them lie astern of the schooner. Well, one night the wind rose and
rain fell heavily, with the result that next morning all the little
boats were found more or less water-logged. Some of the Malays
were told off to go and bale them out. Whilst they were at work
one of the men saw a mysterious-looking black object in the sea,
which so attracted his curiosity that he dived overboard to find
out what it was. He had barely reached the water, however, when an
immense octopus rose into view, and at once made for the terrified
man, who instantly saw his danger, and with great presence of mind
promptly turned and scrambled back into the boat.

The terrible creature was after him, however, and to the horror of
the onlookers it extended its great flexible tentacles, enveloped
the entire boat, man and all, and then dragged the whole down into
the clear depths. The diver’s horrified comrades rushed to his
assistance, and an attempt was made to kill the octopus with a
harpoon, but without success. Several of his more resourceful
companions then dived into the water with a big net made of stout
twine, which they took right underneath the octopus, entangling the
creature and its still living prey. The next step was to drag up
both man and octopus into the whale-boat, and this done, the
unfortunate Malay was at length seized by his legs, and dragged by
sheer force out of the frightful embrace, more dead than alive, as
you may suppose. However, we soon revived him by putting him into
a very hot bath, the water being at such a temperature as actually
to blister his skin. It is most remarkable that the man was not
altogether drowned, as he had been held under water by the
tentacles of the octopus for rather more than two minutes. But,
like all the Malays of our party, this man carried a knife, which
he used to very good purpose on the monster’s body when first it
dragged him under the water. These repeated stabs caused the
creature to keep rolling about on the surface, and the unhappy man
was in this way enabled to get an occasional breath of air;
otherwise he must infallibly have been drowned. It was a horrible-looking creature, with a slimy body, and a hideous cavity of a
mouth. It is the tentacles of the creature that are so dreaded, on
account of the immense sucking power which they possess.

After this incident the divers always took a tomahawk with them on
their expeditions, in order to lop off the tentacles of any octopus
that might try to attack them in the boats. And, by the way, we
saw many extraordinary creatures during our cruise. I myself had a
serious fright one day whilst indulging in a swim.

We had anchored in about five fathoms, and as I was proceeding
leisurely away from the vessel at a slow breast stroke, a monstrous
fish, fully twenty feet long, with an enormous hairy head and
fierce, fantastic moustaches, suddenly reared up out of the water,
high into the air. I must say that the sight absolutely unmanned
me for the moment, and when this extraordinary creature opened his
enormous mouth in my direction, I gave myself up for lost. It did
not molest me, however, and I got back to the ship safely, but it
was some little time before I recovered from the terrible fright.

Occasionally too we were troubled with sharks, but the Malays did
not appear to be very much afraid of them. Their great dread was
the ground shark, which lay motionless at the bottom of the sea,
and gave no indication of his presence. The result was that
occasionally the divers would sink down to their work quite
unknowingly almost by the side of one of these fearful creatures,
and in such cases the diver rarely escaped without injury of some
kind. With regard to the ordinary shark, however, our divers
actually sought them. Their method of capturing them was almost
incredible in its simplicity and daring. Three or four of our
divers would go out in a boat and allow themselves to drift into a
big school of sharks. Then one man, possessed of more nerve than
the rest, would bend over the side and smartly prick the first one
he came across with a spear taken out for the purpose. The moment
he had succeeded in this the other occupants of the boat would
commence yelling and howling at the top of their voices, at the
same time beating the water with their paddles, in order to
frighten away the sharks. This invariably succeeded, but, amazing
to relate, the shark that had been pricked always came back alone a
few minutes later to see what it was that had pricked him. Care
has to be taken not to inflict a very severe wound, because the
moment the other sharks taste the blood of a wounded companion,
they will immediately turn upon him and eat him. When the
inquisitive shark is seen coming in the direction of the boat, the

Malay who has accosted him in this way quietly jumps overboard,
armed only with his small knife and a short stick of hard wood,
exactly like a butcher’s skewer, about five inches in length, and
pointed at each end.

The man floats stationary on the surface of the sea, and,
naturally, the shark makes for him. As the creature rolls over to
bite, the wily Malay glides out of his way with a few deft strokes
of the left hand, whilst with the right he deliberately plants the
pointed skewer in an upright position between the open jaws of the
expectant monster. The result is simple, but surprising. The
shark is, of course, unable to close its mouth, and the water just
rushes down his throat and chokes him, in consequence of the gills
being forced back so tightly as to prevent the escape of water
through them in the natural way. Needless to remark, it requires
the greatest possible coolness and nerve to kill a shark in this
way, but the Malays look upon it as a favourite recreation and an
exciting sport. When the monster is dead its slayer dexterously
climbs on to its back, and then, digging his knife into the shark’s
head to serve as a support and means of balance, the conqueror is
towed back to the ship astride his victim by means of a rope hauled
by his companions in their boats.

After many adventures and much luck in the way of getting pearls,
our food and water supply began to give out. This induced Captain

Jensen to make for the New Guinea main in order to replenish his
stores. We soon reached a likely spot on the coast, and obtained
all that we wanted from the natives by means of barter.

We gave them tomahawks, knives, hoop-iron, beads, turtles, and
bright-coloured cloth. Indeed, so friendly did our intercourse
become that parties of our divers often went ashore and joined the

Papuans in their sports and games. On one of these occasions I
came across a curious animal that bore a striking resemblance to a
kangaroo, and yet was not more than two feet high. It could climb
trees like an opossum and was of the marsupial family. The
pigeons, too, which were very plentiful in these parts, were as
large as a big fowl. The headman, or chief, took quite an interest
in me, and never seemed tired of conversing with me, and pointing
out the beauties of the country. He even showed me a certain
boundary which he advised us not to pass, as the natives beyond
were not under his control. One day, however, a party of our

Malays, accompanied by myself, imprudently ventured into the
forbidden country, and soon came to a native village, at which we
halted. The people here were suspicious of us from the first, and
when one of my men indiscreetly offended a native, half the village
rose against us, and we had to beat a retreat. We were making the
best of our way to the coast again, when the friendly chief came
and met us. He interceded with the indignant tribesmen on our
behalf, and succeeded in pacifying them. On reaching the ship,
which was anchored within a mile of the coast, Jensen complained to
me ominously that he was getting fairly swamped with natives, who
persisted in coming on board with fruit and vegetables for barter.

He said he was getting quite nervous about the crowds that swarmed
over the vessel, the natives going up and down as though they had a
perfect right to do so.

“I don’t like it,” said the captain, “and shall have to put my foot
down.”

Next morning, when the usual batch of native canoes came alongside,
we declined to allow a single man on board. While we were
explaining this to them, our friend the chief himself arrived,
accompanied by half-a-dozen notables, most of whom I knew, together
with the now friendly dignitary whose wrath we had aroused the
previous day. They were all full of dignity and anticipation.

Captain Jensen, however, was obdurate, and refused permission to
any one to come aboard. That was enough for the chiefs. They went
away in high dudgeon, followed immediately by all the other canoes
and their occupants. When all had disappeared, a curious stillness
came over the ship, the sea, and the tropical coast, and a strange
sense of impending danger seemed to oppress all of us. We knew
that we had offended the natives, and as we could not see a single
one of them on the beach, it was pretty evident that they were
brooding over their grievance. We might have weighed anchor and
made for the open sea, only unfortunately there was a perfect calm,
and our sails, which were set in readiness for a hasty departure,
hung limp and motionless. Suddenly, as we stood looking out
anxiously over the side in the direction of the shore, we were
amazed to see at least twenty fully-equipped war-canoes, each
carrying from thirty to forty warriors, rounding the headland, some
little distance away, and making straight for our ship. Now my
shrewd Dutch partner had anticipated a possible attack, and had
accordingly armed all the Malays with tomahawks, in readiness for
any attempt that might be made to board the schooner. We had also
taken off the hatches, and made a sort of fortification with them
round the wheel.

Jensen and I armed ourselves with guns, loaded our little cannon,
and prepared to make a desperate fight for our lives against the
overwhelming odds. In spite of the danger of our position, I could
not help being struck with the magnificence of the spectacle
presented by the great fleet of boats now fast advancing towards
us. The warriors had all assumed their fighting decorations, with
white stripes painted round their dusky bodies to strike terror
into the beholder. Their head-dress consisted of many-coloured
feathers projecting from the hair, which they had matted and caused
to stand bolt upright from the head. Each boat had a prow about
three feet high, surmounted by a grotesquely carved figure-head.

The war-canoes were propelled by twelve men, paddling on either
side. When the first came within hailing distance I called out and
made signs that they were not to advance unless their intentions
were peaceful. By way of reply, they merely brandished their bows
and arrows at us. There was no mistaking their mission.

It was now quite evident that we should have to make a fight for
it, and the natives were coming to the attack in such numbers as
easily to overwhelm us if they once got on board. Our position was
rendered still more awkward by the fact that all round the ship
ropes were hanging down to the water, up which our divers used to
climb on their return from the day’s pearling. These ropes were
attached to a sort of hawser running round the outside bulwarks of
the ship. We had not even time to haul these up, and the enemy
would certainly have found them very useful for boarding purposes
had they been allowed to get near enough. It was therefore very
necessary that some decisive step should be taken at once. While
we were debating what was best to be done, we were suddenly greeted
by a shower of arrows from the leading war-canoe. Without waiting
any longer I fired at the leader, who was standing in the prow, and
bowled him over. The bullet went right through his body, and then
bored a hole low down in the side of the canoe. The amazement of
the warriors on hearing the report and seeing the mysterious damage
done is quite beyond description; and before they could recover
from their astonishment, Jensen sent a charge of grape-shot right
into their midst, which shattered several of the canoes and caused
a general halt in the advance.

Again I made signs to them not to come nearer, and they seemed
undecided what to do. Jabbering consultations were held, but while
they were thus hesitating ten more canoes swung round the headland,
and their appearance seemed to give the advance-guard fresh
courage.

Once more they made for our ship, but I was ready for them with the
little cannon we had on board; it had been reloaded with grape
after the first discharge. With a roar the gun belched forth a
second deadly hail against the advancing savages, and the effect
was to demoralise them completely. One of the canoes was shattered
to pieces, and nearly all the men in it more or less seriously
wounded; whilst the occupants of several other canoes received
injuries.

Quite a panic now ensued, and the fleet of canoes got inextricably
mixed. Several showers of arrows, however, descended on our deck,
and some of them penetrated the sails, but no one was injured. The
natives were too much afraid to advance any farther, and as a wind
had now sprung up we deemed it time to make a dash for liberty. We
therefore quietly slipped our anchor and, heading the ship for the
open sea, glided swiftly past the enemy’s fleet, whose gaily
decked, though sorely bewildered, warriors greeted us with a

Parthian flight of arrows as we raced by. In another half-hour we
were well out to sea, and able to breathe freely once more.

CHAPTER II

The three black pearls—The fatal morning—Jensen and his flotilla
drift away—Alone on the ship—“Oil on the troubled waters”—A
substitute for a rudder—Smoke signals—The whirlpool—The savages
attack—I escape from the blacks—A strange monster—The Veielland
strikes a reef—Stone deaf through the big wave—I leap into the
sea—How Bruno helped me ashore—The dreary island—My raft—A
horrible discovery.

This adventure made our Malay crew very anxious to leave these
regions. They had not forgotten the octopus incident either, and
they now appointed their serang to wait upon the captain—a kind of

“one-man” deputation—to persuade him, if possible, to sail for
fresh fishing-grounds. At first Jensen tried to persuade them to
remain in the same latitudes, which is not to be wondered at,
seeing the harvest he had secured; but they would not listen to
this, and at last he was compelled to direct his ship towards some
other quarter. Where he took us to I cannot say, but in the course
of another week we dropped anchor in some practically unexplored
pearling grounds, and got to work once more. Our luck was still
with us, and we continued increasing every day the value of our
already substantial treasure. In these new grounds we found a
particularly small shell very rich in pearls, which required no
diving for at all. They were secured by means of a trawl or scoop
dragged from the stern of the lifeboat; and when the tide was low
the men jumped into the shallow water and picked them up at their
ease.

One morning, as I was opening the shells as usual, out from one
dropped three magnificent black pearls. I gazed at them,
fascinated—why, I know not. Ah! those terrible three black
pearls; would to God they had never been found! When I showed them
to the captain he became very excited, and said that, as they were
worth nearly all the others put together, it would be well worth
our while trying to find more like them. Now, this meant stopping
at sea longer than was either customary or advisable. The pearling
season was practically at an end, and the yearly cyclonic changes
were actually due, but the captain had got the “pearl fever” very
badly and flatly refused to leave. Already we had made an enormous
haul, and in addition to the stock in my charge Jensen had rows of
pickle bottles full of pearls in his cabin, which he would sit and
gloat over for hours like a miser with his gold. He kept on saying
that there MUST be more of these black pearls to be obtained; the
three we had found could not possibly be isolated specimens and so
on. Accordingly, we kept our divers at work day after day as
usual. Of course, I did not know much about the awful dangers to
which we were exposing ourselves by remaining out in such uncertain
seas when the cyclones were due; and I did not, I confess, see any
great reason why we should NOT continue pearling. I was
inexperienced, you see.

The pearl-fishing season, as I afterwards learned, extends from

November to May. Well, May came and went, and we were still hard
at work, hoping that each day would bring another haul of black
pearls to our store of treasure; in this, however, we were
disappointed. And yet the captain became more determined than ever
to find some. He continued to take charge of the whale-boat
whenever the divers went out to work, and he personally
superintended their operations. He knew very well that he had
already kept them at work longer than he ought to have done, and it
was only by a judicious distribution of more jewellery, pieces of
cloth, &c., that he withheld them from openly rebelling against the
extended stay. The serang told him that if the men did once go on
strike, nothing would induce them to resume work, they would simply
sulk, he said; and die out of sheer disappointment and pettishness.

So the captain was compelled to treat them more amiably than usual.

At the very outside their contract would only be for nine months.

Sometimes when he showed signs of being in a cantankerous mood
because the haul of shells did not please him, the serang would say
to him defiantly, “Come on; take it out of me if you are not
satisfied.” But Jensen never accepted the challenge. As the days
passed, I thought the weather showed indications of a change; for
one thing, the aneroid began jumping about in a very uneasy manner.

I called Jensen’s attention to the matter, but he was too much
interested in his hunt for black pearls to listen to me.

And now I pass to the fatal day that made me an outcast from
civilisation for so many weary years. Early one morning in July

1864, Jensen went off as usual with the whole of his crew, leaving
me absolutely alone in charge of the ship. The women had often
accompanied the divers on their expeditions, and did so on this
occasion, being rather expert at the work, which they looked upon
as sport.

Whenever I look back upon the events of that dreadful day, I am
filled with astonishment that the captain should have been so mad
as to leave the ship at all. Only an hour before he left, a tidal
wave broke over the stern, and flooded the cabins with a perfect
deluge. Both Jensen and I were down below at the time, and came in
for an awful drenching. This in itself was a clear and ominous
indication of atmospheric disturbance; but all that poor Jensen did
was to have the pumps set to work, and after the cabins were
comparatively dry he proceeded once more to the pearl banks that
fascinated him so, and on which he probably sleeps to this day.

The tide was favourable when he left, and I watched the fleet of
little boats following in the wake of the whale-boat, until they
were some three miles distant from the ship, when they stopped for
preparations to be made for the work of diving. I had no
presentiment whatever of the catastrophe that awaited them and me.

A cool, refreshing breeze had been blowing up to his time, but the
wind now developed a sudden violence, and the sea was lashed into
huge waves that quickly swamped nearly every one of the little
cockle-shell boats. Fortunately, they could not sink, and as I
watched I saw that the Malays who were thus thrown into the water
clung to the sides of the little boats, and made the best of their
way to the big craft in charge of Captain Jensen. Every moment the
sea became more and more turbulent as the wind quickened to a
hurricane. When all the Malays had scrambled into the whale-boat,
they attempted to pull back to the ship, but I could see that they
were unable to make the slightest headway against the tremendous
sea that was running, although they worked frantically at the oars.

On the contrary, I was horrified to see that they were gradually
drifting AWAY FROM ME, and being carried farther and farther out
across the illimitable sea. I was nearly distracted at the sight,
and I racked my brains to devise some means of helping them, but
could think of nothing feasible. I thought first of all of trying
to slip the anchor and let the ship drift in their direction, but I
was by no means sure that she would actually do this. Besides, I
reflected, she might strike on some of the insidious coral reefs
that abound in those fair but terribly dangerous seas. So I came
to the conclusion that it would be better to let her remain where
she was—at least, for the time being. Moreover, I felt sure that
the captain, with his knowledge of those regions, would know of
some island or convenient sandbank, perhaps not very far distant,
on which he might run his boat for safety until the storm had
passed.

The boats receded farther and farther from view, until, about nine
in the morning, I lost sight of them altogether. They had started
out soon after sunrise. It then occurred to me that I ought to put
the ship into some sort of condition to enable her to weather the
storm, which was increasing instead of abating. This was not the
first storm I had experienced on board the Veielland, so I knew
pretty well what to do. First of all, then, I battened down the
hatches; this done, I made every movable thing on deck as secure as

I possibly could. Fortunately all the sails were furled at the
time, so I had no trouble with them. By mid-day it was blowing so
hard that I positively could not stand upright, but had to crawl
about on my hands and knees, otherwise I should have been hurled
overboard. I also attached myself to a long rope, and fastened the
other end to one of the masts, so that in the event of my being
washed into the raging sea, I could pull myself on board again.

Blinding rain had been falling most of the time, and the waves came
dashing over the deck as though longing to engulf the little ship;
but she rode them all in splendid style. The climax was reached
about two o’clock, when a perfect cyclone was raging, and the end
seemed very near for me. It made me shudder to listen to the wind
screaming and moaning round the bare poles of the sturdy little
vessel, which rose on veritable mountains of water and crashed as
suddenly into seething abysses that made my heart stand still.

Then the weather suddenly became calm once more—a change that was
as unexpected as the advent of the storm itself. The sky, however,
continued very black and threatening, and the sea was still
somewhat boisterous; but both wind and rain had practically
subsided, and I could now look around me without feeling that if I
stirred I was a doomed man. I clambered up the lower portion of
the main rigging, but only saw black, turbulent waters, hissing and
heaving, and raging on every side, and seemingly stretching away
into infinity. With terrible force the utter awfulness and
hopelessness of my position dawned upon me, yet I did not despair.

I next thought it advisable to try and slip my anchor, and let the
ship drift, for I still half-fancied that perhaps I might come
across my companions somewhere. Before I could free the vessel,
however, the wind veered completely round, and, to my horror and
despair, sent a veritable mountain of water on board, that carried
away nearly all the bulwarks, the galley, the top of the companion-way, and, worst of all, completely wrenched off the wheel.

Compasses and charts were all stored in the companion-way, and were
therefore lost for ever. Then, indeed, I felt the end was near.

Fortunately, I was for’ard at the time, or I must inevitably have
been swept into the appalling waste of whirling, mountainous
waters. This lashing of myself to the mast, by the way, was the
means of saving my life time after time. Soon after the big sea—
which I had hoped was a final effort of the terrible storm—the
gale returned and blew in the opposite direction with even greater
fury than before. I spent an awful time of it the whole night
long, without a soul to speak to or help me, and every moment I
thought the ship must go down, in that fearful sea. The only
living thing on board beside myself was the captain’s dog, which I
could occasionally hear howling dismally in the cabin below, where

I had shut him in when the cyclone first burst upon me.

Among the articles carried overboard by the big sea that smashed
the wheel was a large cask full of oil, made from turtle fat, in
which we always kept a supply of fresh meats, consisting mainly of
pork and fowls. This cask contained perhaps twenty gallons, and
when it overturned, the oil flowed all over the decks and trickled
into the sea. The effect was simply magical. Almost immediately
the storm-tossed waves in the vicinity of the ship, which hitherto
had been raging mountains high, quieted down in a way that filled
me with astonishment. This tranquillity prevailed as long as the
oil lasted; but as soon as the supply was exhausted the giant waves
became as turbulent and mountainous as ever.

All night long the gale blew the ship blindly hither and thither,
and it was not until just before daybreak that the storm showed any
signs of abating. By six o’clock, however, only a slight wind was
blowing, and the sea no longer threatened to engulf me and my
little vessel. I was now able to look about me, and see what
damage had been done; and you may imagine my relief when I found
that the ship was still sound and watertight, although the
bulwarks were all gone, and she had all the appearance of a
derelict. One of the first things I did was to go down and unloose
the dog—poor Bruno. The delight of the poor creature knew no
bounds, and he rushed madly up on deck, barking frantically for his
absent master. He seemed very much surprised to find no one aboard
besides myself.

Alas! I never saw Peter Jensen again, nor the forty Malays and the
two women. Jensen MAY have escaped; he may even have lived to read
these lines; God only knows what was the fate of the unfortunate
fleet of pearl-fishers. Priggish and uncharitable people may
ejaculate: “The reward of cupidity!” But I say, “judge not, lest
ye also be judged.”

As the morning had now become beautifully fine, I thought I might
attempt to get out some spare sails. I obtained what I wanted from
the fo’c’sle, and after a good deal of work managed to “bend” a
mainsail and staysail. Being without compass or chart, however, I
knew not where I was, nor could I decide what course to take in
order to reach land. I had a vague idea that the seas in those
regions were studded with innumerable little islands and sandbanks
known only to the pearl-fishers, and it seemed inevitable that I
must run aground somewhere or get stranded upon a coral reef after

I had slipped the cable.

However, I did not see what advantage was to be gained by remaining
where I was, so I fixed from the stern a couple of long sweeps, or
steering oars, twenty-six feet long, and made them answer the
purpose of a rudder. These arrangements occupied me two or three
days, and then, when everything was completed to my satisfaction,
and the ship was in sailing trim, I gave the Veielland her freedom.

This I managed as follows: The moment the chain was at its
tautest—at its greatest tension—I gave it a violent blow with a
big axe, and it parted. I steered due west, taking my observations
by the sun and my own shadow at morning, noon, and evening. For I
had been taught to reckon the degree of latitude from the number of
inches of my shadow. After a time I altered my course to west by
south, hoping that I might come upon one of the islands of the

Dutch Indies,—Timorland, for instance, but day after day passed
without land coming in sight.

Imagine the situation, if you can: alone on a disabled ship in the
limitless ocean,—tortured with doubts and fears about the fate of
my comrades, and filled with horror and despair at my own miserable
prospects for the future.

I did not sail the ship at night, but got out a sea-anchor (using a
float and a long coir rope), and lay-to while I turned in for a
sleep. I would be up at daybreak next morning, and as the weather
continued beautifully fine, I had no difficulty in getting under
way again. At last the expected happened. One afternoon, without
any warning whatsoever, the vessel struck heavily on a reef. I
hurriedly constructed a raft out of the hatches and spare spars,
and put biscuits and water aboard, after which I landed on the
rocks. When the tide reached its lowest point the stern of the

Veielland was left fully TWENTY FEET OUT OF WATER, securely jammed
between two high pinnacles of coral rock. The sight was remarkable
in the extreme. The sails were still set, and the stiff breeze
that was blowing dead against them caused them to belly out just as
though the craft were afloat, and practically helped to keep the
vessel in position. The bows were much higher than the stern, the
line of the decks being at an angle of about forty-five degrees.

In this remarkable situation she remained secure until the turning
of the tide. My only hope was that she would not suffer from the
tremendous strain to which she was necessarily being subjected. It
seemed to me every minute that she would free herself from her
singular position between the rocks, and glide down bows foremost
into the sea to disappear for ever. But the sails kept her back.

How earnestly I watched the rising of the waters; and night came on
as I waited. Slowly and surely they crept up the bows, and the
ship gradually assumed her natural level until at length the stanch
little craft floated safe and sound once more, apparently very
little the worse for her strange experience. And then away I went
on my way—by this time almost schooled to indifference. Had she
gone down I must inevitably have succumbed on those coral reefs,
for the stock of biscuits and water I had been able to put aboard
the raft would only have lasted a very few days.

For nearly a fortnight after the day of the great storm I kept on
the same course without experiencing any unpleasant incident or
check, always excepting the curious threatened wreck which I have
just mentioned.

Just before dusk on the evening of the thirteenth day, I caught
sight of an island in the distance—Melville Island I now know it
to be; and I was greatly puzzled to see smoke floating upwards
apparently from many fires kindled on the beach. I knew that they
were signals of some kind, and at first I fancied that it must be
one of the friendly Malay islands that I was approaching. A closer
scrutiny of the smoke signals, however, soon convinced me that I
was mistaken. As I drew nearer, I saw a number of natives,
perfectly nude, running wildly about on the beach and brandishing
their spears in my direction.

I did not like the look of things at all, but when I tried to turn
the head of the ship to skirt the island instead of heading
straight on, I found to my vexation that I was being carried
forward by a strong tide or current straight into what appeared to
be a large bay or inlet. I had no alternative but to let myself
drift, and soon afterwards found myself in a sort of natural
harbour three or four miles wide, with very threatening coral reefs
showing above the surface. Still the current drew me helplessly
onward, and in a few minutes the ship was caught in a dangerous
whirlpool, round which she was carried several times before I
managed to extricate her. Next we were drawn close in to some
rocks, and I had to stand resolutely by with an oar in order to
keep the vessel’s head from striking. It was a time of most trying
excitement for me, and I wonder to this day how it was that the

Veielland did not strike and founder then and there, considering,
firstly, that she was virtually a derelict, and secondly, that
there was no living creature on board to navigate her save myself.

I was beginning to despair of ever pulling the vessel through, when
we suddenly entered a narrow strait. I knew that I was in a
waterway between two islands—Apsley Strait, dividing Melville and

Bathurst Islands, as I have since learned.

The warlike and threatening natives had now been left behind long
ago, and I never thought of meeting any other hostile people, when
just as I had reached the narrowest part of the waterway, I was
startled by the appearance of a great horde of naked blacks—
giants, every one of them—on the rocks above me.

They were tremendously excited, and greeted me first of all with a
shower of spears. Fortunately, on encountering the first lot of
threatening blacks, I had prepared a shelter for myself on deck by
means of the hatches reared up endwise against the stanchions, and
so the spears fell harmlessly around me. Next, the natives sent a
volley of boomerangs on board, but without any result. Some of
these curious weapons hit the sails and fell impotently on the
deck, whilst some returned to their throwers, who were standing on
the rocks about fifty yards away, near the edge of the water. I
afterwards secured the boomerangs that came on board, and found
that they were about twenty-four inches in length, shaped like the
blade of a sickle, and measured three or four inches across at the
widest part.

They were made of extremely hard wood, and were undoubtedly capable
of doing considerable injury when dexterously and accurately
thrown. The blacks kept up a terrific hubbub on shore, yelling
like madmen, and hurling at me showers of barbed spears. The fact
that they had boomerangs convinced me that I must be nearing the

Australian mainland. All this time the current was carrying the

Veielland rapidly along, and I had soon left the natives jabbering
furiously far behind me.

At last I could see the open sea once more, and at the mouth of the
strait was a little low, wooded island, where I thought I might
venture to land. As I was approaching it, however, yet another
crowd of blacks, all armed, came rushing down to the beach; they
jumped into their catamarans, or “floats,” and paddled out towards
me.

After my previous experience I deemed it advisable not to let them
get too near, so I hoisted the mainsail again and stood for the
open sea. There was a good supply of guns and ammunition on board,
and it would have been an easy matter for me to have sunk one or
two of the native catamarans, which are mere primitive rafts or
floats, and so cooled their enthusiasm a bit; but I refrained, on
reflecting that I should not gain anything by this action.

By this time I had abandoned all hope of ever coming up with my
friends, but, of course, I did not despair of reaching land—
although I hardly knew in what direction I ought to shape my
course. Still, I thought that if I kept due west, I should
eventually sight Timor or some other island of the Dutch Indies,
and so, for the next three or four days, I sailed steadily on
without further incident.

About a week after meeting with the hostile blacks, half a gale
sprang up, and I busied myself in putting the ship into trim to
weather the storm, which I knew was inevitable. I happened to be
looking over the stern watching the clouds gathering in dark, black
masses, when a strange upheaval of the waters took place almost at
my feet, and a huge black fish, like an exaggerated porpoise,
leaped into the air close to the stern of my little vessel.

It was a monstrous, ungainly looking creature, nearly the size of a
small whale. The strange way it disported itself alongside the
ship filled me with all manner of doubtings, and I was heartily
thankful when it suddenly disappeared from sight. The weather then
became more boisterous, and as the day advanced I strove my utmost
to keep the ship’s head well before the wind; it was very
exhausting work. I was unable to keep anything like an adequate
look-out ahead, and had to trust to Providence to pull me through
safely.

All this time I did not want for food. Certainly I could not cook
anything, but there was any quantity of tinned provisions. And I
fed Bruno, too. I conversed with him almost hourly, and derived
much encouragement and sympathy therefrom. One morning sometime
between the fifteenth and twentieth day, I was scanning the horizon
with my customary eagerness, when suddenly, on looking ahead, I
found the sea white with the foam of crashing breakers; I knew I
must be in the vicinity of a sunken reef. I tried to get the ship
round, but it was too late. I couldn’t make the slightest
impression upon her, and she forged stolidly forward to her doom.

A few minutes later her keel came into violent contact with a coral
reef, and as she grated slowly over it, the poor thing seemed to
shiver from stem to stern. The shock was so severe that I was
thrown heavily to the deck. Bruno could make nothing whatever of
it, so he found relief in doleful howls. While the vessel remained
stuck on the rocks, I was looking out anxiously from the rigging,
when, without a moment’s warning, a gigantic wave came toppling and
crashing overboard from the stern, overwhelming me in the general
destruction that followed. I was dashed with tremendous force on
to the deck, and when I picked myself up, bruised and bleeding, the
first thing I was conscious of was a deathly stillness, which
filled me with vague amazement, considering that but a few moments
before my ears had been filled with the roar and crash of the
breakers. And I could see that the storm was still raging with
great fury, although not a sound reached my ears.

Gradually the horrible truth dawned upon me—I WAS STONE DEAF! The
blow on the head from the great wave had completely deprived me of
all sense of hearing. How depressed I felt when I realised this
awful fact no one can imagine. Nevertheless, things were not
altogether hopeless, for next morning I felt a sudden crack in my
left ear, and immediately afterwards I heard once more the dull
roar of the surf, the whistling of the wind, and the barking of my
affectionate dog. My right ear, however, was permanently injured,
and to this day I am decidedly deaf in that organ. I was just
beginning to think that we had passed over the most serious part of
the danger, when to my utter despair I again heard that hideous
grating sound, and knew she had struck upon another reef. She
stuck there for a time, but was again forced on, and presently
floated in deep water. The pitiless reefs were now plainly visible
on all sides, and some distance away I could see what appeared to
be nothing more than a little sandbank rising a few feet above the
waters of the lagoon.

While I was watching and waiting for developments the deck of the
vessel suddenly started, and she began rapidly to settle down by
the stern. Fortunately, however, at that point the water was not
excessively deep. When I saw that nothing could save the ship, and
that her deck was all but flush with the water, I loosened several
of the fittings, as well as some spars, casks, and chests, in the
hope that they might drift to land and perhaps be of service to me
afterwards. I remained on board as long as I possibly could,
trying to build a raft with which to get some things ashore, but I
hadn’t time to finish it.

Up and up came the inexorable water, and at last, signalling to

Bruno to follow me, I leaped into the sea and commenced to swim
towards the sandbank. Of course, all the boats had been lost when
the pearling fleet disappeared. The sea was still very rough, and
as the tide was against us, I found it extremely exhausting work.

The dog seemed to understand that I was finding it a dreadful
strain, for he swam immediately in front of me, and kept turning
round again and again as though to see if I were following safely.

By dint of tremendous struggling I managed to get close up to the
shore, but found it utterly impossible to climb up and land. Every
time I essayed to plant my legs on the beach, the irresistible
backwash swept me down, rolling me head over heels, and in my
exhausted condition this filled me with despair. On one occasion
this backwash sent me spinning into deep water again, and I am sure

I should have been drowned had not my brave dog come to my rescue
and seized me by my hair—which, I should have explained, I had
always worn long from the days of my childhood. Well, my dog
tugged and tugged at me until he had got me half-way through the
breakers, nor did this exertion seem to cause him much trouble in
swimming.

I then exerted myself sufficiently to allow of his letting go my
hair, whilst I took the end of his tail between my teeth, and let
him help me ashore in this peculiar way. He was a remarkably
strong and sagacious brute—an Australian dog—and he seemed to
enjoy the task. At length I found myself on my legs upon the
beach, though hardly able to move from exhaustion of mind and body.

When at length I had recovered sufficiently to walk about, I made a
hasty survey of the little island or sandbank upon which I found
myself. Thank God, I did not realise at that moment that I was
doomed to spend a soul-killing TWO AND A HALF YEARS on that
desolate, microscopical strip of sand! Had I done so I must have
gone raving mad. It was an appalling, dreary-looking spot, without
one single tree or bush growing upon it to relieve the terrible
monotony. I tell you, words can never describe the horror of the
agonising months as they crawled by. “My island” was nothing but a
little sand-spit, with here and there a few tufts of grass
struggling through its parched surface. As a matter of fact the
sand was only four or five inches deep in most places, and
underneath was solid coral rock.

Think of it, ye who have envied the fate of the castaway on a
gorgeous and fertile tropical island perhaps miles in extent! It
was BARELY A HUNDRED YARDS IN LENGTH, TEN YARDS WIDE, AND ONLY

EIGHT FEET ABOVE SEA-LEVEL AT HIGH WATER! There was no sign of
animal life upon it, but birds were plentiful enough—particularly
pelicans. My tour of the island occupied perhaps ten minutes; and
you may perhaps form some conception of my utter dismay on failing
to come across any trace of fresh water.

With what eager eyes did I look towards the ship then! So long as
she did not break up I was safe because there were water and
provisions in plenty on board. And how I thanked my God for the
adamant bulwarks of coral that protected my ark from the fury of
the treacherous seas! As the weather became calmer, and a
brilliant moon had risen, I decided to swim back to the ship, and
bring some food and clothing ashore from her.

I reached the wreck without much trouble, and clambered on board,
but could do very little in the way of saving goods, as the decks
were still below water. However, I dived, or rather ducked, for
the depth of water was only four or five feet, into the cabin and
secured some blankets, but I could not lay my hands on any food.

After infinite trouble I managed to make some sort of a raft out of
pieces of wood I found lying loose and floating about, and upon
this platform I placed the blankets, an oak chest, and one or two
other articles I proposed taking ashore. In the oak chest were a
number of flags, some clothing and medicine together with my case
of pearls and the four medical books. But after I had launched it,

I found that the tide was still running out, and it was impossible
for me to get anything ashore that night. The weather was
beautifully fine, however, and as the forepart of the ship was well
out of water, I decided to remain on board and get an hour or two’s
sleep, which I needed badly. The night passed without incident,
and I was astir a little before dawn.

As the tide was now favourable, I loosed my raft and swam it
ashore. When I gained the island, I made another survey of it, to
find the most suitable spot for pitching my camp, and in the course
of my wanderings I made a discovery that filled me with horror and
the anguish of blackest despair. My curiosity was first attracted
by a human skull that lay near a large circular depression in the
sand about two feet deep. I commenced scratching with my fingers
at one side, and had only gone a few inches down, when I came upon
a quantity of human remains.

The sight struck terror to my heart, and filled me with the most
dismal forebodings. “My own bones,” I thought, “will soon be added
to the pile.” So great was my agony of mind that I had to leave
the spot, and interest myself in other things; but some time
afterwards, when I had got over my nervousness, I renewed my
digging operations, and in an hour or so had unearthed no fewer
than sixteen complete skeletons—fourteen adults, and two younger
people, possibly women! They lay alongside one another, covered by
sand that had been blown over them by the wind.

CHAPTER III

On the wreck—Efforts to kindle a fire—My flagstaff—Clothing
impossible—Growing corn in turtles’ blood—My house of pearl
shells—How the pelicans fished for me—Stung by a “sting-rae”—My
amusements—A peculiar clock—Threatened madness—I begin to build
a boat—An appalling blunder—Riding on turtles—Preaching to

Bruno—Canine sympathy—A sail—How I got fresh water—Sending
messages by the pelicans—A wonderful almanac—A mysterious voice
of hope—Human beings at last.

That morning I made my breakfast off raw sea-gulls’ eggs, but was
unable to get anything to drink. Between nine and ten o’clock, as
the tide was then very low, I was delighted to find that it was
possible to reach the wreck by walking along the rocks. So,
scrambling aboard, I collected as many things as I could possibly
transfer ashore. I had to take dangerous headers into the cabin,
as the whole ship’s interior was now full of water, but all I could
manage to secure were a tomahawk and my bow and arrows, which had
been given me by the Papuans. I had always taken a keen interest
in archery, by the way, and had made quite a name for myself in
this direction long before I left Switzerland. I also took out a
cooking-kettle. All these seemingly unimportant finds were of
vital importance in the most literal sense of the phrase,
particularly the tomahawk and the bow, which were in after years my
very salvation time after time.

I was very delighted when I secured my bow and arrows, for I knew
that with them I could always be certain of killing sea-fowl for
food. There was a stock of gunpowder on board and a number of
rifles and shot-guns, but as the former was hopelessly spoiled, I
did not trouble about either. With my tomahawk I cut away some of
the ship’s woodwork, which I threw overboard and let drift to land
to serve as fuel. When I did eventually return to my little
island, I unravelled a piece of rope, and then tried to produce
fire by rubbing two pieces of wood smartly together amidst the
inflammable material. It was a hopeless business, however; a full
half-hour’s friction only made the sticks hot, and rub as hard as I
would I could not produce the faintest suspicion of a spark. I sat
down helplessly, and wondered how the savages I had read of ever
got fire in this way.

Up to this time I had not built myself a shelter of any kind. At
night I simply slept in the open air on the sand, with only my
blankets round me. One morning I was able to get out of the vessel
some kegs of precious water, a small barrel of flour, and a
quantity of tinned foods. All these, together with some sails,
spars, and ropes, I got safely ashore, and in the afternoon I
rigged myself up a sort of canvas awning as a sleeping-place, using
only some sails and spars.

Among the things I brought from the ship on a subsequent visit were
a stiletto that had originally been given to me by my mother. It
was an old family relic with a black ebony handle and a finely
tempered steel blade four or five inches in length. I also got a
stone tomahawk—a mere curio, obtained from the Papuans; and a
quantity of a special kind of wood, also taken on board at New

Guinea. This wood possessed the peculiar property of smouldering
for hours when once ignited, without actually bursting into flame.

We took it on board because it made such good fuel.

As the most urgent matter was to kindle a fire, I began experiments
with my two weapons, striking the steel tomahawk against the stone
one over a heap of fluffy material made by unravelling and teasing
out a piece of blanket. Success attended my patient efforts this
time, and to my inexpressible relief and joy I soon had a cheerful
fire blazing alongside my improvised shelter—and, what is more, I
took good care NEVER TO LET IT GO OUT DURING THE WHOLE LIME I

REMAINED A PRISONER ON THE ISLAND. The fire was always my first
thought, and night and day it was kept at least smouldering by
means of the New Guinea wood I have already mentioned, and of which

I found a large stock on board. The ship itself, I should mention,
provided me with all the fuel that was required in the ordinary
way, and, moreover, I was constantly finding pieces of wreckage
along the shore that had been gathered in by the restless waves.

Often—oh! often—I reflected with a shudder what my fate would
have been had the ship gone down in deep water, leaving me safe,
but deprived of all the stores she contained. The long, lingering
agony, the starvation, the madness of thirst, and finally a
horrible death on that far-away strip of sand, and another skeleton
added to that grisly pile!

The days passed slowly by. In what part of the world I was located

I had not the remotest idea. I felt that I was altogether out of
the beaten track of ships because of the reefs that studded these
seas, and therefore the prospect of my being rescued was very
remote indeed—a thought that often caused me a kind of dull agony,
more terrible than any mere physical pain.

However, I fixed up a flagstaff on the highest point of the island-

-(poor “island,”—THAT was not many inches)—and floated an ensign

UPSIDE DOWN from it, in the hope that this signal of distress might
be sighted by some stray vessel, and indicate the presence of a
castaway to those on board. Every morning I made my way to the
flagstaff, and scanned the horizon for a possible sail, but I
always had to come away disappointed. This became a habit; yet, so
eternal is hope, that day by day, week by week, and month by month
the bitter disappointment was always a keen torture. By the way,
the very reefs that made those seas so dangerous served completely
to protect my little island in stormy weather. The fury of the
billows lost itself upon them, so that even the surf very rarely
reached me. I was usually astir about sunrise. I knew that the
sun rose about 6 A.M. in those tropical seas and set at 6 P.M.;
there was very little variation all the year round. A heavy dew
descended at night, which made the air delightfully cool; but in
the day it was so frightfully hot that I could not bear the weight
of ordinary clothes upon my person, so I took to wearing a silk
shawl instead, hung loosely round my waist.

Another reason why I abandoned clothes was because I found that
when a rent appeared the sun blazed down through it and raised a
painful blister. On the other hand, by merely wearing a waist-cloth, and taking constant sea baths, I suffered scarcely at all
from the scorching tropical sun. I now devoted all my energies to
the wreck of the Veielland, lest anything should happen to it, and
worked with feverish energy to get everything I possibly could out
of the ship. It took me some months to accomplish this, but
eventually I had removed everything—even the greater part of the
cargo of pearl shells. The work was rendered particularly arduous
in consequence of the decks being so frequently under water; and I
found it was only at the full and new moons that I could actually

WALK round on the rocks to the wreck. In course of time the ship
began to break up, and I materially assisted the operation with an
axe. I wanted her timbers to build a boat in which to escape.

The casks of flour I floated ashore were very little the worse for
their immersion; in fact, the water had only soaked through to the
depth of a couple of inches, forming a kind of protecting wet
crust, and leaving the inner part perfectly dry and good. Much of
this flour, however, was afterwards spoiled by weevils; nor did my
spreading out the precious grain in the sunlight on tarpaulins and
sails save it from at least partial destruction. I also brought
ashore bags of beans, rice, and maize; cases of preserved milk and
vegetables, and innumerable other articles of food, besides some
small casks of oil and rum. In fact, I stripped the ship’s
interior of everything, and at the end of nine months very little
remained of her on the rocks but the bare skeleton of the hull. I
moved all the things out day by day according to the tides.

In a large chest that came ashore from the captain’s cabin I found
a stock of all kinds of seeds, and I resolved to see whether I
could grow a little corn. Jensen himself had put the seeds aboard
in order to plant them on some of the islands near which we might
be compelled to anchor for some length of time. Another object was
to grow plants on board for the amusement of the Malays. The seeds
included vegetables, flowers, and Indian corn, the last named being
in the cob. The Malays are very fond of flowers, and the captain
told them that they might try and cultivate some in boxes on board;
but when he saw that this would mean an additional drain upon his
supply of fresh water he withdrew the permission. I knew that salt
water would not nourish plants, and I was equally certain I could
not spare fresh water from my own stock for this purpose.

Nevertheless, I set my wits to work, and at length decided upon an
interesting experiment. I filled a large turtle shell with sand
and a little clay, and thoroughly wetted the mixture with turtle’s
blood, then stirring the mass into a puddle and planting corn in
it.

The grain quickly sprouted, and flourished so rapidly, that within
a very short time I was able to transplant it—always, however,
nourishing it with the blood of turtles. This most satisfactory
result induced me to extend my operation, and I soon had quaint
little crops of maize and wheat growing in huge turtle shells; the
wheat-plants, however, did not reach maturity.

For a long time I was content with the simple awning I have
described as a place of shelter, but when I began to recover the
pearl shells from the ship, it occurred to me that I might use them
as material with which to build some kind of a hut. Altogether
there were about thirty tons of pearl shells on board, and at first

I took to diving for them merely as a sort of pastime.

I spent many weeks getting enough shells ashore to build a couple
of parallel walls, each about seven feet high, three feet thick,
and ten feet in length. The breeze blew gratefully through them.

I filled the interstices of these walls with a puddle of clayey
sand and water, covered in the top with canvas, and made quite a
comfortable living-place out of it. The walls at any rate had a
high commercial value! When the wet season set in I built a third
wall at one end, and erected a sort of double awning in front,
under which I always kept my fire burning. I also put a straw
thatch over the hut, proudly using my own straw which I had grown
with blood.

In course of time I made myself crude articles of furniture,
including a table, some chairs, a bed, &c. My bedding at first
consisted of sails, but afterwards I was able to have a mattress
filled with straw from my corn patch. The kettle I had saved from
the wreck was for a long time my only cooking utensil, so when I
had anything to prepare I generally made an oven in the sand, after
the manner of the natives I had met on the New Guinea main. I
could always catch plenty of fish—principally mullet; and as for
sea-fowls, all that I had to do was walk over to that part of the
island where they were feeding and breeding, and knock them over
with a stick. I made dough-cakes from the flour whilst it lasted;
and I had deputies to fish for me—I mean the hundreds of pelicans.

The birds who had little ones to feed went out in the morning, and
returned in the afternoon, with from three to ten pounds of
delicious fresh fish in their curious pouches.

On alighting on the island they emptied their pouches on the sand—
too often, I must confess, solely for my benefit. Selfish bachelor
birds on returning with full pouches jerked their catch into the
air, and so swallowed it. It used to amuse me, however, to watch a
robber gull, perched on their back, cleverly and neatly
intercepting the fish as it ascended. These fish, with broiled
turtle meat and tinned fruits, made quite a sumptuous repast.

After breakfast I would have a swim when the tide was low and there
was no likelihood of sharks being about. A run along the beach in
the sun until I was dry followed, and then I returned to my awning
and read aloud to myself in English, from my medical books and my

English-French Testament, simply for the pleasure of hearing my own
voice. I was a very good linguist in those days, and spoke English
particularly well long before I left Switzerland. After breakfast,
my dog and I would go out to catch a peculiar sort of fish called
the “sting-rae.” These curious creatures have a sharp bony spike
about two inches in length near the tail and this I found admirably
adapted for arrow-heads. The body of the fish resembled a huge
flounder, but the tail was long and tapering. They would come
close inshore, and I would spear them from the rocks with a Papuan
fishing-spear. The smallest I ever caught weighed fifteen pounds,
and I could never carry home more than a couple of average weight.

They have the power of stinging, I believe, electrically, hence
their name. At all events, I was once stung by one of these fish,
and it was an experience I shall never forget. It fortunately
happened at a time when some friendly blacks were at hand,
otherwise I question very much whether I should be alive to-day.

I was wading slowly along the beach in rather deep water, when I
suddenly felt a most excruciating pain in my left ankle. It seemed
as though I had just received a paralysing shock from a powerful
battery, and down I fell in a state of absolute collapse, unable to
stir a finger to save myself, although I knew I was rapidly
drowning. Fortunately the blacks who were with me came and pulled
me ashore, where I slowly recovered. There was only a slight
scratch on my ankle, but for a long time my whole body was racked
with pain, and when the natives got to know of the symptoms they
told me that I had been attacked by a “sting-rae.” The spike or
sting measures from two to six inches in length according to the
size of the fish.

But to return to my solitary life on the island. The flesh of the
sting-rae was not pleasant to eat, being rather tough and
tasteless, so I used it as a bait for sharks. Turtles visited the
island in great numbers, and deposited their eggs in holes made in
the sand above high-water mark. They only came on land during the
night, at high tide; and whenever I wanted a special delicacy, I
turned one over on its back till morning, when I despatched it
leisurely with my tomahawk. The creatures’ shells I always devoted
to the extension of my garden, which became very large, and
eventually covered fully two-thirds of the island. The maize and
cob-corn flourished remarkably well, and I generally managed to get
three crops in the course of a year. The straw came in useful for
bedding purposes, but as I found the sand-flies and other insects
becoming more and more troublesome whilst I lay on the ground, I
decided to try a hammock. I made one out of shark’s hide, and
slung it in my hut, when I found that it answered my purpose
splendidly.

The great thing was to ward off the dull agony, the killing
depression, and manias generally. Fortunately I was of a very
active disposition, and as a pastime I took to gymnastics, even as

I had at Montreux. I became a most proficient tumbler and acrobat,
and could turn two or three somersaults on dashing down from the
sloping roof of my pearl-shell hut; besides, I became a splendid
high jumper, with and without the pole. Another thing I interested
myself in was the construction of a sun-dial.

Indeed, I spent many hours devising some means whereby I could
fashion a reliable “clock,” and at last I worked out the principle
of the sun-dial on the sand. I fixed a long stick perfectly
upright in the ground, and then marked off certain spaces round it
by means of pegs and pearl shells. I calculated the hours
according to the length of the shadows cast by the sun.

But, in spite of all that I could do to interest or amuse myself, I
was frequently overwhelmed with fits of depression and despair, and
more than once I feared I should lose my mental balance and become
a maniac. A religious craze took possession of me, and, strive as

I might, I could not keep my mind from dwelling upon certain
apparent discrepancies in the various apostles’ versions of the

Gospel!

I found myself constantly brooding over statements made in one form
by St. Matthew, and in another by St. Luke; and I conjured up
endless theological arguments and theories, until I was driven
nearly frantic. Much as I regretted it, I was compelled at last to
give up reading my New Testament, and by the exercise of a strong
will I forced myself to think about something totally different.

It took me a long time to overcome this religious melancholia, but

I mastered it in the long run, and was greatly delighted when I
found I could once more read without being hypercritical and
doubtful of everything. Had I been cast on a luxuriant island,
growing fruits and flowers, and inhabited at least by animals—how
different would it have been! But here there was nothing to save
the mind from madness—merely a tiny strip of sand, invisible a few
hundred yards out at sea.

When the fits of depression came upon me I invariably concluded
that life was unbearable, and would actually rush into the sea,
with the deliberate object of putting an end to myself. At these
times my agony of mind was far more dreadful that any degree of
physical suffering could have been, and death seemed to have a
fascination for me that I could not resist. Yet when I found
myself up to my neck in water, a sudden revulsion of feeling would
come over me, and instead of drowning myself I would indulge in a
swim or a ride on a turtle’s back by way of diverting my thoughts
into different channels.

Bruno always seemed to understand when I had an attack of
melancholia, and he would watch my every movement. When he saw me
rushing into the water, he would follow at my side barking and
yelling like a mad thing, until he actually made me forget the
dreadful object I had in view. And we would perhaps conclude by
having a swimming race. These fits of depression always came upon
me towards evening, and generally about the same hour.

In spite of the apparent hopelessness of my position, I never
relinquished the idea of escaping from the island some day, and
accordingly I started building a boat within a month of my
shipwreck.

Not that I knew anything whatever about boat-building; but I was
convinced that I could at least make a craft of some sort that
would float. I set to work with a light heart, but later on paid
dearly for my ignorance in bitter, bitter disappointment and
impotent regrets. For one thing, I made the keel too heavy; then,
again, I used planks that were absurdly thick for the shell,
though, of course, I was not aware of these things at the time.

The wreck, of course, provided me with all the woodwork I required.

In order to make the staves pliable, I soaked them in water for a
week, and then heated them over a fire, afterwards bending them to
the required shape. At the end of nine months of unremitting
labour, to which, latterly, considerable anxiety—glorious hopes
and sickening fears—was added, I had built what I considered a
substantial and seaworthy sailing boat, fully fifteen feet long by
four feet wide. It was a heavy ungainly looking object when
finished, and it required much ingenuity on my part to launch it.

This I eventually managed, however, by means of rollers and levers;
but the boat was frightfully low in the water at the stern. It was
quite watertight though, having an outer covering of sharks’ green
hide, well smeared with Stockholm tar, and an inside lining of
stout canvas. I also rigged up a mast, and made a sail. When my
boat floated I fairly screamed aloud with wild delight, and
sympathetic Bruno jumped and yelped in unison.

But when all my preparations were complete, and I had rowed out a
little way, I made a discovery that nearly drove me crazy. I found

I had launched the boat in a sort of lagoon several miles in
extent, barred by a crescent of coral rocks, over which I COULD NOT

POSSIBLY DRAG MY CRAFT INTO THE OPEN SEA. Although the water
covered the reefs at high tide it was never of sufficient depth to
allow me to sail the boat over them. I tried every possible
opening, but was always arrested at some point or other. After the
first acute paroxysm of despair—beating my head with my clenched
fists—I consoled myself with the thought that when the high tides
came, they would perhaps lift the boat over that terrible barrier.

I waited, and waited, and waited, but alas! only to be
disappointed. My nine weary months of arduous travail and half-frantic anticipation were cruelly wasted. At no time could I get
the boat out into the open sea in consequence of the rocks, and it
was equally impossible for me unaided to drag her back up the steep
slope again and across the island, where she could be launched
opposite an opening in the encircling reefs. So there my darling
boat lay idly in the lagoon—a useless thing, whose sight filled me
with heartache and despair. And yet, in this very lagoon I soon
found amusement and pleasure. When I had in some measure got over
the disappointment about the boat, I took to sailing her about in
the lagoon. I also played the part of Neptune in the very
extraordinary way I have already indicated. I used to wade out to
where the turtles were, and on catching a big six-hundred-pounder,

I would calmly sit astride on his back.

Away would swim the startled creature, mostly a foot or so below
the surface. When he dived deeper I simply sat far back on the
shell, and then he was forced to come up. I steered my queer
steeds in a curious way. When I wanted my turtle to turn to the
left, I simply thrust my foot into his right eye, and vice versa
for the contrary direction. My two big toes placed simultaneously
over both his optics caused a halt so abrupt as almost to unseat
me. Sometimes I would go fully a mile out to sea on one of these
strange steeds. It always frightened them to have me astride, and
in their terror they swam at a tremendous pace until compelled to
desist through sheer exhaustion.

Before the wet season commenced I put a straw thatch on the roof of
my hut, as before stated, and made my quarters as snug as possible.

And it was a very necessary precaution, too, for sometimes it
rained for days at a stretch. The rain never kept me indoors,
however, and I took exercise just the same, as I didn’t bother
about clothes, and rather enjoyed the shower bath. I was always
devising means of making life more tolerable, and amongst other
things I made a sort of swing, which I found extremely useful in
beguiling time. I would also practise jumping with long poles.

One day I captured a young pelican, and trained him to accompany me
in my walks and assist me in my fishing operations. He also acted
as a decoy. Frequently I would hide myself in some grass, whilst
my pet bird walked a few yards away to attract his fellows.

Presently he would be joined by a whole flock, many of which I
lassoed, or shot with my bow and arrows.

But for my dog—my almost human Bruno—I think I must have died. I
used to talk to him precisely as though he were a human being. We
were absolutely inseparable. I preached long sermons to him from

Gospel texts. I told him in a loud voice all about my early life
and school-days at Montreux; I recounted to him all my adventures,
from the fatal meeting with poor Peter Jensen in Singapore, right
up to the present; I sang little chansons to him, and among these
he had his favourites as well as those he disliked cordially. If
he did not care for a song, he would set up a pitiful howl. I feel
convinced that this constant communing aloud with my dog saved my
reason. Bruno seemed always to be in such good spirits that I
never dreamed of anything happening to him; and his quiet,
sympathetic companionship was one of the greatest blessings I knew
throughout many weird and terrible years. As I talked to him he
would sit at my feet, looking so intelligently at me that I fancied
he understood every word of what I was saying.

When the religious mania was upon me, I talked over all sorts of
theological subjects with my Bruno, and it seemed to relieve me,
even though I never received any enlightenment from him upon the
knotty point that would be puzzling me at that particular time.

What delighted him most of all was for me to tell him that I loved
him very dearly, and that he was even more valuable to me than the
famous dogs of St. Bernard were to benighted travellers in the
snow.

I knew very little about musical instruments, but as I had often
longed for something to make a noise with, if only to drown the
maddening crash of the eternal surf, I fashioned a drum out of a
small barrel, with sharks’ skin stretched tightly over the open
ends. This I beat with a couple of sticks as an accompaniment to
my singing, and as Bruno occasionally joined in with a howl of
disapproval or a yell of joy, the effect must have been picturesque
if not musical. I was ready to do almost anything to drown that
ceaseless cr-ash, cr-ash of the breakers on the beach, from whose
melancholy and monotonous roar I could never escape for a single
moment throughout the whole of the long day. However, I escaped
its sound when I lay down to sleep at night by a very simple plan.

As I was stone-deaf in the right ear I always slept on the left
side.

Seven weary months had passed away, when one morning, on scanning
the horizon, I suddenly leaped into the air and screamed: “My God!

A sail! A sail!” I nearly became delirious with excitement, but,
alas! the ship was too far out to sea to notice my frantic signals.

My island lay very low, and all that I could make out of the vessel
in the distance was her sails. She must have been fully five miles
away, yet, in my excitement, I ran up and down the miserable beach,
shouting in a frenzy and waving my arms in the hope of attracting
the attention of some one on board; but it was all in vain. The
ship, which I concluded was a pearler, kept steadily on her way,
and eventually disappeared below the horizon.

Never can I hope to describe the gnawing pain at my heart as,
hoarse and half mad, I sank exhausted on the sand, watching the
last vestige of the ship disappearing. Altogether, I saw five
ships pass in this way during my sojourn on the island, but they
were always too far out at sea to notice my signals. One of these
vessels I knew to be a man-o’-war flying the British ensign. I
tried to rig up a longer flagstaff, as I thought the original one
not high enough for its purpose. Accordingly I spliced a couple of
long poles together, but to my disappointment found them too heavy
to raise in the air. Bruno always joined in my enthusiasm when a
sail was in sight; in fact, he was generally the first to detect
it, and he would bark and drag at me until he had drawn my
attention to the new hope. And I loved him for his tender sympathy
in my paroxysms of regret and disappointment. The hairy head would
rub coaxingly against my arm, the warm tongue licking my hand, and
the faithful brown eyes gazing at me with a knowledge and sympathy
that were more than human—these I feel sure saved me again and
again. I might mention that, although my boat was absolutely
useless for the purpose of escape, I did not neglect her
altogether, but sailed her about the enclosed lagoon by way of
practice in the handling of her sails. This was also a welcome
recreation.

I never feared a lack of fresh water, for when, in the dry season,
the ship’s stock and my reserve from the wet season were exhausted,

I busied myself with the condensing of sea water in my kettle,
adding to my store literally drop by drop. Water was the only
liquid I drank, all the tea and coffee carried on board having been
rendered utterly useless.

The powerful winged birds that abounded on the island one day gave
me an idea: Why not hang a message around their necks and send
them forth into the unknown? Possibly they might bring help—who
knows? And with me to conceive was to act. I got a number of
empty condensed-milk tins, and, by means of fire, separated from
the cylinder the tin disc that formed the bottom. On this disc I
scratched a message with a sharp nail. In a few words I conveyed
information about the wreck and my deplorable condition. I also
gave the approximate bearings—latitude fifteen to thirteen
degrees, not far from the Australian main.

These discs—I prepared several in English, French, bad Dutch,

German, and Italian—I then fastened round the necks of the
pelicans, by means of fish-gut, and away across the ocean sped the
affrighted birds, so scared by the mysterious encumbrance that THEY

NEVER RETURNED TO THE ISLAND.

I may say here that more than twenty years later, when I returned
to civilisation, I chanced to mention the story about my messenger-birds to some old inhabitants at Fremantle, Western Australia,
when, to my amazement, they told me that a pelican carrying a tin
disc round its neck, bearing a message in French from a castaway,

HAD been found many years previously by an old boatman on the beach
near the mouth of the Swan River. But it was not mine.

So appalling was the monotony, and so limited my resources, that I
welcomed with childish glee any trifling little incident that
happened. For example, one lovely night in June I was amazed to
hear a tremendous commotion outside, and on getting up to see what
was the matter, I beheld dimly countless thousands of birds—Java
sparrows I believe them to be. I went back to bed again, and in
the morning was a little dismayed to find that my pretty visitors
had eaten up nearly all my green corn. And the birds were still
there when I went forth in the morning. They made the air ring
with their lively chatter, but the uproar they made was as music to
me. The majority of them had greyish-yellow bodies, with yellow
beaks and pink ruffs, and they were not at all afraid of me. I
moved about freely among them, and did not attempt to drive them
out of my corn patch, being only too grateful to see so much life
about me. They rose, however, in great clouds the next day, much
to my regret, and as they soared heavenwards I could not help
envying them their blessed freedom.

I kept count of the long days by means of pearl shells, for I had
not used up the whole cargo in the walls of my hut. I put shells
side by side in a row, one for each day, until the number reached
seven, and then I transferred one shell to another place,
representing the weeks. Another pile of shells represented the
months; and as for the years, I kept count of those by making
notches on my bow. My peculiar calendar was always checked by the
moon.

Now, I am not a superstitious man, so I relate the following
extraordinary occurrence merely as it happened, and without
advancing any theory of my own to account for it. I had been many,
many months—perhaps more than a year—on that terrible little
sand-spit, and on the night I am describing I went to bed as usual,
feeling very despondent. As I lay asleep in my hammock, I dreamed
a beautiful dream. Some spiritual being seemed to come and bend
over me, smiling pityingly. So extraordinarily vivid was the
apparition, that I suddenly woke, tumbled out of my hammock, and
went outside on a vague search. In a few minutes, however, I
laughed at my own folly and turned in again.

I lay there for some little time longer, thinking about the past—
for I dared not dwell on the future—when suddenly the intense
stillness of the night was broken by a strangely familiar voice,
which said, distinctly and encouragingly, “Je suis avec toi. Soit
sans peur. Tu reviendras.” I can never hope to describe my
feelings at that moment.

It was not the voice of my father nor of my mother, yet it was
certainly the voice of some one I knew and loved, yet was unable to
identify. The night was strangely calm, and so startling was this
mysterious message that instinctively I leaped out of my hammock
again, went outside and called out several times, but, of course,
nothing happened. From that night, however, I never absolutely
despaired, even when things looked their very worst.

Two interminable years had passed away, when one day the weather
suddenly changed, and a terrible gale commenced to blow, which
threatened almost to wreck my little hut. One morning, a few days
later, when the storm had abated somewhat, I heard Bruno barking
wildly on the beach. A few seconds afterwards he came rushing into
the hut, and would not rest until I prepared to follow him outside.

Before doing so, however, I picked up an oar—I knew not why. I
then followed my dog down to the beach, wondering what could
possibly have caused him to make such a fuss. The sea was somewhat
agitated, and as it was not yet very light, I could not clearly
distinguish things in the distance.

On peering seawards for the third or fourth time, however, I
fancied I could make out a long, black object, which I concluded
must be some kind of a boat, tossing up and down on the billows.

Then I must confess I began to share Bruno’s excitement,—
particularly when a few minutes later I discerned a well-made
catamaran, WITH SEVERAL HUMAN FIGURES LYING PROSTRATE UPON IT!

CHAPTER IV

I try to revive my visitors—Demonstrations of amazement—A variety
entertainment—Evil spirits in the mirror—“The star above my
home”—“Preliminary canter” with the boat—A joyful procession—

“Good-bye to my island home”—Nearing the main—Among the
cannibals—Smoke telegraphy—A weird audience—A nation meets me—

My first palace.

My state of mind was perfectly indescribable. Here, I thought, are
some poor shipwrecked creatures like myself; and I prayed to God
that I might be the means of saving them. The prospect of having
at length some one to converse with filled me with unutterable joy,
and I could hardly restrain myself from rushing into the water and
swimming out to the catamaran, which was still several hundred
yards away from me. Would it NEVER draw near? I thought, wild with
impatience. And then, to my horror, I saw that it was closely
followed by a number of sharks, which swam round and round it
expectantly. Seeing this, I could contain myself no longer.

Sternly commanding my dog not to follow me, I waded into the waves
and then swam boldly out to the catamaran, taking good care,
however, to make a great noise as I swam, by shouting and splashing
in order to frighten away the sharks. When eventually I did come
up to the floating platform of logs, I found that there were four
blacks upon it—a man, a woman, and two boys. All were lying quite
prostrate through exhaustion, apparently more dead than alive. The
sharks still hung on persistently, but at length I drove them away
by beating the water with my oar, with which I then proceeded to
paddle the catamaran ashore. You see, the oar I grasped when Bruno
came to give the alarm proved of inestimable value; and so all
through my marvellous years of sojourn among the cannibals an
undeniable Providence guided my every action. But this will be
seen from my narrative in a hundred amazing instances. I climbed
aboard the catamaran and paddled it into shallow water; and then,
jumping overboard again I pulled it right up on to the beach, and
carried the four blacks one by one into my hut. They were in a
most pitiable state of collapse. Their tongues were swollen and
protruding out of their mouths, and for a long time I could get
nothing down their throats. First of all I tried to revive them
with cold water, but found they could not swallow.

Then I remembered the rum I had saved from the wreck all this time,
and procuring some I rubbed their bodies with it, tied wet bandages
round their necks, and rolled them about in wet sails, in the hope
that in this way their bodies might absorb the necessary liquid.

You see I had an idea that they were dying from want of water. All
four were terribly emaciated, and in the last stages of exhaustion.

After two or three hours’ treatment, the two boys recovered
consciousness, and some little time later the man also showed signs
of reviving, but the woman did not come to until the afternoon.

None of them, of course, were able to walk; and in the meantime
they did nothing but drink water. They seemed not to realise what
had happened or where they were until the following day, and then
their surprise—mainly at the sight of me—was beyond all
description. Their first symptom was one of extreme terror, and in
spite of every kind action I could think of, they held out for a
long time against my advances—although I signed to them that I was
their friend, patting them on the shoulders to inspire confidence,
and trying to make them understand that I had saved them from a
terrible death. I fancy they all thought they had died and were
now in the presence of the mysterious Great Spirit! At any rate,
it was not until they began to eat freely that they grew in some
measure accustomed to me. Then an ungovernable curiosity
manifested itself. From gazing at me unceasingly, they took to
feeling me and patting my skin. They made queer, guttural sounds
with their mouths, evidently expressive of amazement; they slapped
their thighs, and cracked their fingers.

Next, my belongings came in for inspection, and everything excited
wonderment and delight to such a degree, that I blessed Providence
for sending me so much entertaining society. My hut, with its
curious thatched roof, excited vast interest; and it was amusing to
see the two boys, aged respectively about twelve and fourteen,
following their parents about, jabbering incessantly, and giving me
sly, half-terrified glances as they examined my implements and
utensils. The woman was the first to get over her fear of me, and
she soon grew to trust me implicitly; whereas her husband never
ceased to view me with inexplicable suspicion until we regained his
own country. He was a big, repulsive-looking savage, with a morose
and sullen temper; and although he never showed signs of open
antagonism, yet I never trusted him for a moment during the six
long months he was my “guest” on the little sandbank! It seems I
unwittingly offended him, and infringed the courtesy common among
his people by declining to take advantage of a certain embarrassing
offer which he made me soon after his recovery.

It may not be anticipating too much to say here that the woman was
destined to play a vitally important part in the whole of my life,
and with her I went through adventures and saw sights more weird
and wonderful than anything I had ever read of, even in the wildest
extravagances of sensational fiction. But the ruling passion was
very strong, and one of the first things I did was to take my black
friends down to the beach and show them my precious boat floating
idly in the lagoon. Oddly enough, I had in the meantime always
taken the greatest care of the boat, keeping her bottom clean and
generally furbishing her up—having, however, no particular object
in view in doing this, except perhaps that it gave me something to
do. The poor little “home-made” boat threw the blacks into a
perfect frenzy of astonishment, and they concluded that I must have
come from a very distant part of the world in so enormous a

“catamaran.” As a matter of fact, from that moment they looked
upon me as most certainly a kind of Supreme Spirit from another
world; they may have had doubts before. Next I showed them the
wreck, which was now only a bare skeleton of rotting woodwork, but
still plainly discernible among the coral rocks. I tried to
explain to them that it was in the larger boat that I had come, but
they failed to understand me.

On returning to the hut I put on my clothes for their benefit,
whereupon their amazement was so great that I seriously
contemplated discontinuing my list of wonders, lest they should
become absolutely afraid to remain with me. The clothes they
considered part of myself—in fact, a kind of secondary skin! They
were terribly frightened and distressed, and not one of the four
dared approach me.

The blacks did not build themselves any place of shelter, but
merely slept in the open air at night, under the lee of my hut,
with a large fire always burning at their feet. I offered them
both blankets and sails by way of covering, but they refused them,
preferring to lie huddled close together for warmth. In the
morning the woman would prepare breakfast for them, consisting of
fish (mainly mullet), birds’ and turtles’ eggs, and sea-fowl; to
which would perhaps be added some little luxury from my own stock.

They only had two meals a day—one in the morning and the other in
the afternoon. Their favourite food was turtle, of which they
could eat enormous quantities, especially the fat. Bruno was a
long time before he took kindly to the new arrivals, probably
because they manifested such extraordinary emotion whenever he
lifted up his voice and barked.

I think the only thing that roused the father of the family from
his sullen moods was my extraordinary acrobatic performances, which
also threw the two little nigger boys into hysterics of delight.

Father, mother, and children tried to imitate my somersaults,

“wheels,” and contortions, but came to grief so desperately (once
the morose man nearly broke his neck) that they soon gave it up.

The man would sit and watch our gambols for hours without moving a
muscle. I was never actually afraid of him, but took good care not
to let him get possession of any of my weapons; and as I had also
taken the precaution to break up and throw into the sea the spears
he had brought with him on his catamaran, I felt pretty sure he
could not do much mischief even if he were so disposed. After
seeing me bring down birds with my bow and arrow he began to hold
me in absolute fear, probably because he had some idea that his own
skin might be jeopardised if he did not accommodate himself to
circumstances. I repeatedly told him that with my boat I might
perhaps some day help him to get back to his own country, and I
must say that this suggestion roused him somewhat from his
lethargy, and he appeared profoundly grateful.

Gradually I acquired a slight acquaintance with the extraordinary
language of the blacks, and had many a chat with the woman, who
also picked up a few words of comical English from me. She was a
woman of average height, lithe and supple, with an intelligent face
and sparkling eyes. She was a very interesting companion, and as I
grew more proficient in her queer language of signs, and slaps, and
clicks, I learnt from her many wonderful things about the habits
and customs of the Australian aborigines, which proved extremely
useful to me in after years. Yamba—for that was her name—told me
that when I rescued them they had been blown miles and miles out of
their course and away from their own country by the terrible gale
that had been raging about a fortnight previously. It seems that
they had originally started out on an expedition to catch turtles
on a little island between Cambridge Gulf and Queen’s Channel, but
the storm carried them out to sea. They drifted about for many
days, until at length they reached my little island. The only food
they had during the whole of this time was turtle, but they were
entirely without water. One would think that they must inevitably
have died of thirst, but the blacks are wonderful people for going
without water for prolonged periods. Moreover, they find a
mouthful of salt water occasionally quite sustaining.

One of my most amusing experiences with the blacks was one day
when, quite accidentally, Yamba caught sight of herself for the
first time in the little oval looking-glass I had hanging up in the
hut near my hammock. She thoughtlessly took it down and held it
close up to her face. She trembled, felt the surface of the glass,
and then looked hurriedly on the back. One long, last, lingering
look she gave, and then flew screaming out of the hut.

Oddly enough, she overcame her fears later, and, woman-like, would
come and look in the mirror for an hour at a stretch, smacking her
lips all the while in wonderment, and making most comical grimaces
and contortions to try various effects. Her husband, however

(Gunda, as I called him), was very differently affected, for the
moment his wife showed him his own reflection in the glass he gave
a terrific yell and bolted to the other end of the little island,
in a state of the most abject terror. He never quite overcame his
terror and distrust of the mirror, which he evidently considered
possessed of life, and in reality a kind of spirit to be feared and
avoided.

But, of course, the two boys found the glass a never-ending source
of amazement and wonder, and were not in the least afraid of it
after the first natural shock of surprise. Altogether, I thanked

God for sending me my new companions; and, as you may suppose, they
afforded me as much entertainment and gratification as I and my
belongings did them.

Every evening, before retiring to rest, the family squatted round
the fire and indulged in a mournful kind of chant—singing, as I
afterwards learnt, the wonders they had seen on the white man’s
island; my mirror coming in for special mention. This was the only
approach to a “religious service” I ever saw, and was partly
intended to propitiate or frighten away the spirits of the
departed, of whom the Australian blacks have a great horror.

The blacks had been with me two or three weeks, when one evening
the man approached and intimated in unmistakable terms that he
wanted to get away from the island and return to his own land. He
said he thought he and his family could easily return to their
friends on the mainland by means of the catamaran that had brought
them.

And Yamba, that devoted and mysterious creature, solemnly pointed
out to me a glowing star far away on the horizon. There, she said,
lay the home of her people. After this I was convinced that the
mainland could not be more than a couple of hundred miles or so
away, and I determined to accompany them on the journey thither, in
the hope that this might form one of the stepping-stones to
civilisation and my own kind. We lost no time. One glorious
morning we three—Yamba, her husband, and myself—repaired to the
fatal lagoon that hemmed in my precious boat, and without more ado
dragged it up the steep bank by means of rollers run on planks
across the sand-spit, and then finally, with a tremendous splash
and an excited hurrah from myself, it glided out into the water, a
thing of meaning, of escape, and of freedom. The boat,
notwithstanding its long period of uselessness, was perfectly
watertight and thoroughly seaworthy, although still unpleasantly
low at the stern. Gunda was impatient to be off, but I pointed out
to him that, as the wind persistently blew in the wrong direction
day after day, we should be compelled perforce to delay our
departure perhaps for some months. You see, Gunda was not a man
who required to make much preparation: he thought all we should
have to do was to tumble into the boat and set sail across the
sunlit sea. “I can paddle my catamaran against both wind and tide;
why cannot you do the same?” he would say. He did not understand
the advantage or uses of sails. He had lost his own paddles in the
storm, otherwise he would in all probability have left the island
on his own account. He was like a fish out of water when the
novelty of his situation wore off. On the other hand, I thought of
water, provisions, and other equally vital necessaries. So Gunda
had to rest content for a time, and he grew, if possible, more
morose and sullen than ever.

During this period of impatient waiting, we made many experimental
voyages out to sea, and generally got the boat into capital trim
for the great and eventful journey. I saw to it that she was
thoroughly well provisioned with tinned stuffs—long put on one
side for the purpose; and I may say here that at the last moment
before starting I placed on board three large live turtles, which
supplied us with meat until we reached the Australian main. I also
took a plentiful supply of water, in bags made from the intestines
of birds and fishes; also a small cask containing about ten gallons
of the precious fluid, which was placed near the mast. In short,
as far I was able, I provided everything that was necessary for
this most important journey. But consider for a moment the
horrible doubts and fears that racked me. I FANCIED the mainland
was not very far away, but you must remember I was not at all
certain how long it would take us to reach it; nor could I be sure,
therefore, whether I had taken a sufficient supply of food and
water. Our provisions, which included tinned meats, corn in the
cob and loose, turtles’ flesh and intestines, flour, rice, beans,

&c., would, however, on a fairly liberal allowance, last a little
over three weeks. We also carried some blankets, nails, tar, and
other requisites. Of my books I only took my Bible with me. This

I wrapped up in parchment made from pelican skin, together with
four photographs of a certain young lady which I carried about with
me throughout the whole of my wanderings. The propulsive power
was, of course, the big lug-sail, which was always held loosely in
the hand, and never made fast, for fear of a sudden capsize.

Six months had passed away since the advent of my visitors, when
one morning we all marched out from the hut and down to the beach;
the two boys fairly yelling with joy, and waving bunches of green
corn plucked from my garden. Their mother skipped gaily hither and
thither, and I myself was hardly able to control my transports of
excitement and exhilaration. Even Gunda beamed upon the
preparations for our release. I did not demolish my hut of pearl
shells, but left it standing exactly as it had been during the past
two and a half years. Nor must I omit to mention that I buried my
treasure of pearls deep in the sand at one end of the island, and
in all human probability it is there at this moment, for I have
never returned for them, as I fondly hoped to be able to do so at
some future date. It is, of course, possible that the precious box
has been washed away in a storm, but more probably the contrary is
the case, and still deeper layers of sand have been silted over
this great treasure. I dared not carry anything oversea that was
not vitally necessary, and what good were pearls to me on my
fearful journey, convoying four other people out into the unknown
in a crazy, home-made boat? Even masses of virgin gold were of
very little use to me in the years that followed; but of this more
anon. My condition, by the way, at this time was one of robust
health; indeed, I was getting quite stout owing to the quantity of
turtle I had been eating, whilst Yamba’s husband was positively
corpulent from the same reason.

That glorious morning in the last week of May 1866 will ever be
graven in my memory. As I cast off from that saving but cruel
shore, I thanked my Maker for having preserved me so long and
brought me through such awful perils, as well as for the good
health I had always enjoyed. As the boat began to ripple through
the inclosed waters of the lagoon, the spirits of the four blacks
rose so high that I was afraid they would capsize the little craft
in their excitement.

There was a strong, warm breeze blowing in our favour, and soon my
island home was receding swiftly from our view. The last thing to
remain in sight was the shell hut, but this, too, disappeared
before we had covered three miles. It would have been visible from
a big ship at a much greater distance, but no one would ever
imagine what it really was. Yamba sat near me in the stern, but
her husband curled himself up at the opposite end of the boat; and
from the time we reached the open sea practically until we gained
the main, he did not relax his attitude of reserve and dogged
silence. He ate and drank enormously, however. You would have
thought we were in a land flowing with milk and honey, instead of
an open boat with limited provisions and an unknown journey in
front of us. He did exert himself sufficiently on one occasion,
however, to dive overboard and capture a turtle. He was sitting
moodily in the prow of the boat as usual one afternoon, when
suddenly he jumped up, and with a yell took a header overboard,
almost capsizing our heavily laden boat. At first I thought he
must have gone mad, but on heaving to, I saw him some little
distance away in the water struggling with a turtle. He managed to
get it on its back after a time, and though I felt annoyed at his
recklessness, I could not help laughing at his antics and the
comical efforts made by the turtle to escape. The turtle was duly
hauled aboard, and we then continued our voyage without delay. I
was dreadfully afraid of being caught in a storm. Our boat must
inevitably have foundered had the seas been at all rough.

Fortunately never once did the wind change, so that we were able to
sail on steadily and safely night and day, without deviating in the
least from our course. We travelled fully four knots an hour, the
wind and current being nearly always in our favour. It was,
however, a painfully monotonous and trying experience to sit thus
in the boat, cramped up as we were, day after day and night after
night. About the fifth day we sighted a small island—probably

Barker Island, in the vicinity of Admiralty Gulf—and landed upon
it at once solely for the purpose of stretching our aching limbs.

This little island was uninhabited, and covered to the very water’s
edge with dense tropical vegetation. It was a perfectly
exhilarating experience to walk about on real earth once more. We
cooked some turtle meat and stayed a few hours on the island, after
which we entered the boat and put off on our journey again. Just
before leaving I stored a quantity of corn, cobs, seeds, &c., in a
little cairn in case we might be compelled to return. I always
steered, keeping east by north, but Yamba relieved me for a few
hours each evening—generally between six and nine o’clock, when I
enjoyed a brief but sound sleep. Gunda never offered to take a
spell, and I did not think it worth while to trouble him.

Thus night and day we sailed steadily on, occasionally sighting
sharks and even whales. We passed a great number of islands, some
of them wooded and covered with beautiful jungle growths, whilst
others were nothing but rock and sand. None of them seemed to be
inhabited. The sea was smooth all the time, but occasionally the
currents carried us out of our course among the islands, and then
we had to land and wait till the tide turned. No matter how the
wind was, if the tide was not also in our favour we had to land.

We cruised in and out among the islands for ten days or more, when
we rounded Cape Londonderry and then steered S. by E. The current,
however, carried us straight for Cambridge Gulf. One little island

I sighted between Cambridge Gulf and Queen’s Channel had a curious
house-like structure built in one of the trees on the coast. The
trunk of this tree was very large and tapering, and the platform
arrangement was built amongst the branches at the top, after the
manner adopted by the natives of New Guinea.

You may imagine my feelings when, early one morning, Yamba suddenly
gripped my arm and murmured, “We are nearing my home at last.” I
leaped to my feet, and a few minutes afterwards the mainland came
hazily into view. Instead of heading straight for it, however, we
made for a beautiful island that stood in the mouth of a large bay,
and here we landed to recuperate for a day or so. Immediately on
our arrival, Yamba and her husband lit some fires, and made what
were apparently smoke-signals to their friends on the main. They
first cut down a quantity of green wood with my tomahawk and
arranged it in the form of a pyramid. Next they obtained fire by
rubbing together two pieces of a certain kind of wood; and as the
smoke ascended we saw answering smoke-signals from the opposite
shore. The smoke was allowed to ascend in puffs which were
regulated by the manipulation of boughs. Not long after this
curious exchange of signals (and the practice is virtually
universal throughout the whole of aboriginal Australia), we saw
three catamarans, or floats, each carrying a man, shooting across
towards our island. These catamarans merely consisted of a broad
plank with a stick placed transversely at the prow, on which the
black placed his feet. He squatted down on the plank and then
paddled forward. I viewed their approach with mixed sensations of
alarm and hope. I was in the power of these people, I thought.

They could tear me limb from limb, torture me, kill and eat me, if
they so pleased; I was absolutely helpless. These fears, however,
were but momentary, and back upon my mind rushed the calm
assurances I had obtained from my clear-eyed mentor, Yamba, to say
nothing about the mysterious message of hope and consolation that
had startled the solemn stillness of that tropical night. I knew
these people to be cannibals, for, during the long talks we used to
have on the island, Yamba had described to me their horrid feasts
after a successful war. Nevertheless, I awaited the arrival of the
little flotilla with all the complacency I could muster, but at the
same time I was careful to let Yamba’s husband be the first to
receive them.

And he advanced to meet them. The newcomers, having landed,
squatted down some little distance away from the man they had come
to meet, and then Gunda and they gradually edged forwards towards
one another, until at length each placed his nose upon the other’s
shoulder. This was apparently the native method of embracing.

Later Gunda brought his friends to be introduced to me, and to the
best of my ability I went through the same ridiculous ceremony. I
must say my new friends evinced an almost uncontrollable terror at
the sight of me. Gunda, however, made it clear that I was NOT a
returned spirit, but a man like themselves—a great man certainly,
and a mysterious man, but a man all the same. Although by this
time my skin had become tanned and dark, there was seemingly no end
to the amazement it caused the blacks. They timidly touched and
felt my body, legs, and arms, and were vastly anxious to know what
the covering was I had round my body. In due time, however, the
excitement subsided somewhat, and then the newcomers prepared more
smoke-signals to their friends on the mainland—this time building
five separate fires in the form of a circle.

It was interesting to watch this remarkable method of
communication. Each fire was set smoking fiercely a few seconds
after its neighbour had started. Finally, the columns of smoke
united, and ascended together in the form of a huge pyramid, going
up a tremendous height into the still, hot air. The meaning of
these signals was explained to me. They indicated to the people on
the mainland that the advance guard had found Gunda and his family;
that they had a great man with them; and that, furthermore, they
might expect us to return all together almost immediately. By this
time, thanks to Yamba’s able and intelligent lessons, I was able to
speak the queer language of the blacks with some show of fluency,
and I could understand them well enough when they did not jabber
too quickly.

The next phase of our arrival was that “smokes” were ascending in
all directions on the mainland, evidently calling the tribes from
far and near. How these smoke-signals gave an idea of the white
man and his wonders I am utterly at a loss to imagine. In the
meantime Yamba had prepared a great feast for the visitors, the
principal dish being our remaining big turtle, of which the blacks
ate a prodigious quantity. I afterwards told them that I was in
need of a prolonged rest, my long journey having wearied me, and
after this explanation I retired, and slung my hammock in a shady
nook, where I slept undisturbed from shortly before noon until late
in the day, when my ever-faithful Yamba, who had been keeping a
careful watch, woke me and said that the festivities prior to our
departure were about to take place.

Much refreshed, I rejoined the blacks, and, to their unbounded
delight and amazement, entertained them for a few minutes with some
of my acrobatic tricks and contortions. Some of the more emulous
among them tried to imitate my feats of agility, but always came
dismally to grief—a performance that created even more frantic
merriment than my own. After a little while the blacks
disappeared, only to come forth a few minutes later with their
bodies gorgeously decorated with stripes of yellow ochre and red
and white pigments. These startling preparations preceded a great

CORROBOREE in honour of my arrival, and in this embarrassing
function I was, of course, expected to join. The ceremony was kept
up with extraordinary vigour the whole night long, but all I was
required to do was to sit beating sticks together, and join in the
general uproar. This was all very well for a little while, but the
monotony of the affair was terrible, and I withdrew to my hammock
before midnight.

In the morning I saw a great fleet of catamarans putting off from
the mainland, and in a very short time between fifty and sixty
natives joined our party on the island. Then followed the usual
greetings and comical expressions of amazement—of course, at the
sight of me, my boat, and everything in it. A few hours later the
whole crowd left the island, led by me in the big boat—which, by
the way, attracted as much interest as I did myself. The natives
forced their catamarans through the water at great speed, using
only one paddle, which was dipped first on one side and then on the
other in rapid succession, without, however, causing the apparently
frail craft to swerve in the slightest degree.

As we approached the new country, I beheld a vast surging crowd of
excited blacks—men, women, and children, all perfectly naked—
standing on the beach. The moment we landed there was a most
extraordinary rush for my boat, and everything on board her was
there and then subjected to the closest scrutiny.

The people seemed to be divided into clans, and when one clan was
busy inspecting my implements and utensils, another was patiently
waiting its turn to examine the white man’s wonders. I sat in the
boat for some time, fairly bewildered and deafened by the
uproarious jabberings and shrill, excited cries of amazement and
wonder that filled the air all round me. At last, however, the
blacks who had come out to meet us on the island came to my rescue,
and escorted me through the crowd, with visible pride, to an
eminence overlooking the native camping-ground. I then learnt that
the news of my coming had been smoke-signalled in every direction
for many miles; hence the enormous gathering of clans on the beach.

The camping-ground I now found myself upon consisted of about
thirty primitive shelters, built of boughs in the most flimsy
manner, and only intended to break the force of the wind. These
shelters, or “break-winds,” were crescent-shaped, had ho roof, and
were not in any way closed in in front. There were, however, two
or three grass huts of beehive shape, about seven feet high and ten
feet in diameter, with a queer little hole at the base through
which the occupier had to crawl. The inside was perfectly dark.

I was told I could have either a break-wind of boughs or a beehive
hut, and on consideration I chose the latter. It would, I
reflected, ensure something approaching privacy. My indefatigable

Yamba and a few of her women friends set to work then and there,
and positively in less than an hour the grass hut was ready for
occupation! I did not, however, stay to witness the completion of
the building operations, but went off with some self-appointed
cicerones to see the different camps; everywhere I was received
with the greatest enthusiasm and manifestations of respect and
friendship. My simple loin-cloth of crimson Japanese silk
occasioned much astonishment among the blacks, but curiously enough
the men were far more astonished at my FOOTPRINTS than any other
attribute I possessed. It seems that when they themselves walk
they turn their feet sideways, so that they only make a half
impression, so to speak, instead of a full footprint. On the other
hand, I of course planted my feet squarely down, and this imprint
in the sand was followed by a crowd of blacks, who gravely peered
at every footprint, slapping themselves and clicking in amazement
at the wonderful thing!

CHAPTER V

Some queer dishes—Water wizards—A mysterious deputation—I
protest against cannibalism—My marriage ceremony—A startling
proposition—Daily routine—A diet of worms—I proceed cautiously—

The cannibal poet sells his wares—Fishing extraordinary—How emus
were caught—Eternal fires—A coming horror—The first cannibal
feast.

I saw very little of Gunda from the moment of landing. I feel sure
that the fact of his having seen so much of the world, and
travelled such a long distance—to say nothing about bringing back
so wonderful a creature as myself—had rendered him a very great
man indeed in the estimation of his friends; and in consequence of
this so much honour was paid him that he became puffed up with
pride, and neglected his faithful wife.

Everywhere I went the natives were absolutely overwhelming in their
hospitality, and presents of food of all kinds were fairly showered
upon me, including such delicacies as kangaroo and opossum meat,
rats, snakes, tree-worms, fish, &c., which were always left outside
my hut. Baked snake, I ought to mention, was a very pleasant dish
indeed, but as there was no salt forthcoming, and the flesh was
very tasteless, I cannot say I enjoyed this particular native
dainty. The snakes were invariably baked whole in their skins, and
the meat was very tender and juicy, though a little insipid as to
flavour. The native method of cooking is to scoop out a hole in
the sand with the hands, and then place the article to be cooked at
the bottom. Some loose stones would then be thrown over the

“joint.” Next would come a layer of sand, and the fire was built
on the top of all. Rats were always plentiful—often so much so as
to become a serious nuisance. They were of the large brown
variety, and were not at all bad eating. I may say here that the
women-folk were responsible for the catching of the rats, the
method usually adopted being to poke in their holes with sticks,
and then kill them as they rushed out. The women, by the way, were
responsible for a good many things. They were their masters’

dressers, so to speak, in that they were required to carry supplies
of the greasy clay or earth with which the blacks anoint their
bodies to ward off the sun’s rays and insect bites; and beside
this, woe betide the wives if corroboree time found them without an
ample supply of coloured pigments for the decoration of their
masters’ bodies. One of the principal duties of the women-folk,
however, was the provision of roots for the family’s dinner. The
most important among these necessaries—besides fine yams—were the
root and bud of a kind of water-lily, which when roasted tasted not
unlike a sweet potato.

There was usually a good water supply in the neighbourhood of these
camps, and if it failed (as it very frequently did), the whole
tribe simply moved its quarters elsewhere—perhaps a hundred miles
off.

The instinct of these people for finding water, however, was
nothing short of miraculous. No one would think of going down to
the seashore to look for fresh water, yet they often showed me the
purest and most refreshing of liquids oozing up out of the sand on
the beach after the tide had receded.

All this time, and for many months afterwards, my boat and
everything it contained were saved from molestation and theft by a
curious device on the part of Yamba. She simply placed a couple of
crossed sticks on the sand near the bows, this being evidently a
kind of Masonic sign to all beholders that they were to respect the
property of the stranger among them; and I verily believe that the
boat and its contents might have remained there until they fell to
pieces before any one of those cannibal blacks would have dreamed
of touching anything that belonged to me.

After a time the natives began pointedly to suggest that I should
stay with them. They had probably heard from Yamba about the
strange things I possessed, and the occult powers I was supposed to
be gifted with. A day or two after my landing, a curious thing
happened—nothing more or less than the celebration of my marriage!

I was standing near my boat, still full of thoughts of escape, when
two magnificent naked chiefs, decked with gaudy pigments and
feather head-dresses, advanced towards me, leading between them a
young, dusky maiden of comparatively pleasing appearance.

The three were followed by an immense crowd of natives, and were
within a few feet of me, when they halted suddenly. One of the
chiefs then stepped out and offered me a murderous-looking club,
with a big knob at one end, which ugly weapon was known as a

“waddy.” As he presented this club the chief made signs that I was
to knock the maiden on the head with it. Now, on this I confess I
was struck with horror and dismay at my position, for, instantly
recalling what Yamba had told me, I concluded THAT A CANNIBAL FEAST

WAS ABOUT TO BE GIVEN IN MY HONOUR, and that—worst horror of all—

I might have to lead off with the first mouthful of that smiling
girl. Of course, I reflected they had brought the helpless victim
to me, the distinguished stranger, to kill with my own hands. At
that critical moment, however, I resolved to be absolutely firm,
even if it cost me my life.

While I hesitated, the chief remained absolutely motionless,
holding out the murderous-looking club, and looking at me
interrogatively, as though unable to understand why I did not avail
myself of his offer. Still more extraordinary, the crowd behind
observed a solemn and disconcerting silence. I looked at the girl;
to my amazement she appeared delighted with things generally—a
poor, merry little creature, not more than fifteen or sixteen years
of age. I decided to harangue the chiefs, and as a preliminary I
gave them the universal sign to sit down and parley. They did so,
but did not seem pleased at what they doubtless considered an
unlooked-for hitch in an interesting ceremony.

Then in hesitating signs, slaps, clicks, and guttural utterances, I
gave them to understand that it was against my faith to have
anything whatever to do with the horrid orgy they contemplated.

The Great Spirit they dreaded so much yet so vaguely, I went on to
say, had revealed to me that it was wrong to kill any one in cold
blood, and still more loathsome and horrible to eat the flesh of a
murdered fellow-creature. I was very much in earnest, and I waited
with nervous trepidation to see the effect of my peroration. Under
the circumstances, you may judge of my astonishment when not only
the chiefs, but the whole “nation” assembled, suddenly burst into
roars of eerie laughter.

Then came Yamba to the rescue. Ah! noble and devoted creature!

The bare mention of her name stirs every fibre of my being with
love and wonder. Greater love than hers no creature ever knew, and
not once but a thousand times did she save my wretched life at the
risk of her own.

Well, Yamba, I say, came up and whispered to me. She had been
studying my face quietly and eagerly, and had gradually come to see
what was passing in my mind. She whispered that the chiefs, far
from desiring me to kill the girl for a cannibal feast, were

OFFERING HER TO ME AS A WIFE, and that I was merely expected to tap
her on the head with the stick, in token of her subjection to her
new spouse! In short, this blow on the head was the legal marriage
ceremony tout simple. I maintained my dignity as far as possible,
and proceeded to carry out my part of the curious ceremony.

I tapped the bright-eyed girl on the head, and she immediately fell
prostrate at my feet, in token of her wifely submission. I then
raised her up gently, and all the people came dancing round us,
uttering weird cries of satisfaction and delight. Oddly enough,

Yamba, far from manifesting any jealousy, seemed to take as much
interest as any one in the proceedings, and after everything was
over she led my new wife away to the little “humpy,” or hut, that
had been built for me by the women. That night an indescribably
weird corroboree was held in my honour, and I thought it advisable,
since so much was being made of me, to remain there all night and
acknowledge the impromptu songs that were composed and sung in my
honour by the native bards. I am afraid I felt utterly lost
without Yamba, who was, in the most literal sense, my right hand.

By this time she could speak a little English, and was so
marvellously intelligent that she seemed to discover things by
sheer intuition or instinct. I think she never let a day go by
without favourably impressing the chiefs concerning me, my prowess
and my powers; and without her help I simply could not have lived
through the long and weary years, nor should I ever have returned
to civilisation.

The very next day after my “marriage,” having been still further
enlightened as to the manners and customs of the natives, I waited
upon Gunda, and calmly made to him the proposition that we should
exchange wives. This suggestion he received with a kind of subdued
satisfaction, or holy joy, and very few further negotiations were
needed to make the transaction complete; and, be it said, it was an
every-day transaction, perfectly legal and recognised by all the
clans. Yamba was full of vigour and resource, while the only
phrase that fitly describes her bush lore is absolutely miraculous.

This will be evinced in a hundred extraordinary instances in this
narrative.

But you may be asking, What of my dog, Bruno? Well, I am thankful
to say, he was still with me, but it took him a long time to
accustom himself to his new surroundings; he particularly objected
to associating with the miserable pariah curs that prowled about
the encampment. They would take sly bites out of him when he was
not looking, but on the whole, he was well able to hold his own,
being much more powerful than they.

I settled down to my new life in the course of a few days, but I
need hardly remark I did not propose staying in that forlorn spot
longer than I could help. This was my plan. I would, first of
all, make myself acquainted with the habits and customs of the
blacks, and pick up as much bushmanship and knowledge of the
country as it was possible to acquire, in case I should have to
travel inland in search of civilisation instead of oversea. I knew
that it would be folly on my part to attempt to leave those
hospitable regions without knowing more of the geography of the
country and its people. There was always, however, the hope that
some day I might be able either to get away by sea in my boat, or
else hail some passing vessel. The blacks told me they had seen
many pass at a distance.

Every morning I was astir by sunrise, and—hope springing eternal—
at once searched for the faintest indication of a passing sail.

Next I would bathe in a lagoon protected from sharks, drying myself
by a run on the beach. Meanwhile Yamba would have gone out
searching for roots for breakfast, and she seldom returned without
a supply of my favourite water-lily buds already mentioned. Often,
in the years that followed, did that heroic creature TRAMP ON FOOT

A HUNDRED MILES to get me a few sprigs of saline herbs. She had
heard me say I wanted salt, which commodity, strange to say, was
never used by the natives; and even when I gave them some as an
experiment they did not seem to care about it. She would also
bring in, by way of seasoning, a kind of small onion, known as the

NELGA, which, when roasted, made a very acceptable addition to our
limited fare. The natives themselves had but two meals a day—
breakfast, between eight and nine o’clock, and then an enormous
feast in the late afternoon. Their ordinary food consisted of
kangaroo, emu, snakes, rats, and fish; an especial dainty being a
worm found in the black ava tree, or in any decaying trunk.

These worms were generally grilled on hot stones, and eaten several
at a time like small whitebait. I often ate them myself, and found
them most palatable. After breakfast the women of the tribe would
go out hunting roots and snaring small game for the afternoon meal,
while the men went off on their war and hunting expeditions, or
amused themselves with feats of arms. The children were generally
left to their own devices in the camp, and the principal amusement
of the boys appeared to be the hurling of reed spears at one
another. The women brought home the roots (which they dug up with
yam sticks, generally about four feet long) in nets made out of the
stringy parts of the grass tree; stringy bark, or strong pliable
reeds, slung on their all-enduring backs. They generally returned
heavily laden between two and three in the afternoon. I always
knew the time pretty accurately by the sun, but I lost count of the
days. The months, however, I always reckoned by the moon, and for
each year I made a notch on the inside of my bow.

My own food was usually wrapped in palm leaves before being placed
in the sand oven. Of course the leaves always burned, but they
kept the meat free from sand; and my indefatigable wife was always
exercising her ingenuity to provide me with fresh dainties. In
addition to the ordinary fare of the natives, I frequently had wild
ducks and turkeys, and—what was perhaps the greatest luxury of
all—eggs, which the natives sent for specially on my account to
distant parts of the surrounding country, and also to the islands
of the coast where white cockatoos reared their young in rocky
cliffs.

At the time of my shipwreck I had little or no knowledge of

Australian geography, so that I was utterly at a loss as to my
position. I afterwards learnt, however, that Yamba’s home was on

Cambridge Gulf, on the NNW. coast of the Australian continent, and
that the central point of our camping ground at this time was near
the mouth of the Victoria River, which flows into Queen’s Channel.

Almost every evening the blacks would hold a stately corroboree,
singing and chanting; the burden of their song being almost
invariably myself, my belongings, and my prowess—which latter, I
fear, was magnified in the most extravagant manner. Besides the
corroboree they also would assemble for what might not inaptly be
termed evening prayers, which consisted of a poetical recital of
the events of the day. I ought to mention that at first I did not
accompany the men on their excursions abroad, because I was far
from perfect in their language; and furthermore, I was not skilled
in hunting or in bush lore. Therefore, fearful of exciting
ridicule, I decided to remain behind in the camp until I was
thoroughly grounded in everything there was to be learned.

Supposing, for example, I had gone out with the blacks, and had to
confess myself tired after tramping several miles. Well, this kind
of thing would certainly have engendered contempt; and once the
mysterious white stranger was found to be full of the frailties of
the ordinary man, his prestige would be gone, and then life would
probably become intolerable.

Thus everything I did I had to excel in, and it was absolutely
necessary that I should be perpetually “astonishing the natives,”

in the most literal sense of the phrase. Accordingly, for the next
few weeks, I used to accompany the women on their root-hunting and
rat-catching expeditions, and from them I picked up much valuable
information.

The corroboree was, perhaps, the greatest institution known to the
blacks, who, obliged to do no real work, as we understand it,
simply had to pass the time somehow; and there can be no doubt
that, were it not for the constant feuds and consequent incessant
wars, the race would greatly deteriorate. The corroboree after a
successful battle commenced with a cannibal feast off the bodies of
fallen foes, and it would be kept up for several days on end, the
braves lying down to sleep near the fire towards morning, and
renewing the festivities about noon next day. The chiefs on these
occasions decked themselves with gorgeous cockatoo feathers, and
painted their bodies with red and yellow ochre and other glaring
pigments, each tribe having its own distinguishing marks. A couple
of hours were generally spent in dressing and preparing for the
ceremony, and then the gaily-decorated fighting-men would dance or
squat round the fires and chant monotonous songs, telling of all
their own achievements and valour, and the extraordinary sights
they had seen in their travels.

The words of the songs were usually composed by the clan’s own
poet, who made a living solely by his profession, and even sold his
effusions to other tribes. As there was no written language the
purchaser would simply be coached orally by the vendor poet; and as
the blacks were gifted with most marvellous memories, they would
transmit and resell the songs throughout vast stretches of country.

These men of the north-west were of magnificent stature, and
possessed great personal strength. They were able to walk
extraordinary distances, and their carriage was the most graceful I
have ever seen. Many of them were over six feet high, well made in
proportion and with high broad foreheads—altogether a very
different race from the inhabitants of Central Australia. One of
their favourite tests of strength was to take a short stick of very
hard wood and bend it in their hands, using the thumbs as levers,
till it snapped. Strange to say, I failed to bend the stick more
than a quarter of an inch. The women are not very prepossessing,
and not nearly so graceful in their bearing and gait as the men.

Poor creatures! they did all the hard work of the camp-building,
food-hunting, waiting, and serving. Occasionally, however, the men
did condescend to go out fishing, and they would also organise

BATTUES when a big supply of food was wanted. These great hunting-parties, by the way, were arranged on an immense scale, and fire
figured largely in them. The usual routine was to set fire to the
bush, and then as the terrified animals and reptiles rushed out in
thousands into the open, each party of blacks speared every living
thing that came its way within a certain sphere. The roar of the
fast-spreading fire, the thousands of kangaroos, opossums, rats,
snakes, iguanas, and birds that dashed hither and thither, to the
accompaniment of bewildering shouts from the men and shrill
screeches from the women, who occasionally assisted, flitting
hither and thither like eerie witches amidst the dense pall of
black smoke—all these made up a picture which is indelibly
imprinted on my mind.

As a rule, hosts of hawks and eagles are to be seen flying over the
black man’s camp, but on the occasion of a bush fire they follow
its train, well knowing that they will obtain prey in abundance.

With regard to the fishing parties, these went out either early in
the morning, soon after sunrise, or in the evening, when it was
quite dark. On the latter occasions, the men carried big torches,
which they held high in the air with one hand, while they waded out
into the water with their spears poised, in readiness to impale the
first big fish they came across.

When the spearmen DID strike, their aim was unerring, and the
struggling fish would be hurled on to the beach to the patient
women-folk, who were there waiting for them, with their big nets of
grass slung over their backs. Sometimes a hundred men would be in
the shallow water at once, all carrying blazing torches, and the
effect as the fishermen plunged and splashed this way and that,
with shouts of triumph or disappointment, may be better imagined
than described. In the daytime a rather different method was
adopted. Some acres of the shallow lagoon would be staked out at
low water in the shape of an inverted V, an opening being left for
the fish to pass through.

The high tide brought the fish in vast shoals, and then the opening
would be closed. When the tide receded, the staked enclosure
became, in effect, a gigantic net, filled with floundering fish,
big and little. The natives then waded into the inclosure, and
leisurely despatched the fish with their spears.

Nothing was more interesting than to watch one of these children of
the bush stalking a kangaroo. The man made not the slightest noise
in walking, and he would stealthily follow the kangaroo’s track for
miles (the tracks were absolutely invisible to the uninitiated).

Should at length the kangaroo sniff a tainted wind, or be startled
by an incautious movement, his pursuer would suddenly become as
rigid as a bronze figure, and he could remain in this position for
hours. Finally, when within thirty or forty yards of the animal,
he launched his spear, and in all the years I was among these
people I never knew a man to miss his aim. Two distinct kinds of
spears were used by the natives, one for hunting and the other for
war purposes. The former averaged from eight to ten feet, whilst
the latter varied from ten to fourteen feet in length; the blade in
each case, however, consisting either of bone or stone, with a
shaft of some light hard wood. Metals were, of course, perfectly
unknown as workable materials. The war-spear was not hurled
javelin-fashion like the hunting-spear, but propelled by means of a
wommerah, which, in reality, was a kind of sling, perhaps twenty-four inches long, with a hook at one end to fix on the shaft of the
spear. In camp the men mainly occupied their time in making spears
and mending their weapons. They hacked a tree down and split it
into long sections by means of wedges, in order to get suitable
wood for their spear-shafts.

To catch emus the hunters would construct little shelters of grass
at a spot overlooking the water-hole frequented by these birds, and
they were then speared as they came down for water. The largest
emu I ever saw, by the way, was more than six feet high, whilst the
biggest kangaroo I came across was even taller than this. Snakes
were always killed with sticks, whilst birds were brought down with
the wonderful boomerang.

As a rule, only sufficient food was obtained to last from day to
day; but on the occasion of one of the big battues I have described
there would be food in abundance for a week or more, when there
would be a horrid orgy of gorging and one long continuous
corroboree, until supplies gave out.

The sport which I myself took up was dugong hunting; for I ought to
have mentioned that I brought a harpoon with me in the boat, and
this most useful article attracted as much attention as anything I
had. The natives would occasionally put their hands on my tomahawk
or harpoon, and never ceased to wonder why the metal was so cold.

Whenever I went out after dugong, accompanied by Yamba (she was
ever with me), the blacks invariably came down in crowds to watch
the operation from the beach.

But, you will ask, what did I want with dugong, when I had so much
other food at hand? Well my idea was to lay in a great store of
dried provisions against the time when I should be ready to start
for civilisation in my boat. I built a special shed of boughs, in
which I conducted my curing operations; my own living-place being
only a few yards away. It was built quite in European fashion,
with a sloping roof. The interior was perhaps twenty feet square
and ten feet high, with a small porch in which my fire was kept
constantly burning. When we had captured a dugong the blacks would
come rushing into the sea to meet us and drag our craft ashore,
delighted at the prospect of a great feast. The only part of the
dugong I preserved was the belly, which I cut up into strips and
dried.

The blacks never allowed their fires to go out, and whenever they
moved their camping-ground, the women-folk always took with them
their smouldering firesticks, with which they can kindle a blaze
in a few minutes. Very rarely, indeed, did the women allow their
firesticks to go out altogether, for this would entail a cruel and
severe punishment. A firestick would keep alight in a smouldering
state for days. All that the women did when they wanted to make it
glow was to whirl it round in the air. The wives bore ill-usage
with the most extraordinary equanimity, and never attempted to
parry even the most savage blow. They would remain meek and
motionless under a shower of brutal blows from a thick stick, and
would then walk quietly away and treat their bleeding wounds with a
kind of earth. No matter how cruelly the women might be treated by
their husbands, they hated sympathy, so their women friends always
left them alone. It often surprised me how quickly the blacks’

most terrible wounds healed; and yet they were only treated with a
kind of clay and leaves of the wild rose.

I am here reminded of the native doctor. This functionary was
called a RUI, and he effected most of his cures with a little
shell, with which he rubbed assiduously upon the affected part.

Thus it will be seen that the medical treatment was a form of
massage, the rubbing being done first in a downward direction and
then crosswise. I must say, however, that the blacks were very
rarely troubled with illness, their most frequent disorder being
usually the result of excessive gorging when a particularly ample
supply of food was forthcoming—say, after a big battue over a
tribal preserve.

In an ordinary case of overfeeding, the medicine man would rub his
patient’s stomach with such vigour as often to draw blood. He
would also give the sufferer a kind of grass to eat, and this herb,
besides clearing the system, also acted as a most marvellous
appetiser. The capacity of some of my blacks was almost beyond
belief. One giant I have in my mind ate a whole kangaroo by
himself. I saw him do it. Certainly it was not an excessively big
animal, but, still, it was a meal large enough for three or four
stalwart men.

In a case of fever the natives resorted to charms to drive away the
evil spirit that was supposed to be troubling the patient. The
universal superstition about all maladies is that they are caused
by the “evil eye,” directed against the sufferer by some enemy.

Should one member of a tribe be stricken down with a disease, his
friends at once come to the conclusion that he has been “pointed
at” by a member of another tribe who owed him a grudge; he has, in
short, been bewitched, and an expedition is promptly organised to
seek out and punish the individual in question and all his tribe.

From this it is obvious that war is of pretty frequent occurrence.

And not only so, but every death is likewise the signal for a
tribal war. There is no verdict of “Death from natural causes.”

Punitive expeditions are not organised in the event of slight
fevers or even serious illness—only when the patient dies. A
tribe I once came across some miles inland were visited by a plague
of what I now feel sure must have been smallpox. The disease, they
said, had been brought down from the coast, and although numbers of
the blacks died, war was not declared against any particular tribe.

As a rule, the body of the dead brave is placed upon a platform
erected in the forks of trees, and his weapons neatly arranged
below. Then, as decay set in, and the body began to crumble away,
the friends and chiefs would come and observe certain mystic signs,
which were supposed to give information as to what tribe or
individual had caused the death of the deceased.

It must have been within a month of my landing on Yamba’s country,
in Cambridge Gulf, that I witnessed my first cannibal feast. One
of the fighting-men had died in our camp, and after the usual
observations had been taken, it was decided that he had been
pointed at, and his death brought about, by a member of another
tribe living some distance away. An expedition of some hundreds of
warriors was at once fitted out. The enemy was apparently only too
ready for the fray, because the armies promptly met in an open
plain, and I had an opportunity of witnessing the extraordinary
method by which the Australian blacks wage war. One of the most
redoubtable of our chiefs stepped forward, and explained the reason
of his people’s visit in comparatively calm tones. An opposing
chief replied to him, and gradually a heated altercation arose, the
abuse rising on a crescendo scale for ten or fifteen minutes.

These two then retired, and another couple of champion abusers
stepped forward to “discuss” the matter. This kind of thing went
on for a considerable time, the abuse being of the most appalling
description, and directed mainly against the organs of the enemy’s
body (heart, liver, &c.), his ancestors, “his ox, his ass, and
everything that was his.” At length, when every conceivable thing
had been said that it was possible to say, the warriors drew near,
and at last some one threw a spear. This, of course, was the
signal for real action, and in a few minutes the engagement became
general. There was no strategy or tactics of any kind, every man
fighting single-handed.

But to return to the battle I was describing. After a very few
minutes’ fighting the enemy were utterly routed, and promptly
turned tail and fled from the scene of the encounter, leaving
behind them—after all the uproar and the flood of vilification—
only three of their warriors, and these not dead, but only more or
less badly wounded. Quarter being neither given nor expected in
these battles, the three prostrate blacks were promptly despatched
by the leader of my tribe, the coup de grace being given with a
waddy, or knobbed stick. The three bodies were then placed on
litters made out of spears and grass, and in due time carried into
our own camp.

There were so many unmistakable signs to presage what was coming
that I KNEW a cannibal feast was about to take place. But for
obvious reasons I did not protest against it, nor did I take any
notice whatever. The women (who do all the real work) fell on
their knees, and with their fingers scraped three long trenches in
the sand, each about seven feet long and three deep. Into each of
these ovens was placed one of the bodies of the fallen warriors,
and then the trench was filled up—firstly with stones, and then
with sand. On top of all a huge fire was built, and maintained
with great fierceness for about two hours. There was great
rejoicing during this period of cooking, and apparently much
pleasurable anticipation among the triumphant blacks. In due time
the signal was given, and the ovens laid open once more. I looked
in and saw that the bodies were very much burnt. The skin was
cracked in places and liquid fat was issuing forth… . But,
perhaps, the less said about this horrible spectacle the better.

With a yell, several warriors leaped into each trench and stuck
spears through the big “joints.” And the moment the roasted
carcasses were taken out of the trenches the whole tribe literally
fell upon them and tore them limb from limb. I saw mothers with a
leg or an arm surrounded by plaintive children, who were crying for
their portion of the fearsome dainty.

Others, who were considered to have taken more than their share,
were likewise fallen upon and their “joint” subdivided and hacked
to pieces with knives made from shells. The bodies were not cooked
all through, so that the condition of some of the revellers, both
during and after the orgy, may best be left to the imagination. A
more appalling, more ghastly, or more truly sickening spectacle it
is impossible for the mind of man to conceive. A great corroboree
was held after the feast, but, with my gorge rising and my brain
reeling, I crept to my own humpy and tried to shut out from my mind
the shocking inferno I had just been compelled to witness.

But let us leave so fearful a subject and consider something more
interesting and amusing.

CHAPTER VI

A weird duel—The tragedy of the baby whale—My boat is destroyed—

A ten miles’ swim—Gigantic prizes—Swimming in the whale’s head—I
make use of the visitors—A fight with an alligator—The old
craving—Bitter disappointment—My mysterious “flying spears”—Dog-like fidelity—I present my “card”—The desert of red sand.

The women of the tribe lived amicably enough together as a rule,
but of course they had their differences. They would quarrel about
the merits and demerits of their own families and countries; but
the greatest source of heartburning and trouble was the importation
of a new wife—especially if she chanced to be better looking than
the others. In such cases, woe to the comparatively pretty wife.

The women certainly had a novel way of settling their differences.

The two combatants would retire to some little distance, armed with

ONE STICK BETWEEN THEM. They would then stand face to face, and
one would bend forward meekly, whilst the other dealt her a truly
terrific blow between the shoulders or on the head—not with a cane
or a light stick, be it remembered, but a really formidable club.

The blow (which would be enough to kill an ordinary white woman)

would be borne with wonderful fortitude, and then the aggressor
would hand the club to the woman she had just struck.

The latter would then take a turn; and so it would go on, turn and
turn about, until one of the unfortunate, stoical creatures fell
bleeding and half-senseless to the earth. The thing was
magnificently simple. The woman who kept her senses longest, and
remained on her legs to the end, was the victor. There was no kind
of ill-feeling after these extraordinary combats, and the women
would even dress one another’s wounds.

I now come to an event of very great importance in my life.

Elsewhere I have spoken of my penchant for dugong hunting. Well,
one day this sport effectually put an end to all my prospects of
reaching civilisation across the sea. I went forth one morning,
accompanied by my ever-faithful Yamba and the usual admiring crowd
of blacks. In a few minutes we two were speeding over the sunlit
waters, my only weapon being the steel harpoon I had brought with
me from the island, and about forty or fifty feet of manilla rope.

When we were some miles from land I noticed a dark-looking object
on the surface of the water a little way ahead. Feeling certain it
was a dugong feeding on the well-known “grass,” I rose and hurled
my harpoon at it with all the force I could muster. Next moment,
to my amazement, the head of a calf whale was thrust agonisingly
into the air, and not until then did I realise what manner of
creature it was I had struck. This baby whale was about fifteen
feet long, and it “sounded” immediately on receiving my harpoon.

As I had enough rope, or what I considered enough, I did not cut
him adrift. He came up again presently, lashing the water with his
tail, and creating a tremendous uproar, considering his size. He
then darted off madly, dashing through the water like an arrow, and
dragging our boat at such a tremendous pace as almost to swamp us
in the foaming wash, the bow wave forming a kind of wall on each
side.

Up to this time I had no thought of danger, but just as the baby
whale halted I looked round, and saw to my horror that its colossal
mother had joined her offspring, and was swimming round and round
it like lightning, apparently greatly disturbed by its sufferings.

Before I could even cut the line or attempt to get out of the way,
the enormous creature caught sight of our little craft, and bore
down upon us like a fair-sized island rushing through the sea with
the speed of an express train. I shouted to Yamba, and we both
threw ourselves over the side into the now raging waters, and
commenced to swim away with long strokes, in order to get as far as
possible from the boat before the catastrophe came which we knew
was at hand. We had not got many yards before I heard a terrific
crash, and, looking back, I saw the enormous tail of the great
whale towering high out of the water, and my precious boat
descending in fragments upon it from a height of from fifteen feet
to twenty feet above the agitated waters. Oddly enough, the forepart of the boat remained fixed to the rope of the harpoon in the
calf. My first thought, even at so terrible a moment, and in so
serious a situation, was one of bitter regret for the loss of what

I considered the only means of reaching civilisation. Like a flash
it came back to me how many weary months of toil and hope and
expectancy I had spent over that darling craft; and I remembered,
too, the delirious joy of launching it, and the appalling dismay
that struck me when I realised that it was worse than useless to me
in the inclosed lagoon. These thoughts passed through my mind in a
few seconds.

At this time we had a swim of some TEN MILES before us, but
fortunately our predicament was observed from the land, and a crowd
of blacks put out in their catamarans to help us. Some of the
blacks, as I hinted before, always accompanied me down to the shore
on these trips. They never tired, I think, of seeing me handle my
giant “catamaran” and the (to them) mysterious harpoon.

After the mother whale had wreaked its vengeance upon my
unfortunate boat it rejoined its little one, and still continued to
swim round and round it at prodigious speed, evidently in a perfect
agony of concern. Fortunately the tide was in our favour, and we
were rapidly swept inshore, even when we floated listlessly on the
surface of the water. The sea was quite calm, and we had no fear
of sharks, being well aware that we would keep them away by
splashing in the water.

Before long, the catamarans came up with us, but although deeply
grateful for Yamba’s and my own safety, I was still greatly
distressed at the loss of my boat. Never once did this thought
leave my mind. I remembered, too, with a pang, that I had now no
tools with which to build another; and to venture out into the open
sea on a catamaran, probably for weeks, simply meant courting
certain destruction. I was a greater prisoner than ever.

My harpoon had evidently inflicted a mortal wound on the calf
whale, because as we looked we saw it lying exhausted on the
surface of the water, and being gradually swept nearer and nearer
the shore by the swift-flowing tide. The mother refused to leave
her little one however, and still continued to wheel round it
continuously, even when it had reached dangerously shallow water.

The result was that when the tide turned, both the mother and her
calf were left stranded high and dry on the beach, to the unbounded
delight and amazement of the natives, who swarmed round the
leviathans, and set up such a terrific uproar, that I verily
believe they frightened the mother to death. In her dying struggle
she lashed the water into a perfect fury with her tail, and even
made attempts to lift herself bodily up. Furious smoke-signals
were at once sent up to summon all the tribes in the surrounding
country—enemies as well as friends. Next day the carcasses were
washed farther still inshore—a thing for which the blacks gave me
additional credit.

I ought to mention here that the loss of my boat was in some
measure compensated for by the enormous amount of prestige which
accrued to me through this whale episode. To cut a long story
short, the natives fully believed that I HAD KILLED SINGLE-HANDED

AND BROUGHT ASHORE BOTH WHALES! And in the corroborees that
ensued, the poets almost went delirious in trying to find suitable
eulogiums to bestow upon the mighty white hunter. The mother whale
surpassed in size any I had ever seen or read about. I measured
her length by pacing, and I judged it to be nearly 150 feet. My
measurements may not have been absolutely accurate, but still the
whale was, I imagine, of record size. As she lay there on the
beach her head towered above me to a height of nearly fifteen feet.

Never can I forget the scene that followed, when the blacks from
the surrounding country responded to the smoke-signals announcing
the capture of the “great fish.” From hundreds of miles south came
the natives, literally in their thousands—every man provided with
his stone tomahawk and a whole armoury of shell knives. They
simply swarmed over the carcasses like vermin, and I saw many of
them staggering away under solid lumps of flesh weighing between
thirty and forty pounds. The children also took part in the
general feasting, and they too swarmed about the whales like a
plague of ants.

A particularly enterprising party of blacks cut an enormous hole in
the head of the big whale, and in the bath of oil that was inside
they simply wallowed for hours at a time, only to emerge in a
condition that filled me with disgust. There was no question of
priority or disputing as to whom the tit-bits of the whale should
go. Even the visitors were quite at liberty to take whatever
portion they could secure. For about a fortnight this cutting-up
and gorging went on, but long before this the stench from the
decomposing carcasses was so horrible as to be painfully noticeable
at my camp, over a mile away. Some of the flesh was cooked, but
most of it was eaten absolutely raw. The spectacle witnessed on
the beach would have been intensely comical were it not so
revolting. Many of the savages, both men and women, had gorged
themselves to such an extent as to be absolutely unable to walk;
and they rolled about on the sand, tearing at the ground in agony,
their stomachs distended in the most extraordinary and disgusting
manner. It may amuse you to know that smoke-signals were at once
sent up for all the “doctors” in the country, and these ministering
angels could presently be seen with their massage shells, rubbing
the distended stomachs of the sufferers as they lay on the beach.

I saw some men fairly howling with agony, but yet still devouring
enormous quantities of oil and blubber! Besides the massage
treatment (with the thumbs as well as shells), the “doctors”

administered a kind of pill, or pellet, of some green leaf, which
they first chewed in their own mouth and then placed in that of the
patient. So magical was this potent herb in its action, that I
feel sure it would make the fortune of an enterprising syndicate.

Other patients, who had obtained temporary relief through the kind
offices of the medicine-men, returned to the whales again, and had
another enormous gorge. In fact, the blacks behaved more like wild
beasts of the lowest order than men, and in a very short time—
considering the enormous bulk of the whales—nothing remained
except the immense bones.

On the other hand, the orgie had its uses from my point of view,
because I took advantage of the arrival of so many strange tribes
to make myself acquainted with their chiefs, their languages, and
their manners and customs, in the hope that these people might be
useful to me some day when I commenced my journey overland to
civilisation. For, of course, all hope of escape by sea had now to
be abandoned, since my boat was destroyed. Several days elapsed,
however, before I was able to remain in their presence without a
feeling of utter disgust. To be precise, I could not talk to them
before they ate, because they were so anxious to get at the food;
and after the feast they were too gorged with fat to be able to
talk rationally. In all my wanderings amongst the blacks I never
came across anything that interested them so much as a whale.

Soon after the loss of the boat, Yamba made me a small bark canoe
about fifteen feet long, but not more than fourteen inches wide,
and in this we undertook various little excursions together to the
various islands that studded the bay. The construction of this
little canoe was very interesting. Yamba, first of all, heated the
bark, and then turned the rough part underneath in order that the
interior might be perfectly smooth. She then SEWED up the ends,
finally giving the little craft a coat of resin, obtained by making
incisions in the gum-trees. Of course, I missed my own substantial
boat, and it was some little time before I grew accustomed to the
frail canoe, which necessitated the greatest possible care in
handling, and also on the part of the passengers generally.

One day I decided to go and explore one of the islands that studded

Cambridge Gulf, in search of a kind of shell mud-fish which I was
very partial to. I also wanted to make the acquaintance of the
bats or flying foxes I had seen rising in clouds every evening at
sunset. I required the skins of these curious creatures for
sandals. This would perhaps be a year after my advent amongst the
blacks. As usual, Yamba was my only companion, and we soon reached
a likely island. As I could find no suitable place for landing, I
turned the canoe up a small creek. From this course, however, my
companion strongly dissuaded me. Into the creek, nevertheless, we
went, and when I saw it was a hopeless impasse, I scrambled ashore
and waded through five inches or six inches of mud. The little
island was densely covered with luxuriant tropical vegetation, the
mangroves coming right down to the water’s edge; so that I had
actually to force my way through them to gain the top of the bank.

I then entered a very narrow track through the forest, the bush on
both sides being so dense as to resemble an impenetrable wall or
dense hedge. It is necessary to bear this in mind to realise what
followed. I had not gone many yards along this track, when I was
horrified to see, right in front of me, an enormous alligator!

This great reptile was shuffling along down the path towards me,
evidently making for the water, and it not only blocked my advance,
but also necessitated my immediate retreat. The moment the brute
caught sight of me he stopped, and began snapping his jaws
viciously. I confess I was quite nonplussed for the moment as to
how best to commence the attack upon this unexpected visitor. It
was impossible for me to get round him in any way, on account of
the dense bush on either side of the narrow forest track. I
decided, however, to make a bold dash for victory, having always in
mind the prestige that was so necessary to my existence among the
blacks. I therefore walked straight up to the evil-looking
monster; then, taking a short run, I leaped high into the air, shot
over his head, and landed on his scaly back, at the same time
giving a tremendous yell in order to attract Yamba, whom I had left
in charge of the boat.

The moment I landed on his back I struck the alligator with all my
force with my tomahawk, on what I considered the most vulnerable
part of his head. So powerful was my stroke, that I found to my
dismay that I could not get the weapon out of his head again.

While I was in this extraordinary situation—standing on the back
of an enormous alligator, and tugging at my tomahawk, embedded in
its head—Yamba came rushing up the path, carrying one of the
paddles, which, without a moment’s hesitation, she thrust down the
alligator’s throat as he turned to snap at her. She immediately
let go her hold and retreated. The alligator tried to follow her,
but the shaft of the paddle caught among some tree trunks and
stuck. In this way the monster was prevented from moving his head,
either backwards or forwards, and then, drawing my stiletto, I
blinded him in both eyes, afterwards finishing him leisurely with
my tomahawk, when at length I managed to release it. Yamba was
immensely proud of me after this achievement, and when we returned
to the mainland she gave her tribesmen a graphic account of my
gallantry and bravery. But she always did this. She was my
advance agent and bill-poster, so to say. I found in going into a
new country that my fame had preceded me; and I must say this was
most convenient and useful in obtaining hospitality, concessions,
and assistance generally. The part I had played in connection with
the death of the two whales had already earned for me the
admiration of the blacks—not only in my own tribe, but all over
the adjacent country. And after this encounter with the alligator
they looked upon me as a very great and powerful personage indeed.

We did not bring the dead monster back with us, but next day a
number of the blacks went over with their catamarans, and towed the
reptile back to the mainland, where it was viewed with open-mouthed
amazement by crowds of admiring natives. So great was the
estimation in which my prowess was held, that little scraps of the
dead alligator were distributed (as relics, presumably) among the
tribes throughout the whole of the surrounding country. Singularly
enough this last achievement of mine was considered much more
commendable than the killing of the whale, for the simple reason
that it sometimes happened they caught a whale themselves stranded
on the beach; whereas the killing of an alligator with their
primitive weapons was a feat never attempted. They chanted praises
in my honour at night, and wherever I moved, my performances with
the whales and alligator were always the first things to be sung.

Nor did I attempt to depreciate my achievements; on the contrary, I
exaggerated the facts as much as I possibly could. I described to
them how I had fought and killed the whale with my stiletto in
spite of the fact that the monster had smashed my boat. I told
them that I was not afraid of facing anything single-handed, and I
even went so far as to allege that I was good enough to go out
against a nation! My whole object was to impress these people with
my imaginary greatness, and I constantly made them marvel at my
prowess with the bow and arrow. The fact of my being able to bring
down a bird on the wing was nothing more nor less than a miracle to
them. I was given the name of “Winnimah” by these people, because
my arrows sped like lightning. Six of the alligator’s teeth I took
for myself, and made them into a circlet which I wore round my
head.

Some little time after this incident I decided to remove my
dwelling-place to the top of a headland on the other side of the
bay, some twenty miles away, where I thought I could more readily
discern any sail passing by out at sea. The blacks themselves, who
were well aware of my hopes of getting back to my own people, had
themselves suggested that I might find this a more likely place for
the purpose than the lowlying coast on which their tribe was then
encamped. They also pointed out to me, however, that I should find
it cold living in so exposed a position. But the hope of seeing
passing sails decided me, and one morning I took my departure, the
whole nation of blacks coming out in full force to bid us adieu. I
think the last thing they impressed upon me, in their peculiar
native way, was that they would always be delighted and honoured to
welcome me back among them. Yamba, of course, accompanied me, as
also did my dog, and we were escorted across the bay by a host of
my native friends in their catamarans. I pitched upon a fine bold
spot for our dwelling-place, but the blacks assured me that we
would find it uncomfortably cold and windy, to say nothing about
the loneliness, which I could not but feel after so much
intercourse with the friendly natives. I persisted, however, and
we at length pitched our encampment, on the bleak headland, which I
now know to be Cape Londonderry, the highest northern point of

Western Australia. Occasionally some of our black friends would
pay us a visit, but we could never induce them to locate their
village near us.

Day after day, day after day, I gazed wistfully over the sea for
hours at a time, without ever seeing a sail, and at last I began to
grow somewhat despondent, and sighed for the companionship of my
black friends once more. Yamba was unremitting in her endeavours
to make life pleasant for me and keep me well supplied with the
best of food; but I could see that she, too, did not like living on
this exposed and desolate spot. So, after a few weeks’ experience
of life there, I decided to return to my bay home, and later on
make preparations for a journey overland to a point on the

Australian coast, where I learned ships quite frequently passed.

The point in question was Somerset Point, at the extreme north of
the Cape York peninsula; and I had learnt of its existence from

Jensen when we were pearl-fishing. The blacks were delighted to
see me on my return, and I remained with them several months before
attempting my next journey. They were keenly anxious that I should
join them in their fighting expeditions, but I always declined, on
the ground that I was not a fighting man. The fact of the matter
was, that I could never hope to throw a spear with anything like
the dexterity they themselves possessed; and as spears were the
principal weapons used in warfare, I was afraid I would not show up
well at a critical moment. Moreover, the warriors defended
themselves so dexterously with shields as to be all but
invulnerable, whereas I had not the slightest idea of how to handle
a shield. And for the sake of my ever-indispensable prestige, I
could not afford to make myself ridiculous in their eyes. I always
took good care to let the blacks see me performing only those feats
which I felt morally certain I could accomplish, and accomplish to
their amazement.

So far I had won laurels enough with my mysterious arrows or

“flying spears,” as the natives considered them, and my prowess
with the harpoon and tomahawk was sung in many tribes. And not the
least awkward thing about my position was that I dared not even
attempt a little quiet practice in spear-throwing, for fear the
blacks should come upon me suddenly, when I would most certainly
lose caste. I had several narrow escapes from this serious
calamity, but most of them cannot be published here. I must tell
you, though, that the blacks, when drinking at a river or water-hole, invariably scoop up the water with their hands, and never put
their mouths right down close to the surface of the water. Well,
one day I was guilty of this solecism. I had been out on a hunting
expedition, and reached the water-hole with an intense burning
thirst. My mentor was not with me. I fell on my knees and fairly
buried my face in the life-giving fluid. Suddenly I heard murmurs
behind me. I turned presently and saw a party of my blacks
regarding me with horror. They said I drank like a kangaroo. But

Yamba soon came to the rescue, and explained away the dreadful
breach of etiquette, by telling them that I was not drinking, but
simply cooling my face; when we were alone she solemnly cautioned
me never to do it again.

The months passed slowly away, and I was still living the same
monotonous life among my blacks—accompanying them upon their
hunting expeditions, joining in their sports, and making periodical
trips inland with Yamba, in preparation for the great journey I
proposed to make overland to Cape York. When I spoke to my devoted
companion about my plans, she told me she was ready to accompany me
wherever I went—to leave her people and to be for ever by my side.

Right well I knew that she would unhesitatingly do these things.

Her dog-like fidelity to me never wavered, and I know she would
have laid down her life for me at any time.

Often I told her of my own home beyond the seas, and when I asked
her whether she would come with me, she would reply, “Your people
are my people, and your God (spirit) my God. I will go with you
wherever you take me.”

At length everything was ready, and I paid a final farewell, as I
thought, to my black friends in Cambridge Gulf, after a little over
eighteen months’ residence among them. They knew I was venturing
on a long journey overland to another part of the country many
moons distant, in the hope of being able to get into touch with my
own people; and though they realised they should never see me
again, they thought my departure a very natural thing. The night
before we left, a great corroboree was held in my honour. We had a
very affectionate leave-taking, and a body of the natives escorted
us for the first 100 miles or so of our trip. At last, however,

Yamba, myself, and the faithful dog were left to continue our
wanderings alone. The reliance I placed upon this woman by the way
was absolute and unquestioning. I knew that alone I could not live
a day in the awful wilderness through which we were to pass; nor
could any solitary white man. By this time, however, I had had
innumerable demonstrations of Yamba’s almost miraculous powers in
the way of providing food and water when, to the ordinary eye,
neither was forthcoming. I should have mentioned that before
leaving my black people I had provided myself with what I may term
a native passport—a kind of Masonic mystic stick, inscribed with
certain cabalistic characters. Every chief carried one of these
sticks. I carried mine in my long, luxuriant hair, which I wore

“bun” fashion, held in a net of opossum hair. This passport stick
proved invaluable as a means of putting us on good terms with the
different tribes we encountered. The chiefs of the blacks never
ventured out of their own country without one of these mysterious
sticks, neither did the native message-bearers. I am sure I should
not have been able to travel far without mine.

Whenever I encountered a strange tribe I always asked to be taken
before the chief, and when in his presence I presented my little
stick, he would at once manifest the greatest friendliness, and
offer us food and drink. Then, before I took my departure, he also
would inscribe his sign upon the message stick, handing it back to
me and probably sending me on to another tribe with an escort. It
often happened, however, that I was personally introduced to
another tribe whose “frontier” joined that of my late hosts, and in
such cases my passport was unnecessary.

At first the country through which our wanderings led us was hilly
and well wooded, the trees being particularly fine, many of them
towering up to a height of 150 feet or 200 feet. Our principal
food consisted of roots, rats, snakes, opossum, and kangaroo. The
physical conditions of the country were constantly changing as we
moved farther eastward, and Yamba’s ingenuity was often sorely
taxed to detect the whereabouts of the various roots necessary for
food. It was obviously unfair to expect her to be familiar with
the flora and fauna of every part of the great Australian

Continent. Sometimes she was absolutely nonplused, and had to stay
a few days with a tribe until the women initiated her into the best
methods of cooking the roots of the country. And often we could
not understand the language. In such cases, though, when spoken
words were unlike those uttered in Yamba’s country, we resorted to
a wonderful sign-language which appears to be general among the

Australian blacks. All that Yamba carried was a basket made of
bark, slung over her shoulder, and containing a variety of useful
things, including some needles made out of the bones of birds and
fish; a couple of light grinding-stones for crushing out of its
shell a very sustaining kind of nut found on the palm trees, &c.

Day after day we walked steadily on in an easterly direction,
guiding ourselves in the daytime by the sun, and in the evening by
opossum scratches on trees and the positions of the ant-hills,
which are always built facing the east. We crossed many creeks and
rivers, sometimes wading and at others time swimming.

Gradually we left the hilly country behind, and after about five or
six weeks’ tramping got into an extraordinary desert of red sand,
which gave off a dust from our very tracks that nearly suffocated
us. Each water-hole we came across now began to contain less and
less of the precious liquid, and our daily menu grew more and more
scanty, until at length we were compelled to live on practically
nothing but a few roots and stray rats. Still we plodded on,
finally striking a terrible spinifex country, which was
inconceivably worse than anything we had hitherto encountered. In
order to make our way through this spinifex (the terrible

“porcupine grass” of the Australian interior), we were bound to
follow the tracks made by kangaroos or natives, otherwise we should
have made no progress whatever. These tracks at times wandered
about zigzag fashion, and led us considerable distances out of our
course, but, all the same, we dare not leave them. Not only was
water all but unobtainable here, but our skin was torn with thorns
at almost every step. Yamba was terribly troubled when she found
she could no longer provide for my wants. Fortunately the dew fell
heavily at night, and a sufficient quantity would collect on the
foliage to refresh me somewhat in the morning. How eagerly would I
lick the precious drops from the leaves! Curiously enough, Yamba
herself up to this time did not seem distressed from lack of water;
but nothing about this marvellous woman surprised me. It took us
about ten days to pass through the awful spinifex desert, and for
at least eight days of that period we were virtually without water,
tramping through never-ending tracts of scrub, prickly grass, and
undulating sand-hills of a reddish colour. Often and often I
blamed myself bitterly for ever going into that frightful country
at all. Had I known beforehand that it was totally uninhabited I
certainly should not have ventured into it. We were still going
due east, but in consequence of the lack of water-holes, my heroic
guide thought it advisable to strike a little more north.

CHAPTER VII

The agonies of thirst—A ghastly drink—I ask Yamba to kill me—My
ministering angel—How Yamba caught opossum—The water witch—A
barometer of snakes—The coming deluge—The plunge into the Rapids-

-A waste of waters—A fearful situation—Barking alligators—

English-speaking natives—A ship at last—I abandon hope—The
deserted settlement.

By this time I began to feel quite delirious; I fear I was like a
baby in Yamba’s hands. She knew that all I wanted was water, and
became almost distracted when she could not find any for me. Of
herself she never thought. And yet she was full of strange
resources and devices. When I moaned aloud in an agony of thirst,
she would give me some kind of grass to chew; and although this
possessed no real moisture, yet it promoted the flow of saliva, and
thus slightly relieved me.

Things grew worse and worse, however, and the delirium increased.

Hour after hour—through the endless nights would that devoted
creature sit by my side, moistening my lips with the dew that
collected on the grass. On the fifth day without water I suffered
the most shocking agonies, and in my lucid moments gave myself up
for lost. I could neither stand nor walk, speak nor swallow. My
throat seemed to be almost closed up, and when I opened my eyes
everything appeared to be going round and round in the most dizzy
and sickening manner. My heart beat with choking violence, and my
head ached, so that I thought I was going mad. My bloodshot eyes

(so Yamba subsequently told me) projected from their sockets in the
most terrifying manner, and a horrible indescribable longing
possessed me to kill my faithful Bruno, in order to drink his
blood. My poor Bruno! As I write these humble lines, so lacking
in literary grace, I fancy I can see him lying by my side in that
glaring, illimitable wilderness, his poor, dry tongue lolling out,
and his piteous brown eyes fixed upon me with an expression of mute
appeal that added to my agony. The only thing that kept him from
collapsing altogether was the blood of some animal which Yamba
might succeed in killing.

Gradually I grew weaker and weaker, and at last feeling the end was
near, I crawled under the first tree I came across—never for a
moment giving a thought as to its species,—and prepared to meet
the death I now fervently desired. Had Yamba, too, given up, these
lines would never have been written. Amazing to relate, she kept
comparatively well and active, though without water; and in my most
violent paroxysm she would pounce upon a lizard or a rat, and give
me its warm blood to drink, while yet it lived. Then she would
masticate a piece of iguana flesh and give it to me in my mouth,
but I was quite unable to swallow it, greatly to her
disappointment. She must have seen that I was slowly sinking, for
at last she stooped down and whispered earnestly in my ear that she
would leave me for a little while, and go off in search of water.

Like a dream it comes back to me how she explained that she had
seen some birds passing overhead, and that if she followed in the
same direction she was almost certain to reach water sooner or
later.

I could not reply; but I felt it was a truly hopeless enterprise on
her part. And as I did not want her to leave me, I remember I held
out my tomahawk feebly towards her, and signed to her to come and
strike me on the head with it and so put an end to my dreadful
agonies. The heroic creature only smiled and shook her head
emphatically. She took the proffered weapon, however, and after
putting some distinguishing marks on my tree with it, she hurled it
some distance away from me. She then stooped and propped me
against the trunk of the tree; and then leaving my poor suffering
dog to keep me company, she set out on her lonely search with long,
loping strides of amazing vigour.

It was late in the afternoon when she took her departure; and I lay
there hour after hour, sometimes frantically delirious, and at
others in a state of semi-consciousness, fancying she was by my
side with shells brimming over with delicious water. I would rouse
myself with a start from time to time, but, alas! my Yamba was not
near me. During the long and deathly stillness of the night, the
dew came down heavily, and as it enveloped my bed, I fell into a
sound sleep, from which I was awakened some hours later by the same
clear and ringing voice that had addressed me on that still night
on my island sand-spit. Out upon the impressive stillness of the
air rang the earnest words: “Coupe l’arbre! Coupe l’arbre!”

I was quite conscious, and much refreshed by my sleep, but the
message puzzled me a great deal. At first I thought it must have
been Yamba’s voice, but I remembered that she did not know a word
of French; and when I looked round there was no one to be seen.

The mysterious message still rang in my ears, but I was far too
weak to attempt to cut the tree myself, I lay there in a state of
inert drowsiness until, rousing myself a little before dawn, I
heard the familiar footsteps of Yamba approaching the spot where I
lay. Her face expressed anxiety, earnestness, and joy.

In her trembling hands she bore a big lily leaf containing two or
three ounces of life-giving water. This I drank with gasping
eagerness, as you may suppose. My delirium had now entirely left
me, although I was still unable to speak. I signed to her to cut
the tree, as the voice in my dream had directed me. Without a word
of question Yamba picked up the tomahawk from where she had hurled
it, and then cut vigorously into the trunk, making a hole three or
four inches deep. It may seem astonishing to you, but it surprised
me in no wise when out from the hole there TRICKLED A CLEAR,

UNCERTAIN STREAM OF WATER, under which Yamba promptly held my
fevered head. This had a wonderfully refreshing effect upon me,
and in a short time I was able to speak feebly but rationally,
greatly to the delight of my faithful companion. As, however, I
was still too weak to move, I indulged in another and far sounder
sleep. I do not know the scientific name of that wonderful

Australian tree which saved my life, but believe it is well known
to naturalists. I have heard it called the “bottle tree,” from the
shape of the trunk. All through that terrible night, while Yamba
was far away searching for water, Bruno had never left my side,
looking into my face wistfully, and occasionally licking my body
sympathetically with his poor, parched tongue. Whilst I was asleep
the second time, Yamba went off with the dog in search of food, and
returned with a young opossum, which was soon frizzling in an
appetising way on a tripod of sticks over a blazing fire. I was
able to eat a little of the flesh, and we obtained all the water we
wanted from our wonderful tree. Of course, Yamba was unacquainted
with the fact that water was stored in its interior. As a rule,
her instinct might be depended upon implicitly; and even after
years of her companionship I used to be filled with wonder at the
way in which she would track down game and find honey. She would
glance at a tree casually, and discern on the bark certain minute
scratches, which were quite invisible to me, even when pointed out.

She would then climb up like a monkey, and return to the ground
with a good-sized opossum, which would be roasted in its skin, with
many different varieties of delicious roots.

When I had quite recovered, Yamba told me she had walked many miles
during the night, and had finally discovered a water-hole in a new
country, for which she said we must make as soon as I was
sufficiently strong. Fortunately this did not take very long, and
on reaching the brink of the water-hole we camped beside it for
several days, in order to recuperate. I must say that the water we
found here did not look very inviting—it was, in fact, very slimy
and green in colour; but by the time we took our departure there
was not a drop left. Yamba had a method of filtration which
excited my admiration. She dug another hole alongside the one
containing the water, leaving a few inches of earth between them,
through which the water would percolate, and collect in hole
perfectly filtered.

At other times, when no ordinary human being could detect the
presence of water, she would point out to me a little knob of clay
on the ground in an old dried-up water-hole. This, she told me,
denoted the presence of a frog, and she would at once thrust down a
reed about eighteen inches long, and invite me to suck the upper
end, with the result that I imbibed copious draughts of delicious
water.

At the water-hole just described birds were rather plentiful, and
when they came down to drink, Yamba knocked them over without
difficulty. They made a very welcome addition to our daily bill of
fare. Her mode of capturing the birds was simplicity itself. She
made herself a long covering of grass that completely enveloped
her, and, shrouded in this, waited at the edge of the water-hole
for the birds to come and drink. Then she knocked over with a
stick as many as she required. In this way we had a very pleasant
spell of rest for four or five days. Continuing our journey once
more, we pushed on till in about three weeks we came to a well-wooded country, where the eucalyptus flourished mightily and water
was plentiful; but yet, strange to say, there was very little game
in this region. Soon after this, I noticed that Yamba grew a
little anxious, and she explained that as we had not come across
any kangaroos lately, nor any blacks, it was evident that the wet
season was coming on. We therefore decided to steer for higher
ground, and accordingly went almost due north for the next few
days, until we reached the banks of a big river—the Roper River,
as I afterwards found out—where we thought it advisable to camp.

This would probably be sometime in the month of December.

One day I saw a number of small snakes swarming round the foot of a
tree, and was just about to knock some of them over with my stick,
when Yamba called out to me excitedly not to molest them. They
then began to climb the tree, and she explained that this clearly
indicated the advent of the wet season. “I did not wish you to
kill the snakes,” she said, “because I wanted to see if they would
take refuge in the trees from the coming floods.”

Up to this time, however, there had not been the slightest
indication of any great change in the weather. Many months must
have elapsed since rain had fallen in these regions, for the river
was extremely low between its extraordinarily high banks, and the
country all round was dry and parched; but even as we walked, a
remarkable phenomenon occurred, which told of impending changes. I
was oppressed with a sense of coming evil. I listened intently
when Yamba requested me to do so, but at first all I could hear was
a curious rumbling sound, far away in the distance. This noise
gradually increased in volume, and came nearer and nearer, but
still I was utterly unable to account for it. I also noticed that
the river was becoming strangely agitated, and was swirling along
at ever-increasing speed. Suddenly an enormous mass of water came
rushing down with a frightful roar, in one solid wave, and then it
dawned upon me that it must have already commenced raining in the
hills, and the tributaries of the river were now sending down their
floods into the main stream, which was rising with astonishing
rapidity. In the course of a couple of hours it had risen between
thirty and forty feet. Yamba seemed a little anxious, and
suggested that we had better build a hut on some high ground and
remain secure in that locality, without attempting to continue our
march while the rains lasted; and it was evident they were now upon
us.

We therefore set to work to construct a comfortable little shelter
of bark, fastened to a framework of poles by means of creepers and
climbing plants. Thus, by the time the deluge was fairly upon us,
we were quite snugly ensconced. We did not, however, remain indoors throughout the whole of the day, but went in and out, hunting
for food and catching game just as usual; the torrential rain which
beat down upon our naked bodies being rather a pleasant experience
than otherwise. At this time we had a welcome addition to our food
in the form of cabbage-palms and wild honey. We also started
building a catamaran, with which to navigate the river when the
floods had subsided. Yamba procured a few trunks of very light
timber, and these we fastened together with long pins of hardwood,
and then bound them still more firmly together with strips of
kangaroo hide. We also collected a stock of provisions to take
with us—kangaroo and opossum meat, of course; but principally wild
honey, cabbage-palm, and roots of various kinds. These
preparations took us several days, and by the time we had arranged
everything for our journey the weather had become settled once
more. Yamba remarked to me that if we simply drifted down the

Roper River we should be carried to the open sea; nor would we be
very long, since the swollen current was now running like a mill-race. Our catamaran, of course, afforded no shelter of any kind,
but we carried some sheets of bark to form seats for ourselves and
the dog.

At length we pushed off on our eventful voyage, and no sooner had
we got fairly into the current than we were carried along with
prodigious rapidity, and without the least exertion on our part,
except in the matter of steering. This was done by means of
paddles from the side of the craft. We made such rapid progress
that I felt inclined to go on all night, but shortly after dusk

Yamba persuaded me to pull inshore and camp on the bank until
morning, because of the danger of travelling at night among the
logs and other wreckage that floated about on the surface of the
water.

We passed any number of submerged trees, and on several of these
found snakes coiled among the branches. Some of these reptiles we
caught and ate. About the middle of the second day we heard a
tremendous roar ahead, as though there were rapids in the bed of
the river. It was now impossible to pull the catamaran out of its
course, no matter how hard we might have striven, the current being
absolutely irresistible. The banks narrowed as the rapids were
reached, with the result that the water in the middle actually
became CONVEX, so tremendous was the rush in that narrow gorge.

Yamba cried out to me to lie flat on the catamaran, and hold on as
tightly as I could until we reached smooth water again. This she
did herself, seizing hold of the dog also.

Nearer and nearer we were swept to the great seething caldron of
boiling and foaming waters, and at last, with a tremendous splash
we entered the terrifying commotion. We went right under, and so
great was the force of the water, that had I not been clinging
tenaciously to the catamaran I must infallibly have been swept away
to certain death. Presently, however, we shot into less troubled
waters and then continued our course, very little the worse for
having braved these terrible rapids. Had our craft been a dug-out
boat, as I originally intended it to be, we must inevitably have
been swamped. Again we camped on shore that night, and were off at
an early hour next morning. As we glided swiftly on, I noticed
that the river seemed to be growing tremendously wide. Yamba
explained that we were now getting into very flat country, and
therefore the great stretch of water was a mere flood. She also
prophesied a rather bad time for us, as we should not be able to go
ashore at night and replenish our stock of provisions. Fortunately
we had a sufficient supply with us on the catamaran to last at
least two or three days longer. The last time we landed Yamba had
stocked an additional quantity of edible roots and smoked meats,
and although we lost a considerable portion of these in shooting
the rapids, there still remained enough for a few days’ supply.

In consequence of the ever-increasing width of the river, I found
it a difficult matter to keep in the channel where the current was,
so I gave up the steering paddle to Yamba, who seemed instinctively
to know what course to take.

On and on we went, until at length the whole country as far as the
eye could reach was one vast sea, extending virtually to the
horizon; its sluggish surface only broken by the tops of the
submerged trees. One day we sighted a number of little islets some
distance ahead, and then we felt we must be nearing the mouth of
the river. The last day or two had been full of anxiety and
inconvenience for us, for we had been simply drifting aimlessly on,
without being able to land and stretch our cramped limbs or indulge
in a comfortable sleep. Thus the sight of the islands was a great
relief to us, and my ever-faithful and considerate companion
remarked that as we had nothing to fear now, and I was weary with
my vigil of the previous night, I had better try and get a little
sleep. Accordingly I lay down on the catamaran, and had barely
extended my limbs when I fell fast asleep. I awoke two or three
hours later, at mid-day, and was surprised to find that our
catamaran was not moving. I raised myself up, only to find that we
had apparently drifted among the tops of a ring of trees rising
from a submerged island. “Halloa!” I said to Yamba, “are we
stuck?” “No,” she replied quietly, “but look round.”

You may judge of my horror and amazement when I saw outside the
curious ring of tree-tops, scores of huge alligators peering at us
with horrid stolidity through the branches, some of them snapping
their capacious jaws with a viciousness that left no doubt as to
its meaning. Yamba explained to me that she had been obliged to
take refuge in this peculiar but convenient shelter, because the
alligators seemed to be swarming in vast numbers in that part of
the river. She had easily forced a way for the catamaran through
the branches, and once past, had drawn them together again. The
ferocious monsters could certainly have forced their way into the
inclosure after us, but they didn’t seem to realise that such a
thing was possible, apparently being quite content to remain
outside. Judge, then, our position for yourself—with a scanty
food supply, on a frail platform of logs, floating among the tree-tops, and literally besieged by crowds of loathsome alligators!

Nor did we know how long our imprisonment was likely to last. Our
poor dog, too, was terribly frightened, and sat whining and
trembling in a most pitiable way in spite of reassuring words and
caresses from Yamba and myself. I confess that I was very much
alarmed, for the monsters would occasionally emit a most peculiar
and terrifying sound—not unlike the roar of a lion. Hour after
hour we sat there on the swaying catamaran, praying fervently that
the hideous reptiles might leave us, and let us continue our
journey in peace. As darkness began to descend upon the vast waste
of waters, it occurred to me to make a bold dash through the
serried ranks of our besiegers, but Yamba restrained me, telling me
it meant certain death to attempt to run the gantlet under such
fearsome circumstances.

Night came on. How can I describe its horrors? Even as I write, I
seem to hear the ceaseless roars of those horrible creatures, and
the weird but gentle lappings of the limitless waste that extended
as far as the eye could reach. Often I was tempted to give up in
despair, feeling that there was no hope whatever for us. Towards
morning, however, the alligators apparently got on the scent of
some floating carcasses brought down by the floods, and one and all
left us. Some little time after the last ugly head had gone under,
the catamaran was sweeping swiftly and noiselessly down the stream
again.

We made straight for a little island some distance ahead of us, and
found it uninhabited. Black and white birds, not quite so large as
pigeons, were very plentiful, as also were eggs. Soon my Yamba had
a nice meal ready for me, and then we lay down for a much-needed
rest. After this we steered for a large island some nine or ten
miles distant, and as we approached we could see that this one WAS
inhabited, from the smoke-signals the natives sent up the moment
they caught sight of us.

As we came nearer we could see the blacks assembling on the beach
to meet us, but, far from showing any friendliness, they held their
spears poised threateningly, and would no doubt have thrown them
had I not suddenly jumped to my feet and made signs that I wished
to sit down with them—to parley with them. They then lowered
their spears, and we landed; but to my great disappointment neither

Yamba nor I could understand one word of their language, which was
totally different from the dialect of Yamba’s country. Our first
meeting was conducted in the usual way—squatting down on our
haunches, and then drawing nearer and nearer until we were able to
rub noses on one another’s shoulders. I then explained by means of
signs that I wanted to stay with them a few days, and I was
inexpressibly relieved to find that my little passport stick (which
never left my possession for a moment), was recognised at once, and
proved most efficacious generally. After this I became more
friendly with my hosts, and told them by signs that I was looking
for white people like myself, whereupon they replied I should have
to go still farther south to find them. They took us to their
camp, and provided us with food, consisting mainly of fish, shell-fish, and roots. So far as I could ascertain, there were no
kangaroo or opossum on the island. After two or three days, I
thought it time to be continuing our journey; but feeling convinced
that I must be in the vicinity of the Cape York Peninsula—instead
of being on the west coast of the Gulf of Carpentaria—I decided
not to go south at all, but to strike due north, where I felt
certain Somerset Point lay; and I also resolved to travel by sea
this time, the blacks having presented me with a very unsubstantial

“dug-out” canoe. Leaving behind us the catamaran that had brought
us so many hundreds of miles, we set out on our travels once more—
taking care, however, never to lose sight of the coast-line on
account of our frail craft. We passed several beautiful islands,
big and little, and on one that we landed I came across some native
chalk drawings on the face of the rock. They depicted rude figures
of men—I don’t remember any animals—but were not nearly so well
done as the drawings I had seen in caves up in the Cape Londonderry
district.

We also landed from time to time on the mainland, and spoke with
the chiefs of various tribes. They were all hostile at first. On
one occasion we actually met one or two blacks who spoke a few
words of English. They had evidently been out with pearlers at
some time in their lives, but had returned to their native wilds
many years before our visit. I asked them if they knew where white
men were to be found, and they pointed east (Cape York), and also
indicated that the whites were many moons’ journey away from us. I
was sorely puzzled. A glance at a map of Australia will enable the
reader to realise my great blunder. Ignorant almost of Australian
geography I fancied, on reaching the western shores of the Gulf of

Carpentaria, that I had struck the Coral Sea, and that all I had to
do was to strike north to reach Somerset, the white settlement I
had heard about from the pearlers. I felt so confident Cape York
lay immediately to the north, that I continued my course in that
direction, paddling all day and running inshore to camp at night.

We lived mainly on shell-fish and sea-birds’ eggs at this time, and
altogether life became terribly wearisome and monotonous. This,
however, was mainly owing to my anxiety.

About a fortnight after leaving the mouth of the Roper River we
came to a place which I now know to be Point Dale. We then steered
south into a beautiful landlocked passage which lies between the
mainland and Elcho Island, and which at the time I took to be the
little strait running between Albany Island and Cape York. I
steered south-west in consequence; and after a time, as I did not
sight the points I was on the look-out for, I felt completely
nonplused. We landed on Elcho Island and spent a day or two there.

Being still under the impression that Cape York was higher up, I
steered west, and soon found myself in a very unpleasant region.

We explored almost every bay and inlet we came across, but of
course always with the same disheartening result. Sometimes we
would come near being stranded on a sandbank, and would have to
jump overboard and push our craft into deeper water. At others,
she would be almost swamped in a rough sea, but still we stuck to
our task, and after passing Goulbourn Island we followed the coast.

Then we struck north until we got among a group of islands, and
came to Croker Island, which goes direct north and south. Day
after day we kept doggedly on, hugging the shore very closely,
going in and out of every bay, and visiting almost every island,
yet never seeing a single human being. We were apparently still
many hundreds of miles away from our destination. To add to the
wretchedness of the situation, my poor Yamba, who had been so
devoted, so hardy, and so contented, at length began to manifest
symptoms of illness, and complained gently of the weariness of it
all. “You are looking,” she would say, “for a place that does not
exist. You are looking for friends of whose very existence you are
unaware.” I would not give in, however, and persuaded her that all
would be well in time, if only she would continue to bear with me.

Both of us were terribly cramped in the boat; and by way of
exercise one or the other would occasionally jump overboard and
have a long swim. Whenever we could we landed at night.

One morning, shortly after we had begun our usual trip for the day,
and were rounding a headland, I was almost stupefied to behold in
front of me the masts of a boat (which I afterwards found to be a

Malay proa), close inshore. The situation, in reality, was
between Croker’s Island and the main, but at the time I thought
that I had at length reached Somerset. I sprang to my feet in a
state of the greatest excitement. “Thank God! thank God!” I
shouted to Yamba; “we are saved at last!—saved—saved—saved!” As

I shouted, I pulled the canoe round and made for the vessel with
all possible despatch. We very soon came up with her, and found
her almost stranded, in consequence of the lowness of the tide. I
promptly clambered aboard, but failed to find a soul. I thought
this rather strange, but as I could see a hut not very far away,
close to the beach, I steered towards it. This little dwelling,
too, was uninhabited, though I found a number of trays of fish
lying about, which afterwards I found to be beche-de-mer being
dried and smoked. Suddenly, while Yamba and I were investigating
the interior of the hut, a number of Malays unexpectedly appeared
on the scene, and I then realised I had had the good fortune to
come across a Malay beche-de-mer expedition.

The fishermen were exceedingly surprised at seeing Yamba and me;
but when they found I could speak their language a little they
evinced every sign of delight, and forthwith entertained us most
hospitably on board their craft, which was a boat of ten or fifteen
tons. They told me they had come from the Dutch islands south of

Timor, and promptly made me an offer that set my heart beating
wildly. They said they were prepared to take me back to Kopang, if

I wished; and I, on my part, offered to give them all the pearl
shells left on my little island in the Sea of Timor—the latitude
of which I took good care not to divulge—on condition that they
called there. They even offered Yamba a passage along with me;
but, to my amazement and bitter disappointment, she said she did
not wish to go with them. She trembled as though with fear. She
was afraid that when once we were on board, the Malays would kill
me and keep her.

One other reason for this fear I knew, but it in no way mitigated
my acute grief at being obliged to decline what would probably be
my only chance of returning to civilisation. For this I had pined
day and night for four or five years, and now that escape was
within my grasp I was obliged to throw it away. For let me
emphatically state, that even if civilisation had been but a mile
away, I would not have gone a yard towards it without that devoted
creature who had been my salvation, not on one occasion only, but
practically every moment of my existence.

With passionate eagerness I tried to persuade Yamba to change her
mind, but she remained firm in her decision; and so, almost choking
with bitter regret, and in a state of utter collapse, I had to
decline the offer of the Malays. We stayed with them, however, a
few weeks longer, and at length they accompanied me to a camp of
black fellows near some lagoons, a little way farther south of
their own camp. Before they left, they presented me with a
quantity of beche-de-mer, or sea-slugs, which make most excellent
soup. At the place indicated by the Malays, which was in Raffles

Bay, the chief spoke quite excellent English. One of his wives
could even say the Lord’s Prayer in English, though, of course, she
did not know what she was talking about. “Captain Jack Davis,” as
he called himself, had been for some little time on one of her

Majesty’s ships, and he told me that not many marches away there
was an old European settlement; he even offered to guide me there,
if I cared to go. He first led me to an old white settlement in

Raffles Bay, called, I think, Fort Wellington, where I found some
large fruit-trees, including ripe yellow mangoes. There were,
besides, raspberries, strawberries, and Cape gooseberries.

Needless to remark, all this made me very happy and contented, for

I felt I must now be getting near the home of some white men. I
thought that, after all, perhaps Yamba’s refusal to go with the

Malays was for the best, and with high hopes I set out with Captain

Davis for another settlement he spoke of. This turned out to be

Port Essington, which we reached in two or three days. Another
cruel blow was dealt me here.

You can perhaps form some idea of my poignant dismay and
disappointment on finding that this dreary-looking place of swamps
and marshes was quite deserted, although there were still a number
of ruined brick houses, gardens, and orchards there. The blacks
told me that at one time it had been one of the most important
penal settlements in Australia, but had to be abandoned on account
of the prevalence of malarial fever arising from the swamps in the
neighbourhood. I came across a number of graves, which were
evidently those of the exiled settlers; and one of the wooden
headstones bore the name of Captain Hill (I think that was the
name). I have an idea that the fence round this old cemetery still
remained. There was food in abundance at this place—raspberries,
bananas, and mangoes grew in profusion; whilst the marshes were
inhabited by vast flocks of geese, ducks, white ibis, and other
wild-fowl. Indeed in the swamps the birds rose in such prodigious
numbers as actually to obscure the face of the sun. Here for the
first time I saw web-footed birds perched in trees.

The blacks had a very peculiar method of catching water-fowl. They
would simply wade through the reeds into the water almost up to
their necks, and then cover their heads with a handful of reeds.

Remaining perfectly still, they would imitate the cry of different
wild-fowl. Then at a convenient opportunity, they would simply
seize a goose or a duck by the leg, and drag it down under the
water until it was drowned. The number of water-fowl caught in
this way by a single black fellow was truly astonishing.

After having remained a fortnight at Port Essington itself, we
returned to Raffles Bay, where Yamba and I made a camp among the
blacks and took up our residence among them; for Captain Davis had
told me that ships called there occasionally, and it was possible
that one might call soon from Port Darwin. The vessels, he added,
came for buffalo meat—of which more hereafter. I had decided to
remain among these people some little time, because they knew so
much about Europeans, and I felt sure of picking up knowledge which
would prove useful to me.

CHAPTER VIII

In the throes of fever—A ghastly discovery—Pitiful relics—A
critical moment—Yamba in danger—A blood bath—A luxury indeed—

Signs of civilisation—The great storm—Drifting, drifting—Yamba’s
mysterious glee—A dreadful shock—“Welcome home!”—My official
protectors—Myself as a cannibal war chief—Preparations for
battle—A weird apparition—Generosity to the vanquished—The old
desire.

I had not been established in this camp many days, however, before

I was struck down, for the first time, with a terrible attack of
malarial fever, probably produced by the many hours I had spent
wading in the swamps at Port Essington. There were the usual
symptoms—quick flushings and fever heats, followed by violent fits
of shivering, which no amount of natural warmth could mitigate. My
faithful Yamba was terribly distressed at my condition, and waited
upon me with most tender devotion; but in spite of all that could
be done for me, I grew gradually weaker, until in the course of a
few days I became wildly delirious. The blacks, too, were very
good to me, and doctored me, in their quaint native way, with
certain leaves and powders. All to no purpose, however; and for
several days I was even unable to recognise my Yamba. Then the
fever subsided somewhat, and I was left as weak and helpless as a
little child.

It was some time before I quite recovered from the fever; and I was
frequently seized with distressing fits of shivering. I also
experienced an overwhelming desire for a drink of milk; why, I am
unable to say. Therefore, when some of the blacks told me that
wild buffalo were to be found in the neighbourhood—beasts which
had formerly belonged to settlers, but were now run wild—I
resolved, when sufficiently strong, to try and capture one of the
cows for the sake of its milk. Captain Davis ridiculed the idea,
and assured me that it was only possible to slay one with a rifle;
but I determined to see what I could do.

Yamba, of course, accompanied me on my expedition, and her
bushmanship was altogether quite indispensable. We came upon
buffalo tracks near a large water-hole, and here we each climbed a
gum-tree and awaited the arrival of our prey. We waited a long
time, but were at length rewarded by seeing a big cow buffalo and
her calf wandering leisurely in our direction. My only weapons
were a lasso made out of green kangaroo hide, fixed to the end of a
long pole; and my bow and arrows. I slid down the tree a little
way, and when the calf was near enough, I gently slipped the noose
over its neck, and promptly made it a prisoner under the very nose
of its astonished mother, who bellowed mournfully. My success so
elated Yamba that she, too, slid down from her hiding-place, and
was making her way over to me and the calf, when suddenly an
enormous bull, which we had not previously seen, rushed at her at
full speed. Yamba instantly realised her danger, and swarmed up a
tree again like lightning, just as the great brute was upon her. I
called out to her to attract the attention of the old bull whilst I
attended to the mother and calf. I dropped my pole to which the
lasso was attached, and allowed the little one to walk quickly away
with it; but, as I anticipated, the trailing shaft soon caught
between the stumps of some trees, and made the calf a more secure
prisoner than ever. It was a curious repetition of the story of
the two whales. The mother walked round and round, and appeared to
be in the greatest distress. She never left her little one’s side,
but continued to bellow loudly, and lick the calf to coax it away.

Quietly sliding down my tree, I made my way to where Yamba was
still holding the attention of the bull—a fiery brute who was
pawing the ground with rage at the foot of her tree. I had fitted
an arrow to my bow, and was preparing to shoot, when,
unfortunately, the bull detected the noise of my approach, and
rushed straight at me. I confess it was rather a trying moment,
but I never lost my head, feeling confident of my skill with the
bow—which I had practised off and on ever since I had left school
at Montreux. I actually waited until the charging monster was
within a few paces, and then I let fly. So close was he that not
much credit is due to me for accurate aim. The arrow fairly
transfixed his right eye, causing him to pull up on his haunches,
and roar with pain.

Yamba, full of anxiety, hurried down her tree; but she had scarcely
reached the ground when the baffled bull wheeled and charged her,
with more fury than ever. She simply glided behind a tree, and
then I showed myself and induced the bull to charge me once more.

Again I waited until he was almost upon me, and then I sent another
arrow into his other eye, blinding him completely. On this, the
poor brute brought up sharp, and commenced to back in an uncertain
way, bellowing with pain. I forgot all my fever in the excitement,
and rushing upon the beast with my tomahawk, I dealt him a blow on
the side of the head that made him stagger. I brought him to the
earth with two or three more blows, and a few minutes later had
administered the coup-de-grace. No sooner was the big bull dead
than I determined to test the efficacy of a very popular native
remedy for fever—for shivering fits still continued to come upon
me at most awkward times, usually late in the day. No matter how
much grass poor Yamba brought me as covering, I never could get
warm, and so now I thought I would try some animal heat.

Scarce had life left the body of the prostrate bull before I ripped
open the carcass between the fore and hind legs; and after
remarking to Yamba, “I am going to have heat this time,” I crawled
into the interior. My head, however, was protruding from the
buffalo’s chest. Yamba understood perfectly well what I was doing;
and when I told her I was going to indulge in a long sleep in my
curious resting-place, she said she would keep watch and see that I
was not disturbed. I remained buried in the bull’s interior for
the rest of the day and all through the night. Next morning, to my
amazement, I found I was a prisoner, the carcass having got cold
and rigid, so that I had literally to be dug out. As I emerged I
presented a most ghastly and horrifying spectacle. My body was
covered with congealed blood, and even my long hair was all matted
and stiffened with it. But never can I forget the feeling of
exhilaration and strength that took possession of me as I stood
there looking at my faithful companion. I WAS ABSOLUTELY CURED—a
new man, a giant of strength! I make a present of the cure to the
medical profession.

Without delay I made my way down to the lagoon and washed myself
thoroughly, scrubbing myself with a kind of soapy clay, and
afterwards taking a run in order to get dry. This extraordinary
system of applying the carcass of a freshly killed animal is
invariably resorted to by the natives in case of serious illness,
and they look upon it as an all but infallible cure. Certainly it
was surprisingly efficacious in my own case.

Next day we directed our attention to the capture of the cow, which
was still wandering around her imprisoned little one, and only
leaving it for a few minutes at a time in order to get food. I
constructed a small fence or inclosure of sticks, and into this we
managed to drive the cow. We then kept her for two days without
food and water, in order to tame her, and did not even let her
little calf come near her. We then approached her, and found her
perfectly subdued, and willing to take food and water from us
precisely as though she were the gentlest Alderney.

I found I was even able to milk her; and I can assure you that I
never tasted anything more delicious in my life than the copious
droughts of fresh milk I indulged in on that eventful morning. In
fact, I practically lived on nothing else for the next few days,
and it pulled me round in a most surprising way. The flesh of the
dead buffalo I did not touch myself, but handed it over to the
blacks, who were vastly impressed by my prowess as a mighty hunter.

They themselves had often tried to kill buffalo with their spears,
but had never succeeded. I removed the bull’s hide, and made a big
rug out of it, which I found very serviceable indeed in subsequent
wet seasons. It was as hard as a board, and nearly half an inch
thick.

When I returned to “Captain Davis” and the rest of my friends at

Raffles Bay, I was quite well and strong once more, and I stayed
with them three or four months, hunting almost every day (there
were even wild ponies and English cattle—of course, relics of the
old settlement), and picking up all the information I could. I had
many conversations with Davis himself, and he told me that I should
probably find white men at Port Darwin, which he said was between
three and four hundred miles away. The tribe at Port Essington, I
may mention, only numbered about fifty souls. This was about the
year 1868. Captain Davis—who was passionately fond of tobacco,
and would travel almost any distance to obtain an ounce or two from
the Malay beche-de-mer fishers—pointed out to me a blazed tree
near his camp on which the following inscription was cut:-

LUDWIG LEICHHARDT,

Overland from Sydney,

1847.

It was therefore evident that this district had already been
visited by a white man; and the fact that he had come overland
filled me with hopes that some day I, too, might return to
civilisation in the same way. The English-speaking black chief
assured me that his father had acted as guide to Leichhardt, but
whether the latter got back safely to Sydney again he never knew.

The white traveller, he said, left Port Essington in a ship.

Having considered all things, I decided to attempt to reach Port

Darwin by boat, in the hope of finding Europeans living there. At
first, I thought of going overland, but in discussing my plans with

“Captain Davis,” he told me that I would have to cross swamps,
fords, creeks, and rivers, some of which were alive with
alligators. He advised me to go by water, and also told me to be
careful not to be drawn into a certain large bay I should come
across, because of the alligators that swarmed on its shores. The
bay that he warned me against was, I think, Van Dieman’s Gulf. He
told me to keep straight across the bay, and then pass between

Melville Island and the main. He fitted me out with a good stock
of provisions, including a quantity of beche-de-mer, cabbage-palm,
fruit, &c. I arranged my buffalo skin over my provisions as a
protection, turtle-back fashion. Our preparations completed, Yamba
and I and the dog pushed out into the unknown sea in our frail
canoe, which was only about fifteen feet long and fourteen inches
wide. Of course, we kept close inshore all the time, and made
pretty good progress until we passed Apsley Strait, avoiding the
huge Van Dieman’s Gulf, with its alligator-infested rivers and
creeks. We must have been close to Port Darwin when, with little
or no warning, a terrific storm arose, and quickly carried us out
to sea in a south-westerly direction. In a moment our frail little
craft was partially swamped, and Yamba and I were compelled to jump
overboard and hang on to the gunwale on either side to prevent it
from being overwhelmed altogether. This was about a fortnight
after I left Captain Davis. We knew that if we were swamped, all
our belongings, including my poor Bruno, my live geese, water, and
other provisions, would be lost in the raging sea. The night that
followed was perhaps one of the most appalling experiences that
ever befell me; but I had by this time become so inured to terrible
trials that I merely took it as a matter of course.

Imagine for yourself the scene. The giant waves are rolling
mountains high; the darkness of night is gathering round us fast,
and I and my heroic wife are immersed in the tremendous sea,
hanging on for dear life to a little dug-out canoe only fourteen
inches wide. Although we were soon thoroughly exhausted with our
immersion in the water, we dared not climb aboard. Will it be
believed that ALL NIGHT LONG we were compelled to remain in the
sea, clinging to the canoe, half drowned, and tossed about like the
insignificant atoms we were in the midst of the stupendous waves,
which were literally ablaze with phosphorescent light? Often as
those terrible hours crawled by, I would have let go my hold and
given up altogether were it not for Yamba’s cheery and encouraging
voice, which I heard above the terrific roar of the storm, pointing
out to me how much we had been through already, and how many
fearful dangers we had safely encountered together. It seemed to
me like the end of everything. I thought of a certain poem
relating to a man in a desperate situation, written, I believe, by
an American, whose name I could not remember. It described the
heart-breaking efforts made by a slave to obtain his freedom. How
bloodhounds were put upon his track; how he is at last cornered in
a swamp, and as he looks helplessly up at the stars he asks
himself, “Is it life, or is it death?” As I hung on to the little
dug-out, chilled to the very marrow, and more than half drowned by
the enormous seas, I recalled the whole poem and applied the
slave’s remarks to myself. “Can it be possible,” I said, “after
all the struggles I have made against varying fortune, that I am to
meet death now?” I was in absolute despair. Towards the early
hours of the morning Yamba advised me to get into the canoe for a
spell, but she herself remained hanging on to the gunwale, trying
to keep the head of the little canoe before the immense waves that
were still running. I was very cold and stiff, and found it
difficult to climb aboard. As the morning advanced, the sea began
to abate somewhat, and presently Yamba joined me in the canoe. We
were, however, unable to shape our course for any set quarter,
since by this time we were out of sight of land altogether, and had
not even the slightest idea as to our position.

All that day we drifted aimlessly about, and then, towards evening,
a perfect calm settled on the sea. When we were somewhat rested we
paddled on in a direction where we concluded land must lie (we
steered south-east for the main); and in the course of a few hours
we had the satisfaction of seeing a little rocky island, which we
promptly made for and landed upon. Here we obtained food in plenty
in the form of birds; but drinking-water was not to be found
anywhere, so we had to fall back on the small stock we always
carried in skins. Judging from the appearance of the rocks, and
the smell that pervaded the place, I imagined that this must be a
guano island. I now knew that we were near Port Darwin, BUT AS A

FACT WE HAD PASSED IT IN THE GREAT STORM, WHILE WE WERE FIGHTING

FOR OUR LIVES. We slept on the island that night, and felt very
much better next morning when we started out on our voyage once
more, visiting every bay and inlet. Hope, too, began to reassert
itself, and I thought that after all we might be able to reach Port

Darwin in spite of the distance we must have been driven out of our
course. Several islands studded the sea through which we were now
steadily threading our way, and that evening we landed on one of
these and camped for the night. Next day we were off again, and as
the weather continued beautifully fine we made splendid progress.

One evening a few days after the storm, as we were placidly
paddling away, I saw Yamba’s face suddenly brighten with a look I
had never seen on it before, and I felt sure this presaged some
extraordinary announcement. She would gaze up into the heavens
with a quick, sudden motion, and then her intelligent eyes would
sparkle like the stars above. I questioned her, but she maintained
an unusual reserve, and, as I concluded that she knew instinctively
we were approaching Port Darwin, I, too, felt full of joy and
pleasure that the object of our great journey was at length about
to be achieved. Alas! what awaited me was only the greatest of all
the astounding series of disappointments—one indeed so stunning as
to plunge me into the very blackest depths of despair.

Yamba still continued to gaze up at the stars, and when at length
she had apparently satisfied herself upon a certain point, she
turned to me with a shout of excited laughter and delight, pointing
frantically at a certain glowing star. Seeing that I was still
puzzled by her merriment, she cried, “That star is one you remember
well.” I reflected for a moment, and then the whole thing came to
me like a flash of lightning. YAMBA WAS APPROACHING HER OWN HOME

ONCE MORE—THE VERY POINT FROM WHICH WE HAD BOTH STARTED EIGHTEEN

MONTHS PREVIOUSLY! In the storm, as I have already said, we had
passed Port Darwin altogether, having been driven out to sea.

I tell you, my heart nearly burst when I recalled the awful
privations and hardships we had both experienced so recently; and
when I realised that all these things had been absolutely in vain,
and that once more my trembling hopes were to be dashed to the
ground in the most appalling manner, I fell back into the canoe,
utterly crushed with horror and impotent disappointment. Was there
ever so terrible an experience? Take a map of Australia, and see
for yourself my frightful blunder—mistaking the west coast of the

Gulf of Carpentaria for the eastern waters of the Cape York

Peninsula, and then blindly groping northward and westward in
search of the settlement of Somerset, which in reality lay hundreds
of miles north-east of me. I was unaware of the very existence of
the great Gulf of Carpentaria. But were it not for having had to
steer north to get out of the waterless plains, I might possibly
have reached the north-eastern coast of the continent in due time,
avoiding the Roper River altogether.

Yamba knelt by my side and tried to comfort me in her own sweet,
quaint way, and she pictured to me—scant consolation—how glad her
people would be to have us both back amongst them once more. She
also urged what a great man I might be among her people if only I
would stay and make my home with them. Even her voice, however,
fell dully on my ears, for I was fairly mad with rage and despair—
with myself, for not having gone overland to Port Darwin from Port

Essington, as, indeed, I should most certainly have done were it
not that Davis had assured me the greater part of the journey lay
through deadly swamps and creeks, and great waters swarming with
alligators. I had even had in my mind the idea of attempting to

REACH SYDNEY OVERLAND! but thought I would first of all see what
facilities in the way of reaching civilisation Port Darwin had to
offer. Now, however, I was back again in Cambridge Gulf,—in the
very spot I had left a year and a half ago, and where I had landed
with my four blacks from the island sand-spit. But you, my
readers, shall judge of my feelings.

We landed on an island at the mouth of the gulf, and Yamba made
smoke-signals to her friends on the mainland, telling them of our
return. We resolved it would never do to confess we had been

DRIVEN BACK. No, we had roamed about and had come back to our dear
friends of our own free-will, feeling there was no place like home!

just think what a role this was for me to play,—with my whole
being thrilling with an agony of helpless rage and bitter
disappointment.

This time, however, we did not wait for the blacks to come out and
meet us, but paddled straight for the beach, where the chiefs and
all the tribe were assembled in readiness to receive us. The first
poignant anguish being passed, and the warmth of welcome being so
cordial and excessive (they cried with joy), I began to feel a
little easier in my mind and more resigned to inexorable fate. The
usual ceremony of nose-rubbing on shoulders was gone through, and
almost every native present expressed his or her individual delight
at seeing us again. Then they besieged us with questions, for we
were now great travellers. A spacious “humpy” or hut was built
without delay, and the blacks vied with one another in bringing me
things which I sorely needed, such as fish, turtles, roots, and
eggs.

That evening a corroboree on a gigantic scale was held in my
honour; and on every side the blacks manifested great rejoicing at
my return, which, of course, they never dreamed was involuntary.

Human nature is, as I found, the same the world over, and one
reason for my warm welcome was, that my blacks had just been
severely thrashed by a neighbouring tribe, and were convinced that
if I would help them to retaliate, they could not fail to inflict
tremendous punishment upon their enemies. By this time, having
become, as I said before, somewhat resigned to my fate, I consented
to lead them in their next battle, on condition that two shield-bearers were provided to protect me from the enemy’s spears. This
being the first time I had ever undertaken war operations with my
friends, I determined that the experiment should run no risk of
failure, and that my dignity should in no way suffer. I declared,
first of all, that I would choose as my shield-bearers the two most
expert men in the tribe. There was much competition for these
honoured posts, and many warriors demonstrated their skill before
me.

At length I chose two stalwart fellows, named respectively Warriga
and Bommera, and every day for a week they conducted some trial
manoeuvres with their friends. There would be a kind of ambush
prepared, and flights of spears would be hurled at me, only to be
warded off with astonishing dexterity by my alert attendants. All

I was provided with was my steel tomahawk and bow and arrows. I
never really became expert with the spear and shield, and I knew
only too well that if I handled these clumsily I should immediately
lose prestige among the blacks.

After a week or two of practice and sham combats, I felt myself
pretty safe with my two protectors, and I then began organising an
army to lead against the enemy. Altogether I collected about 100
fighting men, each armed with a bundle of throwing spears, a shield
made of light wood, and a short, heavy waddy or club for use at
close quarters. When everything was in readiness, I marched off at
the head of my “army” and invaded the enemy’s country. We were
followed by the usual crowd of women-folk, who saw to the
commissariat department and did the transport themselves. On the
first day out, we had to ford a large stream—a branch of the

Victoria River, I think —and at length reached a suitable place in
which to engage the enemy. It is difficult for me to fix the exact
locality, but I should judge it to be between Murchison and

Newcastle ranges. The country in which the operations took place
was a fine open grassy plain, thinly skirted with trees and with
mountains almost encircling it in the distance.

I ought here to describe my personal appearance on this important
day, when, for the first time, I posed as a great chief, and led my
people into battle, filled with the same enthusiasm that animated
them. My hair was built up on strips of whalebone to a height of
nearly two feet from my head, and was decorated with black and
white cockatoo feathers. My face, which had now become very dark
from exposure to the sun, was decorated in four colours—yellow,
white, black, and red.

There were two black-and-white arched stripes across the forehead,
and a yellow curving line across each cheek under the eye. I also
wore a fairly long beard, moustache, and side-whiskers. There were
four different-coloured stripes on each arm, whilst on the body
were four vari-coloured stripes, two on each side; and a long,
yellow, curving stripe extended across the stomach, belt-wise.

Around my middle I wore a kind of double apron of emu skin, with
feathers. There were other stripes of different-coloured ochres on
my legs, so that altogether you may imagine I presented a
terrifying appearance. Of this, however, I soon grew quite
oblivious—a fact which I afterwards had occasion bitterly to
regret. It were, indeed, well for me that I had on subsequent
occasions realised better the bizarre nature of my appearance, for
had I done so I would probably have reached civilisation years
before I did.

At this period, then, you find me a fully equipped war chief of the
cannibal blacks, leading them on to battle attired as one of their
own chiefs in every respect, and with nearly all their tribal marks
on my body. When we reached the battle-ground, my men sent up
smoke-signals of defiance, announcing the fact of our invasion, and
challenging the enemy to come down from the mountains and fight us.

This challenge was promptly responded to by other smoke-signals,
but as at least a day must elapse before our antagonists could
arrive I spent the interval in devising a plan of battle—oddly
enough, on the lines of a famous historic Swiss encounter at

Grandson five or six centuries ago.

I arranged that fifty or sixty men, under the leadership of a
chief, should occupy some high ground in our rear, to form a kind
of ambush.

They were also to act as a reserve, and were instructed to come
rushing to our assistance when I signalled for them, yelling out
their weird war-cry of “Warra-hoo-oo,—warra-hoo-oo!” I concluded
that this in itself would strike terror into the hearts of our
opponents, who were accustomed to see the whole force engaged at
one time, and knew nothing about troops held in reserve, or tactics
of any kind whatsoever. The native method of procedure, as, I
think, I have already remarked, was usually to dash pell-mell at
one another after the abuse and fight, until one side or the other
drew blood, without which no victory could be gained.

Just before the battle commenced I had a real inspiration which
practically decided the affair without any fighting at all. It
occurred to me that if I mounted myself on stilts, some eighteen
inches high, and shot an arrow or two from my bow, the enemy would
turn tail and bolt. And so it turned out. As the armies
approached one another in full battle array they presented quite an
imposing appearance, and when a suitable distance separated them
they halted for the inevitable abusive parley. Into the
undignified abuse, needless to remark, I did not enter, but kept
well in the background. The spokesman of my tribe accused the
enemy of being without pluck—said that they were cowards, and
would soon have their livers eaten by the invaders. There was any
amount of spear-brandishing, yelling, and gesticulating. For these
blacks apparently find it impossible to come up to actual fighting
pitch without first being worked up to an extraordinary degree of
excitement.

When at length the abuse had got perfectly delirious, and the first
spear was about to be thrown, I dashed to the front on my stilts.

Several spears were launched at me, but my shield-bearers turned
them on one side. I then shot half-a-dozen arrows into the enemy’s
ranks in almost as many seconds. The consternation produced by
this flight of “invisible spears” was perfectly indescribable.

With a series of appalling yells the enemy turned and fled pell-mell. My men gave chase, and wounded many of them. In the midst
of the rout (the ruling thought being always uppermost), it
occurred to me that it might be a useful stroke of business to make
friends with this vanquished tribe, since they might possibly be of
service to me in that journey to civilisation, the idea of which I
never really abandoned from the day I was cast upon my little sand-spit. Furthermore, it flashed across my mind that if I made these
nomadic tribes interested in me and my powers, news of my isolation
might travel enormous distances inland—perhaps even to the borders
of civilisation itself.

I communicated my ideas to my men, and they promptly entered into
my views. They consented to help me with great readiness. While I
was speaking with them, the vanquished warriors had re-formed into
position some three or four hundred yards away, and were watching
our movements with much curiosity. I now abandoned my stilts and
my bow and arrows, and marched off with my chiefs in the direction
of our late opponents.

As we approached, with branches in our hands as flags of truce, I
signed to the startled men that we wished to be friendly; and when
we halted, several chiefs came forward unarmed from the ranks of
the enemy to confer with us. At first they were much surprised at
my overtures, but I soon convinced them of my sincerity, and they
at length consented to accept my offers of friendship. They
acknowledged at once my superiority and that of my men, and
presently all the chiefs came forward voluntarily and squatted at
my feet in token of subjection. The two armies then united, and we
all returned to a great encampment, where the women prepared a
truly colossal feast for conquerors and conquered alike, and the
greatest harmony prevailed. It was magnificent, but I am sure it
was not war. The braves of both sides decorated themselves with
many pigments in the evening, and the two tribes united in one
gigantic corroboree, which was kept up all night, and for several
days afterwards. We remained encamped in this district for about a
week, holding continuous corroboree, and each day becoming more and
more friendly with our late enemies. The country abounded in game,
and as the rivers were also well stocked with fish the supply of
food was abundant. At the end of the week, however, we retired to
our respective homes, but, strangely enough, I felt I could no
longer settle down to the old life among my friendly blacks.

The old desire for wandering came over me, and I resolved that some
day in the near future I would make yet another attempt to reach
civilisation, this time striking directly south. For a time,
however, I forced myself to remain content, accompanying the men on
their hunting expeditions and going out fishing with my devoted

Yamba.

CHAPTER IX

The children’s sports—A terrible ordeal—Queer notions of beauty—

How little girls are taught—Domestic quarrels—Telltale
footprints—I grow weary—Off on a long cruise—Astounding news—A
foreign tongue—Yamba has seen the girls—A remarkable “letter”—A
queer notion of decoration—Yamba as “advance agent”—I meet the
girls—A distressing interview—Jealousy of the native women.

I was much interested in the children of the blacks, and observed
all their interesting ways. It is not too much to say in the case
of both boys and girls that they can swim as soon as they can walk.

There is no squeamishness whatever on the part of the mothers, who
leave their little ones to tumble into rivers, and remain out naked
in torrential rains, and generally shift for themselves. From the
time the boys are three years old they commence throwing toy spears
at one another as a pastime. For this purpose, long dry reeds,
obtained from the swamps, are used, and the little fellows practise
throwing them at one another from various distances, the only
shields allowed being the palms of their own little hands. They
never seem to tire of the sport, and acquire amazing dexterity at
it. At the age of nine or ten they abandon the reeds and adopt a
heavier spear, with a wooden shaft and a point of hard wood or
bone. All kinds of interesting competitions are constantly
organised to test the boys’ skill, the most valued prizes being the
approbation of parents and elders.

A small ring of hide, or creeper, is suspended from the branch of a
tree, and the competitors have to throw their spears clean through
it at a distance of twenty paces. All the chiefs and fighting men
of the tribe assemble to witness these competitions, and
occasionally some little award is made in the shape of anklets and
bangles of small shells, strung together with human hair. The boys
are initiated into the ranks of the “men and warriors” when they
reach the age of about seventeen.

This initiation ceremony, by the way, is of a very extraordinary
character. Many of the details cannot be published here. As a
rule, it takes place in the spring, when the mimosa is in bloom,
and other tribes come from all parts to eat the nuts and gum. We
will say that there are, perhaps, twenty youths to undergo the
ordeal, which is conducted far from all camps and quite out of the
sight of women and children. The candidate prepares himself by
much fasting, giving up meat altogether for at least a week before
the initiation ceremony commences. In some cases candidates are
despatched on a tramp extending over many days; and such implicit
faith is placed in their honour that judges are not even sent with
them to see that everything is carried out fairly. They must
accomplish this task within a given period, and without partaking
of either food or water during the whole time. No matter how great
the temptation may be on the route, they conform strictly to the
rules of the test, and would as soon think of running themselves
through with a spear, as of seeking a water-hole. The inspectors
who judge at this amazing examination are, of course, the old and
experienced chiefs.

After the fasting comes the ordeal proper. The unfortunate
candidate presents himself before one of the examiners, and settles
his face into a perfectly stoical expression. He is then stabbed
repeatedly on the outside of the thighs and in the arms (never once
is an artery cut); and if he remains absolutely statuesque at each
stab, he comes through the most trying part of the ordeal with
flying colours. A motion of the lips, however, or a mutter—these
are altogether fatal. Not even a toe must move in mute agony; nor
may even a muscle of the eyelid give an uneasy and involuntary
twitch. If the candidate fails in a minor degree, he is promptly
put back, to come up again for the next examination; but in the
event of his being unable to stand the torture, he is
contemptuously told to go and herd with the women—than which there
is no more humiliating expression.

While yet the candidate’s wounds are streaming with blood, he is
required to run with lightning speed for two or three miles and
fetch back from a given spot a kind of toy lance planted in the
ground. Then, having successfully passed the triple ordeals of
fasting, stabbing, and running against time, and without food and
water, the candidate, under the eyes of his admiring father, is at
length received into the ranks of the bravest warriors, and is
allowed to take a wife. At the close of the ceremony, the flow of
blood from the candidate’s really serious flesh-wounds is stopped
by means of spiders’ webs, powdered charcoal, and dry clay powder.

With regard to the girls, I am afraid they received but scant
consideration.

Judged by our standard, the women were far from handsome. They had
very bright eyes, broad, flat noses, low, narrow foreheads, and
heavy chins. But there are comely exceptions. And yet at big
corroborees on the occasion of a marriage, the men always chanted
praises to the virtue and beauty of the bride!

The girl who possessed an exceptionally large and flat nose was
considered a great beauty. Talking about noses, it was to me a
remarkable fact, that the blacks consider a warrior with a big nose
and large distended nostrils a man possessed of great staying
power. For one thing, they consider his breathing apparatus
exceptionally perfect.

As a general rule (there are exceptions in the case of a very

“beautiful” woman), when a woman dies she is not even buried; she
simply lies where she has fallen dead, and the camp moves on to
another place and never returns to the unholy spot. And it may be
mentioned here that the blacks never allude to a dead person by
name, as they have a great horror of departed spirits. And so
childish and suspicious are they, that they sometimes even cut off
the feet of a dead man to prevent his running about and frightening
them at inconvenient moments. I used to play upon their fears,
going out into the bush after dark, and pretending to commune with
the evil spirits. The voice of these latter was produced by means
of reed whistles. Once I made myself a huge, hideous mask out of a
kangaroo skin, with holes slit in it for the nose, mouth, and eyes.

I would don this strange garb in the evenings, and prowl about the
vicinity of the camp, holding blazing torches behind the mask, and
emitting strange noises—sometimes howling like a wolf and at
others shouting aloud in my natural voice. On these occasions the
blacks thought I was in my natural element as a spirit. But they
never ventured to follow me or attempted to satisfy themselves that

I was not fooling them all the while. Yamba, of course, knew the
joke, and as a rule helped me to dress for the farce, but she took
good care never to tell any one the secret. No doubt had the
blacks ever learned that it was all done for effect on my part, the
result would have been very serious; but I knew I was pretty secure
because of the abnormal superstition prevalent among them.

The women, as I have before hinted, are treated in a horribly cruel
manner, judged from our standpoint; but in reality they know not
what cruelty is, because they are absolutely ignorant of kindness.

They are the beasts of burden, to be felled to the earth with a
bludgeon when they err in some trivial respect; and when camp is
moved each woman carries virtually the whole household and the
entire worldly belongings of the family. Thus it is a common sight
to see a woman carrying a load consisting of one or two children
and a quantity of miscellaneous implements, such as heavy
grindstones, stone hatchets, sewing-bones, yam-sticks, &c. During
the shifting of the camp the braves themselves stalk along
practically unencumbered, save only for their elaborate shield,
three spears (never more), and a stone tomahawk stuck in their belt
of woven opossum hair. The men do not smoke, knowing nothing of
tobacco, but their principal recreation and relaxation from the
incessant hunting consists in the making of their war weapons,
which is a very important part of their daily life. They will even
fell a whole tree, as has already been explained, to make a single
spear shaft. As to the shield, the elaborate carving upon it
corresponds closely with the prowess of the owner; and the more
laurels he gains, the more intricate and elaborate becomes the
carving on his shield. Honour prevents undue pretence.

But we have wandered away from the consideration of the girl-children. The baby girls play with their brothers and participate
in their fights until they are perhaps ten years of age. They are
then expected to accompany their mothers on the daily excursions in
search of roots. When the little girls are first taken out by
their mothers they are instructed in the use of the yam-stick, with
which the roots are dug up out of the earth. The stick used by the
women is generally three feet or four feet long, but the girl
novices use a short one about fifteen inches in length. Each
woman, as I have said elsewhere, is also provided with a reed
basket or net, in which to hold the roots, this being usually woven
out of strings of prepared bark; or, failing that, native flax or
palm straw.

But the unfortunate wife occasionally makes the acquaintance of the
heavy yam-stick in a very unpleasant, not to say serious, manner.

Of course, there are domestic rows. We will suppose that the
husband has lately paid a great amount of attention to one of his
younger wives—a circumstance which naturally gives great offence
to one of the older women. This wife, when she has an opportunity
and is alone with her husband, commences to sing or chant a plaint-

-a little thing of quite her own composing.

Into this song she weaves all the abuse which long experience tells
her will lash her husband up to boiling-point. The later stanzas
complain that the singer has been taken from her own home among a
nation of real warriors to live among a gang of skulking cowards,
whose hearts, livers, and other vital organs are not at all up to
the standard of her people.

The epithets are carefully arranged up a scale until they reach

BANDY-LEGGED—an utterly unpardonable insult. But there is, beyond
this, one other unpublishable remark, which causes the husband to
take up the yam-stick and fell the singer with one tremendous blow,
which is frequently so serious as to disable her for many days.

The other women at once see to their sister, who has incurred the
wrath of her lord, and rub her wounds with weird medicaments. The
whole shocking business is regarded as quite an ordinary affair;
and after the sufferer is able to get about again she bears her
husband not the slightest ill-feeling. You see, she has had her
say and paid for it.

The girls, as they grow up, are taught to cook according to the
native fashion, and are also required to build ovens in the earth
or sand; make the fires, build “break-winds,” and generally help
their mothers in preparing meals. When at length the meal is
cooked, the manner of eating it is very peculiar. First of all,
the women retire into the background. The lord and master goes and
picks out the tit-bits for himself, and then sits down to eat them
off a small sheet of bark. More often, however, he simply tears
the meat in pieces with his hands. During his meal, the wives and
children are collected behind at a respectful distance, awaiting
their own share. Then, as the warrior eats, he literally hurls
certain oddments over his shoulder, which are promptly pounced upon
by the wives and children in waiting. It sometimes happens,
however, that a favourite child—a boy invariably, never a girl (it
is the girls who are eaten by the parents whenever there are any
superfluous children to be got rid of)—will approach his father
and be fed with choice morsels from the great man’s “plate.”

Each tribe has its own particular country over which it roams at
pleasure, and the boundaries are defined by trees, hillocks,
mountains, rocks, creeks, and water-holes. And from these natural
features the tribes occasionally get their names. Outside the
tribal boundary—which often incloses a vast area—the blacks never
go, except on a friendly visit to a neighbouring camp. Poaching is
one of the things punishable with death, and even if any woman is
caught hunting for food in another country she is seized and
punished. I will tell you later on how even Yamba “put her foot”

in it in this way.

The blacks are marvellously clever at tracking a man by his
footprints, and a poacher from a neighbouring tribe never escapes
their vigilance, even though he succeeds in returning to his own
people without being actually captured. So assiduously do these
blacks study the footprints of people they know and are friendly
with, that they can tell at once whether the trespasser is an enemy
or not; and if it be a stranger, a punitive expedition is at once
organised against his tribe.

Gradually I came to think that each man’s track must have an
individuality about it quite as remarkable as the finger-prints
investigated by Galton and Bertillon. The blacks could even tell a
man’s name and many other things about him, solely from his tracks-

-how, it is of course impossible for me to say. I have often known
my blacks to follow a man’s track OVER HARD ROCKS, where even a
disturbed leaf proved an infallible clue, yielding a perfectly
miraculous amount of information. They will know whether a leaf
has been turned over by the wind or by human agency!

But to continue my narrative. Yamba was very anxious that I should
stay and make my home among her people, and so, with the assistance
of other women, she built me a substantial beehive-shaped hut,
fully twenty feet in diameter and ten feet high. She pointed out
to me earnestly that I had everything I could possibly wish for,
and that I might be a very great man indeed in the country if only

I would take a prominent part in the affairs of the tribe. She
also mentioned that so great was my prowess and prestige, that if I
wished I might take unto myself a whole army of wives!—the number
of wives being the sole token of greatness among these people. You
see they had to be fed, and that implied many great attributes of
skill and strength. Nevertheless, I pined for civilisation, and
never let a day go by without scanning the bay and the open sea for
a passing sail. The natives told me they had seen ships at various
times, and that attempts had even been made to reach them in
catamarans, but without success, so far out at sea were the vessels
passing.

Gradually, about nine months after my strange return to my

Cambridge Gulf home, there came a time when life became so
monotonous that I felt I MUST have a change of some sort, or else
go mad. I was on the very best of terms with all my blacks, but
their mode of living was repulsive to me. I began to loathe the
food, and the horrible cruelty to the women frequently sickened me.

Whenever I saw one of these poor patient creatures felled,
bleeding, to the earth, I felt myself being worked up into a state
of dangerous nervous excitement, and I longed to challenge the
brutal assailant as a murderous enemy. Each time, however, I
sternly compelled myself to restrain my feelings. At length the
spirit of unrest grew so strong that I determined to try a short
trip inland in a direction I had never hitherto attempted. I
intended to cross the big bay in my dug-out, round Cape

Londonderry, and then go south among the beautiful islands down
past Admiralty Gulf, which I had previously explored during my
residence on the Cape, and where I had found food and water
abundant; numerous caves, with mural paintings; quiet seas, and
gorgeous vegetation. Yamba willingly consented to accompany me,
and one day I set off on the sea once more, my faithful wife by my
side, carrying her net full of odds and ends, and I with my bow and
arrows, tomahawk, and stiletto; the two latter carried in my belt.

I hoped to come across a ship down among the islands, for my
natives told me that several had passed while I was away.

At length we started off in our dug-out, the sea being perfectly
calm—more particularly in the early morning, when the tide was
generally with us. After several days’ paddling we got into a
narrow passage between a long elevated island and the main, and
from there found our way into an inlet, at the head of which
appeared masses of wild and rugged rocks. These rocks were, in
many places, decorated with a number of crude but striking mural
paintings, which were protected from the weather. The drawings I
found represented men chiefly. My own contributions consisted of
life-size sketches of my wife, myself, and Bruno. I emphasised my
long hair, and also reproduced my bow and arrow. This queer “art
gallery” was well lighted, and the rock smooth. We found the spot
a very suitable one for camping; in fact, there were indications on
all sides that the place was frequently used by the natives as a
camping-ground. A considerable quantity of bark lay strewn about
the ground in sheets, which material my wife told me was used by
the natives as bedding. This was the first time I had known the
black-fellows to use any material in this way. I also came across
traces of a feast—such as empty oyster shells in very large heaps,
bones of animals, &c. The waters of the inlet were exceedingly
well stocked with fish; and here I saw large crayfish for the first
time. I caught and roasted some, and found them very good eating.

This inlet might possibly be in the vicinity of Montague Sound, a
little to the south of Admiralty Gulf.

We stayed a couple of days in this beautiful spot, and then pushed
down south again, always keeping close under shelter of the islands
on account of our frail craft. The seas through which we paddled
were studded with innumerable islands, some rocky and barren,
others covered with magnificent foliage and grass. We landed on
several of these, and on one—it might have been Bigges Island—I
discovered a high cairn or mound of stones erected on the most
prominent point. Yamba told me that this structure was not the
work of a native. She explained that the stones were laid too
regularly. A closer examination convinced me that the cairn had
been built by some European—possibly a castaway—and that at one
time it had probably been surmounted by a flagstaff as a signal to
passing ships. Food was very plentiful on this island, roots and
yams being obtainable in great abundance. Rock wallabies were also
plentiful. After leaving this island we continued our journey
south, paddling only during the day, and always with the tide, and
spending the night on land. By the way, whilst among the islands,

I came across, at various times, many sad signs of civilisation, in
the form of a lower mast of a ship, and a deck-house, a wicker-basket, empty brandy cases, and other flotsam and jetsam, which, I
supposed, had come from various wrecks. After having been absent
from my home in Cambridge Gulf, two or three months, I found myself
in a large bay, which I now know to be King’s Sound. I had come
across many tribes of natives on my way down. Some I met were on
the islands on which we landed, and others on the mainland. Most
of these black-fellows knew me both personally and by repute, many
having been present at the great whale feast. The natives at

King’s Sound recognised me, and gave me a hearty invitation to stay
with them at their camp. This I consented to do, and my friends
then promised to set all the other tribes along the coast on the
look-out for passing vessels, so that I might immediately be
informed by smoke-signals when one was in sight. Not long after
this came an item of news which thrilled me through and through.

One of the chiefs told me quite casually that at another tribe,
some days’ journey away, the chief had TWO WHITE WIVES. They had,
he went on to explain, a skin and hair exactly like my own; but in
spite of even this assurance, after the first shock of amazement I
felt confident that the captives were Malays. The news of their
presence among the tribe in question was a well-known fact all
along the coast of King’s Sound. My informant had never actually

SEEN the white women, but he was absolutely certain of their
existence. He added that the captives had been seized after a
fight with some white men, who had come to that coast in a “big
catamaran.” However, I decided to go and see for myself what
manner of women they were. The canoe was beached well above the
reach of the tides at Cone Bay, and then, accompanied by Yamba
only, I set off overland on my quest. The region of the encampment
towards which I now directed my steps lies between the Lennard

River and the Fitzroy. The exact spot, as near as I can fix it on
the chart, is a place called Derby, at the head of King’s Sound.

As we advanced the country became very rugged and broken, with
numerous creeks intersecting it in every direction. Farther on,
however, it developed into a rich, lowlying, park-like region,
with water in abundance. To the north-west appeared elevated
ranges. I came across many fine specimens of the bottle tree. The
blacks encamped at Derby were aware of my coming visit, having had
the news forwarded to them by means of the universal smoke-signals.

The camp described by my informant I found to be a mere collection
of gunyahs, or break-winds, made of boughs, and I at once presented
my “card”—the ubiquite passport stick; which never left me for a
moment in all my wanderings. This stick was sent to the chief, who
immediately manifested tokens of friendship towards me.

Unfortunately, however, he spoke an entirely different dialect from

Yamba’s; but by means of the sign language I explained to him that

I wished to stay with him for a few “sleeps” (hand held to the side
of the head, with fingers for numbers), and partake of his
hospitality. To this he readily consented.

Now, I knew enough of the customs of the blacks to realise that,
being a stranger among them, they would on request provide me with
additional wives during my stay,—entirely as a matter of
ceremonial etiquette; and it suddenly occurred to me that I might
make very good use of this custom by putting in an immediate demand
for the two white women—if they existed. You see, I wanted an
interview with them, in the first place, to arrange the best means
of getting them away. I confess I was consumed with an intense
curiosity to learn their history—even to see them. I wondered if
they could tell me anything of the great world now so remote in my
mind. As a matter of courtesy, however, I spent the greater part
of the day with the chief, for any man who manifests a desire for
women’s society loses caste immediately; and in the evening, when
the fact of my presence among the tribe had become more extensively
known, and their curiosity aroused by the stories that Yamba had
taken care to circulate, I attended a great corroboree, which
lasted nearly the whole of the night. As I was sitting near a big
fire, joining in the chanting and festivities, Yamba noiselessly
stole to my side, and whispered in my ear that SHE HAD FOUND THE

TWO WHITE WOMEN.

I remember I trembled with excitement at the prospect of meeting
them. They were very young, Yamba added, and spoke “my” language—

I never said “English,” because this word would have conveyed
nothing to her; and she also told me that the prisoners were in a
dreadful state of misery. It was next explained to me that the
girls, according to native custom, were the absolute property of
the chief. He was seated not very far away from me, and was
certainly one of the most ferocious and repulsive-looking creatures

I have ever come across,—even among the blacks. He was over six
feet high, and of rather a lighter complexion than his fellows,—
almost like a Malay. The top of his head receded in a very curious
manner, whilst the mouth and lower part of the face generally
protruded like an alligator’s, and gave him a truly diabolical
appearance. I confess a thrill of horror passed through me, as I
realised that two doubtless tenderly reared English girls were in
the clutches of this monster. Once I thought I must have been
dreaming, and that the memories of some old story-book I had read
years ago were filling my mind with some fantastic delusion. For a
moment I pictured to myself the feelings of their prosaic British
relatives, could they only have known what had become of the long-lost loved ones—a fate more shocking and more fearful than any
ever conceived by the writer of fiction. Of course, my readers
will understand that much detail about the fate of these poor
creatures must be suppressed for obvious reasons. But should any
existing relatives turn up, I shall be only too happy to place at
their disposal all the information I possess.

Presently, I grasped the whole terrible affair, and realised it as
absolute fact! My first impulse was to leap from the corroboree
and go and reassure the unhappy victims in person, telling them at
the same time that they might count on my assistance to the last.

It was not advisable, however, to withdraw suddenly from the
festivities, for fear my absence might arouse suspicion.

The only alternative that presented itself was to send a note or
message of some kind to them, and so I asked Yamba to bring me a
large fleshy leaf of a water-lily, and then, with one of her bone
needles, I pricked, in printed English characters, “A FRIEND IS

NEAR; FEAR NOT.” Handing this original letter to Yamba, I
instructed her to give it to the girls and tell them to hold it up
before the fire and read the perforations. This done, I returned
to the corroboree, still displaying a feigned enthusiasm for the
proceedings, but determined upon a bold and resolute course of
action. I must say though, that at that particular moment I was
not very sanguine of getting the girls away out of the power of
this savage, who had doubtless won them from some of his fellows by
more or less fair fighting.

I made my way over to where the chief was squatting, and gazed at
him long and steadily. I remember his appearance as though it were
but yesterday that we met. I think I have already said he was the
most repulsive-looking savage I have ever come across, even among
the Australian blacks. The curious raised scars were upon this
particular chief both large and numerous. This curious form of
decoration, by the way, is a very painful business. The general
practice is to make transverse cuts with a sharp shell, or stone
knife, on the chest, thighs, and sometimes on the back and
shoulders. Ashes and earth are then rubbed into each cut, and the
wound is left to close. Next comes an extremely painful gathering
and swelling, and a little later the earth that is inside is
gradually removed—sometimes with a feather. When the wounds
finally heal up, each cicatrice stands out like a raised weal, and
of these extraordinary marks the blacks are inordinately proud.

But to return to the chief who owned the girls. I must say that,
apart from his awful and obviously stubborn face, he was a
magnificently formed savage.

I commenced the conversation with him by saying, I presumed the
usual courtesy of providing a wife would be extended to me during
my stay. As I anticipated, he readily acquiesced, and I instantly
followed up the concession by calmly remarking that I should like
to have the two white women who were in the camp sent over to my

“little place.” To this suggestion he gave a point-blank refusal.

I persisted, however, and taunted him with deliberately breaking
the inviolable rules of courtesy; and at length he gave me to
understand he would think the matter over.

All this time Yamba had been as busy as a showman out West. She
had followed with unusual vigour her customary role of “advance
agent,” and had spread most ridiculously exaggerated reports of my
supernatural prowess and magical attributes. I controlled the
denizens of Spiritland, and could call them up in thousands to
torment the blacks. I controlled the elements; and was in short
all-powerful.

I must admit that this energetic and systematic “puffing” did a
great deal of good, and wherever we went I was looked upon as a
sort of wizard, entitled to very great respect, and the best of
everything that was going.

For a long time the tribal chief persisted in his opposition to my
request for the girls; but as most of his warriors were in my
favour (I had given many appalling demonstrations in the bush at
night), I knew he would submit sooner or later. The big corroboree
lasted all night, and at length, before we separated on the second
day, the great man gave way—with exceedingly bad grace. Of
course, I did not disturb the girls at that hour, but next day I
told Yamba to go and see them and arrange for an interview. She
came back pretty soon, and then undertook to guide me to their

“abode.” The prospect of meeting white people once more—even
these two poor unfortunates—threw me into a strange excitement, in
the midst of which I quite forgot my own astonishing appearance,
which was far more like that of a gaily decorated and gorgeously
painted native chief than a civilised European. For it must be
remembered that by this time I had long ago discarded all clothing,
except an apron of emu feathers, whilst my skin was extremely dark
and my hair hung down my back fully three feet, and was built up in
a surprising way in times of war and corroboree.

I followed Yamba through the camp, getting more and more excited as
we approached the girls’ domicile. At length she stopped at the
back of a crescent-shaped break-wind of boughs, and a moment later-

-eager, trembling, and almost speechless—I stood before the two

English girls. Looking back now, I remember they presented a truly
pitiable spectacle. They were huddled together on the sandy
ground, naked, and locked in one another’s arms. Before them
burned a fire, which was tended by the women. Both looked
frightfully emaciated and terrified—so much so, that as I write
these words my heart beats faster with horror as I recall the
terrible impression they made upon me. As they caught sight of me,
they screamed aloud in terror. I retired a little way discomfited,
remembering suddenly my own fantastic appearance. Of course, they
thought I was another black fellow coming to torture them. All
kinds of extraordinary reflections flashed through my mind at that
moment. What would people in my beloved France, I wondered—or
among my Swiss mountains, or in stately England—think of the fate
that had overtaken these girls—a fate that would infallibly read
more like extravagant and even offensive fiction than real, heart-rending fact?

I went back and stood before the girls, saying, reassuringly,

“Ladies, I am a white man and a friend; and if you will only trust
in me I think I can save you.”

Their amazement at this little speech knew no bounds, and one of
the girls became quite hysterical. I called Yamba, and introduced
her as my wife, and they then came forward and clasped me by the
hand, crying, shudderingly, “Oh, save us! Take us away from that
fearful brute.”

I hastily explained to them that it was solely because I had
resolved to save them that I had ventured into the camp; but they
would have to wait patiently until circumstances favoured my plans
for their escape. I did not conceal from them that my being able
to take them away at all was extremely problematical; for I could
see that to have raised false hopes would have ended in real
disaster. Gradually they became quieter and more reasonable—and
my position obviously more embarrassing. I quickly told them that,
at any rate, so long as I remained in the camp, they need not fear
any further visits from the giant chief they dreaded so much, and
with this reassurance I walked swiftly away, followed by Yamba.

The laws of native hospitality absolutely forbade any one to
interfere with the girls during my stay, so, easy in my mind, I
made straight for the extensive swamps which I knew lay a few miles
from the camp. In this wild and picturesque place I brought down,
with Yamba’s assistance, a great number of cockatoos, turkeys, and
other wild fowl, which birds were promptly skinned, my wife and I
having in view a little amateur tailoring which should render my
future interviews with the girls a little less embarrassing. As a
matter of fact, I handed over the bird-skins to Yamba, and she,
with her bone needles and threads of kangaroo sinews, soon made a
couple of extraordinary but most serviceable garments, which we
immediately took back to the poor girls, who were shivering with
cold and neglect. I at once saw the reason of most of their
suffering.

Their own clothing had apparently been lost or destroyed, and the
native women, jealous of the attention which the chief was
bestowing upon the newcomers, gave them little or no food. Nor did
the jealous wives instruct the interlopers in the anointing of
their bodies with that peculiar kind of clay which forms so
effective a protection alike against the burning heat of the sun,
the treacherous cold of the night-winds, and the painful attacks of
insects. All the information I could elicit from the girls that
evening was the fact that they had been shipwrecked, and had
already been captive among the blacks for three and a half months.

The elder girl further said that they were not allowed their
liberty, because they had on several occasions tried to put an end
to their indescribable sufferings by committing suicide. Anything
more extraordinary than the costumes we made for the girls you
never saw. They were not of elaborate design, being of the shape
of a long sack, with holes for the arms and neck; and they
afterwards shrank in the most absurd way.

CHAPTER X

Miss Rogers begins her story—An interview on the high seas—

Drifting to destruction—The ship disappears—Tortured by thirst—A
fearful sight—Cannibals on the watch—The blacks quarrel over the
girls—Courting starvation—Yamba goes for help—A startling
announcement—Preparations for the fight—Anxious moments—A weird
situation—“Victory, victory”—A melodramatic attitude—The girls
get sore feet.

At our next interview, thanks to Yamba’s good offices, both girls
were looking very much better than when I first saw them; and then,
consumed with natural curiosity and a great desire to learn
something of the outside world, I begged them to tell me their
story.

The first thing I learnt was that they were two sisters, named

Blanche and Gladys Rogers, their respective ages being nineteen and
seventeen years. Both girls were extremely pretty, the particular
attraction about Gladys being her lovely violet eyes. It was

Blanche who, with much hysterical emotion, told me the story of
their painful experience, Gladys occasionally prompting her sister
with a few interpolated words.

Here, then, is Blanche Rogers’s story, told as nearly as possible
in her own words. Of course it is absurd to suppose that I can
reproduce verbatim the fearful story told by the unfortunate girl.

“My sister and I are the daughters of Captain Rogers, who commanded
a 700-ton barque owned by our uncle.” [I am not absolutely certain
whether the girls were the daughters of the captain or the owner.—

L. de R.] “We were always very anxious, even as children, to
accompany our dear father on one of his long trips, and at length
we induced him to take us with him when he set sail from Sunderland

[not certain, this] in the year 1868 [or 1869], with a
miscellaneous cargo bound for Batavia [or Singapore]. The voyage
out was a very pleasant one, but practically without incident—
although, of course, full of interest to us. The ship delivered
her freight in due course, but our father failed to obtain a return
cargo to take back with him to England. Now, as a cargo of some
kind was necessary to clear the expenses of the voyage, father
decided to make for Port Louis, in Mauritius, to see what he could
do among the sugar-exporters there.

“On the way to Port Louis, we suddenly sighted a ship flying
signals of distress. We at once hove to and asked what assistance
we could render. A boat presently put off from the distressed
vessel, and the captain, who came aboard, explained that he had run
short of provisions and wanted a fresh supply—no matter how small-

-to tide him over his difficulty. He further stated that his
vessel was laden with guano, and was also en route for Port Louis.

The two captains had a long conversation together, in the course of
which an arrangement was arrived at between them.

“We said we were in ballast, searching for freight, whereupon our
visitor said: ‘Why don’t you make for the Lacepede Islands, off
the north-west Australian coast, and load guano, which you can get
there for nothing?’ We said we did not possess the necessary
requisites in the shape of shovels, sacks, punts, wheel-barrows,
and the like. These were promptly supplied by the other captain in
part payment for the provisions we let him have. Thus things were
eventually arranged to the entire satisfaction of both parties, and
then the Alexandria (I think that was the name of the ship)

proceeded on her way to Port Louis, whilst we directed our course
to the Lacepede Islands.

“In due time we reached a guano islet, and the crew quickly got to
work, with the result that in a very short time we had a
substantial cargo on board. A day or two before we were due to
leave, we went to father and told him we wanted very much to spend
an evening on the island to visit the turtle-breeding ground. Poor
father, indulgent always, allowed us to go ashore in a boat, under
the care of eight men, who were to do a little clearing-up whilst
they were waiting for us. We found, as you may suppose, a great
deal to interest us on the island, and the time passed all too
quickly. The big turtles came up with the full tide, and at once
made nests for themselves on the beach by scraping out with their
hind-flippers a hole about ten inches deep and five inches in
diameter. The creatures then simply lay over these holes and
dropped their eggs into them. We learned that the number of eggs
laid at one sitting varies from twelve up to forty. We had great
fun in collecting the eggs and generally playing with the turtles.

I am afraid we got out of sight of the men, and did not notice that
the weather showed decided signs of a sudden change. When at
length the crew found us it was past midnight—though not very
dark; and though we ought to have been making preparations for
returning to the ship, it was blowing hard. On account of this,
the crew said they did not consider it advisable to launch the
boat; and as we had our big cloaks with us, it was decided to
remain on the island all night to see if the weather improved by
the morning. Our ship was anchored fully three miles away, outside
the reefs, and it would have been impossible, in the sea that was
running, to pull out to her. There was only one white man among
our protectors, and he was a Scotchman. The men made a fire in a
more or less sheltered spot, and round this we squatted, the men
outside us, so as to afford us greater protection from the storm.

In this way the whole night passed, principally in telling stories
of adventure by sea and land. We all hoped that by morning at any
rate the wind would have abated; but at daybreak, as we looked
anxiously out over the tempestuous sea, it was blowing as hard as
ever; and by ten o’clock the storm had increased to a terrific
gale. Our men unanimously declared they dared not attempt to reach
the ship in their small boat, although we could see the vessel
plainly riding at her old anchorage. What followed Gladys and I
gathered afterwards, just before the dreadful thing happened. We
were all safe enough on land, but, it became evident to the sailors
with us that the ship could not weather the storm unless she
weighed anchor and stood out to sea. The crew watched with eager
eyes to see what my father would do. Manifestly he was in too much
distress of mind about us to go right away, and I suppose he
preferred to trust to the strength of his cables:

“Shortly after ten o’clock in the morning, however, the ship began
to drag her anchors, and in spite of all that could be done by my
father and his officers, the shapely little vessel gradually
drifted on to the coral reefs. All this time Gladys and I, quite
ignorant of seamanship and everything pertaining to it, were
watching the doomed ship, and from time to time asked anxiously
what was the meaning of all the excitement. The men returned us
evasive answers, like the kind-hearted fellows they were, and
cheered us up in every possible way. Presently we heard signals of
distress (only we didn’t know they were signals of distress then),
and our companions saw that the captain realised only too well his
terribly dangerous position. It was, however, utterly impossible
for them to have rendered him any assistance. The rain was now
descending in sheets, lashing the giant waves with a curious
hissing sound. The sky was gloomy and overcast, and altogether the
outlook was about as terrible as it could well be. Presently we
became dreadfully anxious about our father; but when the sailors
saw that the ship was apparently going to pieces, they induced us
to return to the camp fire and sit there till the end was past. By
this time the barque was being helplessly buffeted about amongst
the reefs, a little less than a mile and a half from shore.

“Suddenly, as we afterwards learnt, she gave a lurch and completely
disappeared beneath the turbulent waters, without even her
mastheads being left standing to show where she had gone down. She
had evidently torn a huge hole in her side in one of her collisions
with the jagged reefs, for she sank with such rapidity that not one
of the boats could be launched, and not a single member of the crew
escaped—so far as we knew—save only those who were with us on the
island. The loss of the ship was, of course, a terrible blow to
our valiant protectors, who were now left absolutely dependent on
their own resources to provide food and means of escape. Thus
passed a dreadful day and night, the men always keeping us ignorant
of what had happened. They resolved to make for Port Darwin, on
the mainland of Australia, which was believed to be quite near; for
we had no water, there being none on the guano island. The
interval was spent in collecting turtles’ eggs and sea-fowl, which
were intended as provisions for the journey. Next morning the
storm had quite abated, and gradually the stupefying news was
communicated to us that our father and his ship had gone down with
all hands in the night. Indeed, these kind and gentle men told us
the whole story of their hopes and doubts and fears, together with
every detail of the terrible tragedy of the sea that had left us in
such a fearful situation. No one needs to be told our feelings.

“Shortly before noon next day the sail was hoisted; we took our
places in the boat, and soon were rippling pleasantly through the
now placid waters, leaving the guano island far behind. The wind
being in our favour, very satisfactory progress was made for many
hours; but at length, tortured by thirst, it was decided to land on
the mainland or the first island we sighted, and lay in a stock of
water—if it was obtainable. Gladys and I welcomed the idea of
landing, because by this time we were in quite a disreputable
condition, not having washed for several days. It was our
intention, while the crews were getting water and food, to retire
to the other side of the island, behind the rocks, and there have a
nice bath. The boat was safely beached, and there being no signs
of natives anywhere in the vicinity, the men soon laid in a stock
of water without troubling to go very far inland for it. My sister
and I at once retired several hundred yards away, and there
undressed and went into the water.

“We had scarcely waded out past our waists when, to our unspeakable
horror, a crowd of naked blacks, hideously painted and armed with
spears, came rushing down the cliffs towards us, yelling and
whooping in a way I am never likely to forget. They seemed to rise
out of the very rocks themselves; and I really think we imagined we
were going mad, and that the whole appalling vision was a fearful
dream, induced by the dreadful state of our nerves. My own heart
seemed to stand still with terror, and the only description I can
give of my sensations was that I felt absolutely paralysed. At
length, when the yelling monsters were quite close to us, we
realised the actual horror of it all, and screaming frantically,
tried to dash out of the water towards the spot where we had left
our clothes. But some of the blacks intercepted us, and we saw one
man deliberately making off with the whole of our wearing apparel.

“Of course, when the boat’s crew heard the uproar they rushed to
our assistance, but when they were about twenty yards from our
assailants, the blacks sent a volley of spears among them with such
amazing effect that every one of the sailors fell prostrate to the
earth. The aim of the blacks was wonderfully accurate.

“Some of our men, however, managed to struggle to their feet again,
in a heroic but vain endeavour to reach our side; but these poor
fellows were at once butchered in the most shocking manner by the
natives, who wielded their big waddies or clubs with the most
sickening effect. Indeed, so heart-rending and horrible was the
tragedy enacted before our eyes, that for a long time afterwards we
scarcely knew what was happening to us, so dazed with horror were
we. For myself, I have a faint recollection of being dragged
across the island by the natives, headed by the hideous and
gigantic chief who afterwards claimed us as his ‘wives.’ We were
next put on board a large catamaran, our hands and feet having been
previously tied with hair cords; and we were then rowed over to the
mainland, which was only a few miles away. We kept on asking by
signs that our clothing might be returned to us, but the blacks
tore the various garments into long strips before our eyes, and
wrapped the rags about their heads by way of ornament. We reached
the encampment of the black-fellows late that same evening, and
were at once handed over to the charge of the women, who kept us
close prisoners and—so far as we could judge—abused us in the
most violent manner. Of course, I don’t know exactly what their
language meant, but I do know that they treated us shamefully, and
struck us from time to time. I gathered that they were jealous of
the attention shown to us by the big chief.

“We afterwards learnt that the island on which the terrible tragedy
took place was not really inhabited, but the blacks on the coast
had, it appeared, seen our boat far out at sea, and watched it
until we landed for water. They waited a little while in order to
lull the crew into a sense of fancied security, and then, without
another moment’s delay, crossed over to the island and descended
upon us.

“We passed a most wretched night. Never—never can I hope to
describe our awful feelings. We suffered intensely from the cold,
being perfectly naked. We were not, however, molested by any of
our captors. But horror was to be piled on horror’s head, for the
next day a party of the blacks returned to the island and brought
back the dead bodies of all the murdered sailors. At first we
wondered why they went to this trouble; and when, at length, it
dawned upon us that a great cannibal feast was in preparation, I
think we fainted away.

“We did not actually see the cooking operations, but the odour of
burning flesh was positively intolerable; and we saw women pass our
little grass shelters carrying some human arms and legs, which were
doubtless their own families’ portions. I thought we should both
have gone mad, but notwithstanding this, we did keep our reason.

Our position, however, was so revolting and so ghastly, that we
tried to put an end to our lives by strangling ourselves with a
rope made of plaited grass. But we were prevented from carrying
out our purpose by the women-folk, who thereafter kept a strict
watch over us. It seemed to me, so embarrassing were the
attentions of the women, that these pitiable but cruel creatures
were warned by the chief that, if anything befell us, they
themselves would get into dire trouble. All this time, I could not
seem to think or concentrate my mind on the events that had
happened. I acted mechanically, and I am absolutely certain that
neither Gladys nor myself realised our appalling position.

“In the meantime, it seems, a most sanguinary fight had taken place
among four of the principal blacks who had assisted in the attack
upon our sailors, the object of the fight being to decide who
should take possession of us.

“One night we managed to slip out of the camp without attracting
the notice of the women, and at once rushed down to the beach,
intending to throw ourselves into the water, and so end a life
which was far worse than death. We were, unfortunately, missed,
and just as we were getting beyond our depth a party of furious
blacks rushed down to the shore, waded out into the water and
brought as out.

“After this incident our liberty was curtailed altogether, and we
were moved away. The women were plainly told—so we gathered—that
if anything happened to us, death, and nothing less, would be their
portion. Now that we could no longer leave the little break-wind
that sheltered us, we spent the whole of our time in prayer—mainly
for death to release us from our agonies. I was surprised to see
that the women themselves, though nude, were not much affected by
the intense cold that prevailed at times, but we afterwards learnt
that they anointed their naked bodies with a kind of greasy clay,
which formed a complete coating all over their bodies. During the
ensuing three months the tribe constantly moved their camp, and we
were always taken about by our owner and treated with the most
shocking brutality. The native food, which consisted of roots,
kangaroo flesh, snakes, caterpillars, and the like, was utterly
loathsome to us, and for several days we absolutely refused to
touch it, in the hope that we might die of starvation.

“Finally, however, the blacks compelled us to swallow some
mysterious-looking meat, under threats of torture from those
dreadful firesticks. You will not be surprised to learn that,
though life became an intolerable burden to us, yet, for the most
part, we obeyed our captors submissively. At the same time, I
ought to tell you that now and again we disobeyed deliberately, and
did our best to lash the savages into a fury, hoping that they
would spear us or kill us with their clubs. Our sole shelter was a
break-wind of boughs with a fire in front. The days passed
agonisingly by; and when I tell you that every hour—nay, every
moment—was a crushing torture, you will understand what that
phrase means. We grew weaker and weaker, and, I believe, more
emaciated. We became delirious and hysterical, and more and more
insensible to the cold and hunger. No doubt death would soon have
come to our relief had you not arrived in time to save us.”

This, then, was the fearful story which the unfortunate Misses

Rogers had to tell. The more I thought it over, the more I
realised that no Englishwomen had ever lived to tell so dreadful an
experience. I compared their story with mine, and felt how
different it was. I was a man, and a power in the land from the
very first—treated with the greatest consideration and respect by
all the tribes. And, poor things, they were terribly despondent
when I explained to them that it was impossible for me to take them
right away at once. Had I attempted to do so surreptitiously, I
should have outraged the sacred laws of hospitality, and brought
the whole tribe about my ears and theirs. Besides, I had fixed
upon a plan of my own; and, as the very fact of my presence in the
camp was sufficient protection for the girls, I implored them to
wait patiently and trust in me.

That very night I called Yamba to me and despatched her to a
friendly tribe we had encountered in the King Leopold Ranges—
perhaps three days’ journey away. I instructed her to tell these
blacks that I was in great danger, and, therefore, stood in need of
a body of warriors, who ought to be sent off immediately to my
assistance. They knew me much better than I did them. They had
feasted on the whale. As I concluded my message, I looked into

Yamba’s eyes and told her the case was desperate. Her dear eyes
glowed in the firelight, and I saw that she was determined to do or
die. I trusted implicitly in her fertility of resource and her
extraordinary intelligence.

In a few days she returned, and told me that everything had been
arranged, and a body of armed warriors would presently arrive in
the vicinity of the camp, ready to place themselves absolutely at
my service.

And sure enough, a few days later twenty stalwart warriors made
their appearance at the spot indicated by Yamba; but as I did not
consider the force quite large enough for my purpose, I sent some
of them back with another message asking for reinforcements, and
saying that the great white chief was in danger. Finally, when I
felt pretty confident of my position, I marched boldly forward into
the camp with my warriors, to the unbounded amazement of the whole
tribe with whose chief I was sojourning. He taxed me with having
deceived him when I said I was alone, and he also accused me of
outraging the laws of hospitality by bringing a party of warriors,
obviously hostile, into his presence.

I wilfully ignored all these points, and calmly told him I had been
thinking over the way in which he had acquired the two white girls,
and had come to the conclusion that he had no right to them at all.

Therefore, I continued airily, it was my intention to take them
away forthwith. I pointed out to the repulsive giant that he had
not obtained the girls by fair means, and if he objected to my
taking them away, it was open to him, according to custom, to
sustain his claim to ownership by fighting me for the “property.”

Now, these blacks are neither demonstrative nor intelligent, but I
think I never saw any human being so astonished in the whole of my
life. It dawned upon him presently, however, that I was not
joking, and then his amazement gave place to the most furious
anger. He promptly accepted my challenge, greatly to the delight
of all the warriors in his own tribe, with whom he was by no means
popular. But, of course, the anticipation of coming sport had
something to do with their glee at the acceptance of the challenge.

The big man was as powerful in build as he was ugly, and the moment
he opened his mouth I realised that for once Yamba had gone too far
in proclaiming my prodigious valour. He said he had heard about my
wonderful “flying-spears,” and declined to fight me if I used such
preternatural weapons. It was therefore arranged THAT WE SHOULD

WRESTLE—the one who overthrew the other twice out of three times
to be declared the victor. I may say that this was entirely my
suggestion, as I had always loved trick wrestling when at school,
and even had a special tutor for that purpose—M. Viginet, an agile
little Parisian, living in Geneva. He was a Crimean veteran. The
rank-and-file of the warriors, however, did not look upon this
suggestion with much favour, as they thought it was not paying
proper respect to my wonderful powers. I assured them I was
perfectly satisfied, and begged them to let the contest proceed.

Then followed one of the most extraordinary combats on record.

Picture to yourself, if you can, the agony of mind of poor little

Blanche and Gladys Rogers during the progress of the fight; and
also imagine the painful anxiety with which I went in to win.

A piece of ground about twenty feet square was lightly marked out
by the blacks with their waddies, and the idea was that, to
accomplish a throw, the wrestler had to hurl his opponent clean
outside the boundary. We prepared for the combat by covering our
bodies with grease; and I had my long hair securely tied up into a
kind of “chignon” at the back of my head. My opponent was a far
bigger man than myself, but I felt pretty confident in my ability
as a trick wrestler, and did not fear meeting him. What I did
fear, however, was that he would dispute the findings of the
umpires if they were in my favour, in which case there might be
trouble. I had a shrewd suspicion that the chief was something of
a coward at heart. He seemed nervous and anxious, and I saw him
talking eagerly with his principal supporter. As for myself, I
constantly dwelt upon the ghastly plight of the two poor girls. I
resolved that, with God’s help, I would vanquish my huge enemy and
rescue them from their dreadful position. I was in splendid
condition, with muscles like steel from incessant walking. At
length the warriors squatted down upon the ground in the form of a
crescent, the chiefs in the foreground, and every detail of the
struggle that followed was observed with the keenest interest.

I was anxious not to lose a single moment. I felt that if I
thought the matter over I might lose heart, so I suddenly bounded
into the arena. My opponent was there already—looking, I must
say, a little undecided.

In a moment his huge arms were about my waist and shoulders. It
did not take me very long to find out that the big chief was going
to depend more upon his weight than upon any technical skill in
wrestling. He possessed none. He first made a great attempt to
force me upon my knees and then backwards; but I wriggled out of
his grasp, and a few minutes later an opening presented itself for
trying the “cross-buttock” throw. There was not a moment to be
lost. Seizing the big man round the thigh I drew him forward,
pulled him over on my back, and in the twinkling of an eye—
certainly before I myself had time to realise what had happened—he
was hurled right over my head outside the enclosure. The
spectators—sportsmen all—frantically slapped their thighs, and I
knew then that I had gained their sympathies. My opponent, who had
alighted on his head and nearly broken his neck, rose to his feet,
looking dazed and furious that he should have been so easily
thrown. When he faced me for the second time in the square he was
much more cautious, and we struggled silently, but forcefully, for
some minutes without either gaining any decided advantage. Oddly
enough, at the time I was not struck by the dramatic element of the
situation; but now that I have returned to civilisation I DO see
the extraordinary nature of the combat as I look back upon those
dreadful days.

Just picture the scene for yourself. The weird, unexplored land
stretches away on every side, though one could not see much of it
on account of the grassy hillocks. I, a white man, was alone among
the blacks in the terrible land of “Never Never,”—as the

Australians call their terra incognita; and I was wrestling with a
gigantic cannibal chief for the possession of two delicately-reared

English girls, who were in his power. Scores of other savages
squatted before us, their repulsive faces aglow with interest and
excitement. Very fortunately Bruno was not on the spot. I knew
what he was of old, and how he made my quarrels his with a
strenuous energy and eagerness that frequently got himself as well
as his master into serious trouble. Knowing this, I had instructed

Yamba to keep him carefully away, and on no account let him run
loose.

Fully aware that delays were dangerous, I gripped my opponent once
more and tried to throw him over my back, but this time he was too
wary, and broke away from me. When we closed again he commenced
his old tactics of trying to crush me to the ground by sheer
weight, but in this he was not successful. Frankly, I knew his
strength was much greater than mine, and that the longer we
wrestled the less chance I would have. Therefore, forcing him
suddenly sideways, so that he stood on one leg, I tripped him,
hurling him violently from me sideways; and his huge form went
rolling outside the square, to the accompaniment of delighted yells
from his own people.

I cannot describe my own sensations, for I believe I was half mad
with triumph and excitement. I must not forget to mention that I,
too, fell to the ground, but fortunately well within the square. I
was greatly astonished to behold the glee of the spectators—but,
then, the keynote of their character is an intense love of deeds of
prowess, especially such deeds as provide exciting entertainment.

The vanquished chief sprang to his feet before I did, and ere I
could realise what was happening, he dashed at me as I was rising
and dealt me a terrible blow in the mouth with his clenched fist.

As he was a magnificently muscular savage, the blow broke several
of my teeth and filled my mouth with blood. My lips, too, were
very badly cut, and altogether I felt half stunned. The effect
upon the audience was astounding. The warriors leaped to their
feet, highly incensed at the cowardly act, and some of them would
actually have speared their chief then and there had I not
forestalled them. I was furiously angry, and dexterously drawing
my stiletto from its sheath so as not to attract attention, I
struck at my opponent with all my force, burying the short, keen
blade in his heart. He fell dead at my feet with a low, gurgling
groan. As I withdrew the knife, I held it so that the blade
extended up my forearm and was quite hidden. This, combined with
the fact that the fatal wound bled mainly internally, caused the
natives to believe I had struck my enemy dead by some supernatural
means. The act was inevitable.

You will observe that by this time I would seize every opportunity
of impressing the blacks by an almost intuitive instinct; and as
the huge savage lay dead on the ground, I placed my foot over the
wound, folded my arms, and looked round triumphantly upon the
enthusiastic crowd, like a gladiator of old.

According to law and etiquette, however, the nearest relatives of
the dead man had a perfect right to challenge me, but they did not
do so, probably because they were disgusted at the unfair act of my
opponent. I put the usual question, but no champion came forward;
on the contrary, I was overwhelmed with congratulations, and even
offers of the chieftainship. I am certain, so great was the love
of fair-play among these natives, that had I not killed the chief
with my stiletto, his own people would promptly have speared him.

The whole of this strange tragedy passed with surprising swiftness;
and I may mention here that, as I saw the chief rushing at me, I
thought he simply wanted to commence another round. His death was
actually an occasion for rejoicing in the tribe. The festivities
were quickly ended, however, when I told the warriors that I
intended leaving the camp with the two girls in the course of
another day or so, to return to my friends in the King Leopold

Ranges. In reality it was my intention to make for my own home in
the Cambridge Gulf district. The body of the chief was not eaten

(most likely on account of the cowardice he displayed), but it was
disposed of according to native rites. The corpse was first of all
half-roasted in front of a huge fire, and then, when properly
shrivelled, it was wrapped in bark and laid on a kind of platform
built in the fork of a tree.

The girls were kept in ignorance of the fatal termination of the
wrestling match, as I was afraid it might give them an unnecessary
shock. After twelve or fourteen days in the camp, we quietly took
our departure. Our party consisted of the two girls, who were
nearly frantic with excitement over their escape; Yamba, and
myself—together with the friendly warriors who had so opportunely
come to my assistance.

We had not gone far, however, before the girls complained of sore
feet. This was not surprising, considering the burning hot sand
and the rough country we were traversing, which was quite the worst

I had yet seen—at any rate, for the first few days’ march after we
got out of the level country in the King’s Sound region. I,
therefore, had to rig up a kind of hammock made of woven grass, and
this, slung between two poles, served to carry the girls by turns,
the natives acting as bearers. But being totally unused to
carrying anything but their own weapons, they proved deplorably
inefficient as porters, and after a time, so intolerable to them
did the labour become, the work of carrying the girls devolved upon

Yamba and myself. Gladys, the younger girl, suffered most, but
both were weak and footsore and generally incapable of much
exertion. Perhaps a reaction had set in after the terrible
excitement of the previous days. Soon our escort left us, to
return to their own homes; and then Yamba and I had to work
extremely hard to get the girls over the terribly rough country.

Fortunately there was no need for hurry, and so we proceeded in the
most leisurely manner possible, camping frequently and erecting
grass shelters for our delicate charges. Food was abundant, and
the natives friendly.

CHAPTER XI

Easier travel—The girls improve—How the blacks received them—A
large hut—A dainty dish—What might have been—The girls decorate
their home—Bruno as a performer—“A teacher of swimming”—How we
fought depression—Castles in the air—A strange concert—Trapping
wild-cats—The girls’ terror of solitude—Fervent prayer—A goose-skin football—How I made drums.

At length we came to a stately stream that flowed in a NNE.

direction to Cambridge Gulf. This, I believe, is the Ord River.

Here we constructed a catamaran, and were able to travel easily and
luxuriously upon it, always spending the night ashore. This
catamaran was exceptionally large, and long enough to admit of our
standing upright on it with perfect safety. After crossing the

King Leopold Ranges we struck a level country, covered with rich,
tall grass, and well though not thickly wooded. The rough granite
ranges, by the way, we found rich in alluvial and reef tin.

Gradually the girls grew stronger and brighter. At this time they
were, as you know, clad in their strange “sack” garments of bird-skins; but even before we reached the Ord River these began to
shrink to such an extent that the wearers were eventually wrapped
as in a vice, and were scarcely able to walk. Yamba then made some
makeshift garments out of opossum skins.

As the girls’ spirits rose higher and higher I was assailed by
other misgivings. I do not know quite how the idea arose, but
somehow they imagined that their protector’s home was a more or
less civilised settlement, with regular houses, furnished with
pianos and other appurtenances of civilised life! So great was
their exuberance that I could not find it in my heart to tell them
that they were merely going among my own friendly natives, whose
admiration and affection for myself only differentiated them from
the other cannibal blacks of unknown Australia.

When first I saw these poor girls, in the glow of the firelight,
and in their rude shelter of boughs, they looked like old women, so
haggard and emaciated were they; but now, as the spacious catamaran
glided down the stately Ord, they gradually resumed their youthful
looks, and were very comely indeed. The awful look of intolerable
anguish that haunted their faces had gone, and they laughed and
chatted with perfect freedom. They were like birds just set at
liberty. They loved Bruno from the very first; and he loved them.

He showed his love, too, in a very practical manner, by going
hunting on his own account and bringing home little ducks to his
new mistresses. Quite of his own accord, also, he would go through
his whole repertoire of tumbling tricks; and whenever the girls
returned to camp from their little wanderings, with bare legs
bleeding from the prickles, Bruno would lick their wounds and
manifest every token of sympathy and affection.

Of course, after leaving the native encampment, it was several
weeks before we made the Ord River, and then we glided down that
fine stream for many days, spearing fish in the little creeks, and
generally amusing ourselves, time being no object. I have, by the
way, seen enormous shoals of fish in this river—mainly mullet—
which can only be compared to the vast swarms of salmon seen in the
rivers of British Columbia.

We came across many isolated hills on our way to the river, and
these delayed us very considerably, because we had to go round
them. Here, again, there was an abundance of food, but the girls
did not take very kindly to the various meats, greatly preferring
the roots which Yamba collected. We came upon fields of wild rice,
which, apart from any other consideration, lent great beauty to the
landscape, covering the country with a pinkish-white blossom. We
forced ourselves to get used to the rice, although it was very
insipid without either salt or sugar.

Sometimes, during our down-river journey, we were obliged to camp
for days and nights without making any progress. This, however,
was only after the river became tidal and swept up against us.

When at length we would put off again in a homeward direction, I
sang many little chansons to my fair companions. The one that
pleased them most, having regard to our position, commenced -

“Filez, filez, mon beau navire,

Car la bonheur m’attend la bas.”

Whenever the girls appeared to be brooding over the terrible
misfortunes they had undergone, I would tell them my own story,
which deeply affected them. They would often weep with tender
sympathy over the series of catastrophes that had befallen me.

They sang to me, too—chiefly hymns, however—such as “Rock of

Ages,” “Nearer, my God, to Thee,” “There is a Happy Land,” and many
others. We were constantly meeting new tribes of natives, and for
the most part were very well received. Bruno, however, always
evinced an unconquerable aversion for the blacks. He was ever kind
to the children, though mostly in disgrace with the men—until they
knew him.

When at length we reached my own home in Cambridge Gulf, the
natives gave us a welcome so warm that in some measure at least it
mitigated the girls’ disappointment at the absence of civilisation.

You see my people were delighted when they saw me bringing home, as
they thought, two white wives; “for now,” they said, “the great
white chief will certainly remain among us for ever.” There were
no wars going on just then, and so the whole tribe gave themselves
up to festivities.

The blacks were also delighted to see the girls, though of course
they did not condescend to greet them, they being mere women, and
therefore beneath direct notice.

I ought to mention here, that long before we reached my home we
were constantly provided with escorts of natives from the various
tribes we met. These people walked along the high banks or
disported themselves in the water like amphibians, greatly to the
delight of the girls. We found the banks of the Ord very thickly
populated, and frequently camped at night with different parties of
natives. Among these we actually came across some I had fought
against many months previously.

As we neared my home, some of our escort sent up smoke-signals to
announce our approach—the old and wonderful “Morse code” of long
puffs, short puffs, spiral puffs, and the rest; the variations
being produced by damping down the fire or fires with green boughs.

Yamba also sent up signals. The result was that crowds of my own
people came out in their catamarans to meet us. My reception, in
fact, was like that accorded a successful Roman General. Needless
to say, there was a series of huge corroborees held in our honour.

The first thing I was told was that my hut had been burnt down in
my absence (fires are of quite common occurrence); and so, for the
first few days after our arrival, the girls were housed in a
temporary grass shelter, pending the construction of a substantial
hut built of logs. Now, as logs were very unusual building
material, a word of explanation is necessary.

The girls never conquered their fear of the blacks—even MY blacks;
and therefore, in order that they might feel secure from night
attack (a purely fanciful idea, of course), I resolved to build a
hut which should be thoroughly spear-proof. Bark was also used
extensively, and there was a thatch of grass. When finished, our
new residence consisted of three fair-sized rooms—one for the
girls to sleep in, one for Yamba and myself, and a third as a
general “living room,”—though, of course, we lived mainly en plain
air. I also arranged a kind of veranda in front of the door, and
here we frequently sat in the evening, singing, chatting about
distant friends; the times that were, and the times that were to
be.

Let the truth be told. When these poor young ladies came to my hut
their faces expressed their bitter disappointment, and we all wept
together the greater part of the night. Afterwards they said how
sorry they were thus to have given way; and they begged me not to
think them ungrateful. However, they soon resigned themselves to
the inevitable, buoyed up by the inexhaustible optimism of youth;
and they settled down to live as comfortably as possible among the
blacks until some fortuitous occurrence should enable us all to
leave these weird and remote regions. The girls were in constant
terror of being left alone—of being stolen, in fact. They had
been told how the natives got wives by stealing them; and they
would wake up in the dead of the night screaming in the most heart-rending manner, with a vague, nameless terror. Knowing that the
ordinary food must be repulsive to my new and delightful
companions, I went back to a certain island, where, during my
journey from the little sand-spit to the main, I had hidden a
quantity of corn beneath a cairn.

This corn I now brought back to my Gulf home, and planted for the
use of the girls. They always ate the corn green in the cob, with
a kind of vegetable “milk” that exudes from one of the palm-trees.

When they became a little more reconciled to their new
surroundings, they took a great interest in their home, and would
watch me for hours as I tried to fashion rude tables and chairs and
other articles of furniture. Yamba acted as cook and waitress, but
after a time the work was more than she could cope with unaided.

You see, she had to FIND the food as well as cook it. The girls,
who were, of course, looked upon as my wives by the tribe (this was
their greatest protection), knew nothing about root-hunting, and
therefore they did not attempt to accompany Yamba on her daily
expeditions. I was in something of a dilemma. If I engaged other
native women to help Yamba, they also would be recognised as my
wives. Finally, I decided there was nothing left for me but to
acquire five more helpmates, who were of the greatest assistance to

Yamba.

Of course, the constant topic of conversation was our ultimate
escape overland; and to this end we made little expeditions to test
the girls’ powers of endurance. I suggested, during one of our
conversations, that we should either make for Port Essington, or
else go overland in search of Port Darwin; but the girls were
averse to this, owing to their terror of the natives.

Little did I dream, however, that at a place called Cossack, on the
coast of the North-West Division of Western Australia, there was a
settlement of pearl-fishers; so that, had I only known it,
civilisation—more or less—was comparatively near. Cossack, it
appears, was the pearling rendezvous on the western side of the
continent, much as Somerset was on the north-east, at the extremity
of the Cape York Peninsula.

My tongue or pen can never tell what those young ladies were to me
in my terrible exile. They would recite passages from Sir Walter

Scott’s works—the “Tales of a Grandfather” I remember in
particular; and so excellent was their memory that they were also
able to give me many beautiful passages from Byron and Shakespeare.

I had always had a great admiration for Shakespeare, and the girls
and myself would frequently act little scenes from “The Tempest,”

as being the most appropriate to our circumstances. The girls’

favourite play, however, was Pericles, “Prince of Tyre.” I took
the part of the King, and when I called for my robes Yamba would
bring some indescribable garments of emu skin, with a gravity that
was comical in the extreme. I, on my part, recited passages from
the French classics—particularly the Fables of La Fontaine, in

French; which language the girls knew fairly well.

And we had other amusements. I made some fiddles out of that
peculiar Australian wood which splits into thin strips. The
strings of the bow we made out of my own hair; whilst those for the
instrument itself were obtained from the dried intestines of the
native wild-cat.

We lined the hut with the bark of the paper-tree, which had the
appearance of a reddish-brown drapery.

The native women made us mats out of the wild flax; and the girls
themselves decorated their room daily with beautiful flowers,
chiefly lilies. They also busied themselves in making garments of
various kinds from opossum skins. They even made some sort of
costume for me, but I could not wear it on account of the
irritation it caused.

The natives would go miles to get fruit for the girls—wild figs,
and a kind of nut about the size of a walnut, which, when ripe, was
filled with a delicious substance looking and tasting like
raspberry jam. There was also a queer kind of apple which grew
upon creepers in the sand, and of which we ate only the outer part
raw, cooking the large kernel which is found inside. I do not know
the scientific name of any of these things.

I often asked the girls whether they had altogether despaired in
the clutches of the cannibal chief; and they told me that although
they often attempted to take their own lives, yet they had
intervals of bright hope—so strong is the optimism of youth. My
apparition, they told me, seemed like a dream to them.

The natives, of course, were constantly moving their camp from
place to place, leaving us alone for weeks at a time; but we kept
pretty stationary, and were visited by other friendly tribes, whom
we entertained (in accordance with my consistent policy) with
songs, plays, recitations, and acrobatic performances.

In these latter Bruno took a great part, and nothing delighted the
blacks more than to see him put his nose on the ground and go head
over heels time after time with great gravity and persistency. But
the effect of Bruno’s many tricks faded into the veriest
insignificance beside that produced by his bark. You must
understand that the native dogs do not bark at all, but simply give
vent to a melancholy howl, not unlike that of the hyena, I believe.

Bruno’s bark, be it said, has even turned the tide of battle, for
he was always in the wars in the most literal sense of the phrase.

These things, combined with his great abilities as a hunter, often
prompted the blacks to put in a demand that Bruno should be made
over to them altogether. Now, this request was both awkward and
inconvenient to answer; but I got out of it by telling them—since
they believed in a curious kind of metempsychosis—that Bruno was

MY BROTHER, whose soul and being he possessed! His bark, I
pretended, was a perfectly intelligible language, and this they
believed the more readily when they saw me speak to the dog and ask
him to do various things, such as fetching and carrying; tumbling,
walking on his hind-legs, &c. &c. But even this argument did not
suffice to overcome the covetousness of some tribes, and I was then
obliged to assure them confidentially that he was a relative of the

Sun, and therefore if I parted with him he would bring all manner
of most dreadful curses down upon his new owner or owners.

Whenever we went rambling I had to keep Bruno as near me as
possible, because we sometimes came across natives whose first
impulse, not knowing that he was a dog, was to spear him. Without
doubt the many cross-breeds between Bruno and the native dogs will
yet be found by Australian explorers.

Our hut was about three-quarters of a mile away from the sea, and
in the morning the very first thing the girls and I did was to go
down to the beach arm-in-arm and have a delicious swim.

They very soon became expert swimmers, by the way, under my
tuition. Frequently I would go out spearing and netting fish, my
principal captures being mullet. We nearly always had fish of some
sort for breakfast, including shell-fish; and we would send the
women long distances for wild honey. Water was the only liquid we
drank at breakfast, and with it Yamba served a very appetising dish
of lily-buds and roots. We used to steam the wild rice—which I
found growing almost everywhere, but never more than two feet high-

-in primitive ovens, which were merely adapted ants’ nests. The
material that formed these nests, we utilised as flooring for our
house. We occasionally received quantities of wild figs from the
inland natives in exchange for shell and other ornaments which they
did not possess. I also discovered a cereal very like barley,
which I ground up and made into cakes. The girls never attempted
to cook anything, there being no civilised appliances of any kind.

Food was never boiled.

From all this you would gather that we were as happy as civilised
beings could possibly be under the circumstances. Nevertheless—
and my heart aches as I recall those times—we had periodical fits
of despondency, which filled us with acute and intolerable agony.

These periods came with curious regularity almost once a week. At
such times I at once instituted sports, such as swimming matches,
races on the beach, swings, and acrobatic performances on the
horizontal bars. Also Shakespearian plays, songs (the girls taught
me most of Moore’s melodies), and recitations both grave and gay.

The fits of despondency were usually most severe when we had been
watching the everlasting sea for hours, and had perhaps at last
caught sight of a distant sail without being able to attract the
attention of those on board. The girls, too, suffered from fits of
nervous apprehension lest I should go away from them for any length
of time. They never had complete confidence even in my friendly
natives. Naturally we were inseparable, we three. We went for
long rambles together, and daily inspected our quaint little corn-garden. At first my charming companions evinced the most
embarrassing gratitude for what I had done, but I earnestly begged
of them never even to mention the word to me. The little I had
done, I told them, was my bare and obvious duty, and was no more
than any other man worthy of the name, would have done.

In our more hopeful moments we would speak of the future, and these
poor girls would dwell upon the thrill of excitement that would go
all through the civilised world, when their story and mine should
first be made known to the public.

For they felt certain their adventures were quite unique in the
annals of civilisation, and they loved to think they would have an
opportunity of “lionising” me when we should return to Europe.

They would not hear me when I protested that such a course would,
from my point of view, be extremely unpleasant and undignified—
even painful.

Every day we kept a good look-out for passing ships; and from
twenty to forty catamarans were always stationed on the beach in
readiness to take us out to sea should there be any hope of a
rescue. As my knowledge of English was at this time not very
perfect, the girls took it upon themselves to improve me, and I
made rapid progress under their vivacious tuition. They would
promptly correct me in the pronunciation of certain vowels when I
read aloud from the only book I possessed—the Anglo-French

Testament I have already mentioned. They were, by the way,
exceedingly interested in the records of my daily life, sensations,

&c., which I had written in BLOOD in the margins of my little Bible
whilst on the island in Timor Sea. About this time I tried to make
some ink, having quill pens in plenty from the bodies of the wild
geese; but the experiment was a failure.

Both girls, as I have already hinted, had wonderful memories, and
could recite numberless passages which they had learnt at school.

Blanche, the elder girl, would give her sister and myself lessons
in elocution; and I should like to say a word to teachers and
children on the enormous utility of COMMITTING SOMETHING TO MEMORY-

-whether poems, songs, or passages from historical or classical
works. It is, of course, very unlikely that any one who reads
these lines will be cast away as we were, but still one never knows
what the future has in store; and I have known pioneers and
prospectors who have ventured into the remoter wilds, and emerged
therefrom years after, to give striking testimony as to the
usefulness of being able to sing or recite in a loud voice.

Sometimes we would have an improvised concert, each of us singing
whatever best suited the voice; or we would all join together in a
rollicking glee. One day, I remember, I started off with -

“A notre heureux sejour,”

but almost immediately I realised how ridiculously inappropriate
the words were. Still, I struggled on through the first verse, but
to my amazement, before I could start the second, the girls joined
in with “God Save the Queen,” which has exactly the same air. The
incident is one that should appeal to all British people, including
even her Most Gracious Majesty herself. As the girls’ voices rose,
half sobbingly, in the old familiar air, beloved of every English-speaking person, tears fairly ran down their fair but sad young
faces, and I could not help being struck with the pathos of the
scene.

But all things considered, these were really happy days for all of
us, at any rate in comparison with those we had previously
experienced. We had by this time quite an orchestra of reed flutes
and the fiddles aforesaid, whose strings were of gut procured from
the native wild-cat—a very little fellow, by the way, about the
size of a fair-sized rat; I found him everywhere. These cats were
great thieves, and only roamed about at night. I trapped them in
great numbers by means of an ingenious native arrangement of
pointed sticks of wood, which, while providing an easy entrance,
yet confronted the outgoing cat with a formidable chevaux-de-frise.

The bait I used was meat in an almost putrid condition.

I could not handle the prisoners in the morning, because they
scratched and bit quite savagely; I therefore forked them out with
a spear. As regards their own prey, they waged perpetual warfare
against the native rats. The skin of these cats was beautifully
soft, and altogether they were quite leopards in miniature. Best
of all, they made excellent eating, the more so in that their flesh
was almost the only meat dish that had not the eternal flavour of
the eucalyptus leaf, which all our other “joints” possessed. The
girls never knew that they were eating cats, to say nothing about
rats. In order to save their feelings, I told them that both

“dishes” were squirrels!

My hair at this time was even longer than the girls’ own, so it is
no wonder that it provided bows for the fiddles. My companions
took great delight in dressing my absurdly long tresses, using
combs which I had made out of porcupines’ quills.

Our contentment was a great source of joy to Yamba, who was now
fully convinced that I would settle down among her people for ever.

The blacks were strangely affected by our singing. Any kind of
civilised music or singing was to them anathema. What they liked
best was the harsh uproar made by pieces of wood beaten together,
or the weird jabbering and chanting that accompanied a big feast.

Our singing they likened to the howling of the dingoes! They were
sincere, hardly complimentary.

Elsewhere I have alluded to the horror the girls had of being left
alone. Whenever I went off with the men on a hunting expedition I
left them in charge of my other women-folk, who were thoroughly
capable of looking after them. I also persuaded the natives to
keep some distance away from our dwelling, particularly when they
were about to hold a cannibal feast, so that the girls were never
shocked by such a fearful sight. Certainly they had known of
cannibalism in their old camp, but I told them that my own people
were a superior race of natives, who were not addicted to this
loathsome practice.

Although we had long since lost count of the days, we always set
aside one day in every seven and recognised it as Sunday, when we
held a kind of service in our spacious hut. Besides the girls,

Yamba, and myself, only our own women-folk were admitted, because I
was careful never to attempt to proselytise any of the natives, or
wean them from their ancient beliefs. The girls were religious in
the very best sense of the term, and they knew the Old and New

Testaments almost by heart. They read the Lessons, and I confess
they taught me a good deal about religion which I had not known
previously. Blanche would read aloud the most touching and
beautiful passages from the Bible; and even as I write I can recall
her pale, earnest face, with its pathetic expression and her low,
musical voice, as she dwelt upon passages likely to console and
strengthen us in our terrible position. The quiet little
discussions we had together on theological subjects settled, once
and for all, many questions that had previously vexed me a great
deal.

Both girls were devoted adherents of the Church of England, and
could repeat most of the Church services entirely from memory.

They wanted to do a little missionary work among the blacks, but I
gently told them I thought this inadvisable, as any rupture in our
friendly relations with the natives would have been quite fatal—if
not to our lives, at least to our chances of reaching civilisation.

Moreover, my people were not by any means without a kind of
religion of their own. They believed in the omnipotence of a Great

Spirit in whose hands their destinies rested; and him they
worshipped with much the same adoration which Christians give to

God. The fundamental difference was that the sentiment animating
them was not LOVE, but FEAR: propitiation rather than adoration.

We sang the usual old hymns at our Sunday services, and I soon
learned to sing them myself. On my part, I taught the girls such
simple hymns as the one commencing “Une nacelle en silence,” which

I had learnt at Sunday-school in Switzerland. It is interesting to
note that this was Bruno’s favourite air. Poor Bruno! he took more
or less kindly to all songs—except the Swiss jodellings, which he
simply detested. When I started one of these plaintive ditties

Bruno would first protest by barking his loudest, and if I
persisted, he would simply go away in disgust to some place where
he could not hear the hated sounds. On Sunday evening we generally
held a prayer-service in the hut, and at such times offered up most
fervent supplications for delivery.

Often I have seen these poor girls lifting up their whole souls in
prayer, quite oblivious for the moment of their surroundings, until
recalled to a sense of their awful positions by the crash of an
unusually large wave on the rocks.

The girls knew no more of Australian geography than I did; and when

I mention that I merely had a vague idea that the great cities of
the continent—Sydney, Adelaide, Perth, and Melbourne—all lay in a
southerly direction, you may imagine how dense was my ignorance of
the great island. I am now the strongest possible advocate of a
sound geographical training in schools.

On ordinary days we indulged in a variety of games, the principal
one being a form of “rounders.” I made a ball out of opossum skin,
stuffed with the light soft bark of the paper-tree, and stitched
with gut. We used a yam-stick to strike it with. My native women
attendants often joined in the fun, and our antics provided a vast
amount of amusement for the rest of the tribe. The girls taught me
cricket, and in due time I tried to induce the blacks to play the

British national game, but with little success. We made the
necessary bats and stumps out of hard acacia, which I cut down with
my tomahawk. The natives themselves, however, made bats much
better than mine, simply by whittling flat their waddies; and they
soon became expert batsmen. But unfortunately they failed to see
why they should run after the ball, especially when they had
knocked it a very great distance away. Running about in this
manner, they said, was only fit work for women, and was quite
beneath their dignity. Yamba and I fielded, but soon found
ourselves unequal to the task, owing to the enormous distances we
had to travel in search of the ball. Therefore we soon abandoned
the cricket, and took up football, which was very much more
successful.

We had a nice large football made of soft goose-skin stuffed with
the paper bark; and in considering our game you must always bear in
mind that boots or footgear of any kind were quite unknown. The
great drawback of football, from the native point of view, was that
it entailed so much exertion, which could be otherwise expended in
a far more profitable and practical manner. They argued that if
they put the exertion requisite for a game of football into a hunt
for food, they would have enough meat to last them for many days.

It was, of course, utterly impossible to bring them round to my
view of sports and games. With regard to the abandoned cricket,
they delighted in hitting the ball and in catching it—oh! they
were wonderfully expert at this—but as to running after the ball,
this was quite impossible.

About this time the girls showed me the steps of an Irish jig,
which I quickly picked up and soon became quite an adept, much to
the delight of the natives, who never tired of watching my
gyrations. I kept them in a constant state of wonderment, so that
even my very hair—now about three feet long—commanded their
respect and admiration!

Sometimes I would waltz with the younger girl, whilst her sister
whistled an old familiar air. When I danced, the blacks would
squat in a huge circle around me; those in the front rank keeping
time by beating drums that I had made and presented to them. The
bodies of the drums were made from sections of trees which I found
already hollowed out by the ants. These wonderful little insects
would bore through and through the core of the trunk, leaving only
the outer shell, which soon became light and dry. I then scraped
out with my tomahawk any of the rough inner part that remained, and
stretched over the ends of each section a pair of the thinnest
wallaby skins I could find; these skins were held taut by sinews
from the tail of a kangaroo. I tried emu-skins for the drum-heads,
but found they were no good, as they soon became perforated when I
scraped them.

Never a day passed but we eagerly scanned the glistening sea in the
hope of sighting a passing sail. One vessel actually came right
into our bay from the north, but she suddenly turned right back on
the course she had come. She was a cutter-rigged vessel, painted a
greyish-white, and of about fifty tons burden. She was probably a

Government vessel—possibly the Claud Hamilton, a South Australian
revenue boat stationed at Port Darwin—as she flew the British
ensign at the masthead; whereas a pearler would have flown it at
the peak. The moment we caught sight of that ship I am afraid we
lost our heads. We screamed aloud with excitement, and ran like
mad people up and down the beach, waving branches and yelling like
maniacs. I even waved wildly my long, luxuriant hair.

Unfortunately, the wind was against us, blowing from the WSW. We
were assisted in our frantic demonstration by quite a crowd of
natives with branches; and I think it possible that, even if we had
been seen, the people on the ship would have mistaken our efforts
for a more hostile demonstration.

When it was too late, and the ship almost out of sight, I suddenly
realised that I had made another fatal mistake in having the blacks
with me. Had I and the two girls been alone on the beach I feel
sure the officers of the ship would have detected our white skins
through their glasses. But, indeed, we may well have escaped
notice altogether.

There was a terrible scene when the supposed Government vessel
turned back on her course and passed swiftly out of sight. The
girls threw themselves face downwards on the beach, and wept wildly
and hysterically in the very depths of violent despair. I can
never hope to tell you what a bitter and agonising experience it
was—the abrupt change from delirious excitement at seeing a ship
steering right into our bay, to the despairing shock of beholding
it turn away from us even quicker than it came.

CHAPTER XII

The girls in sun-bonnets—I advise the blacks—Fatal excitement—

Last moments—The catastrophe—I cannot realise it—A fearful
contrast—“Only a withered flower”—Bruno’s grief—Steering by the
ant-hills—Avoiding the forests—Myriads of rats—The flowing of
the tide—Rats and the native children—Clouds of locusts—Fish
from the clouds.

The weeks gradually grew into months, and still we were apparently
no nearer civilisation than ever. Again and again we made
expeditions to see whether it were possible for the girls to reach

Port Darwin overland; but, unfortunately, I had painted for them in
such vivid colours the tortures of thirst which I had undergone on
my journey towards Cape York, that they were always afraid to leave
what was now their home to go forth unprovided into the unknown.

Sometimes a fit of depression so acute would come over them, that
they would shut themselves up in their room and not show themselves
for a whole day.

We had a very plentiful supply of food, but one thing the girls
missed very much was milk,—which of course, was an unheard-of
luxury in these regions. We had a fairly good substitute, however,
in a certain creamy and bitter-tasting juice which we obtained from
a palm-tree. This “milk,” when we got used to it, we found
excellent when used with the green corn. The corn-patch was
carefully fenced in from kangaroos, and otherwise taken care of;
and I may here remark that I made forks and plates of wood for my
fair companions, and also built them a proper elevated bed, with
fragrant eucalyptus leaves and grass for bedding. For the cold
nights there was a covering of skin rugs, with an overall quilt
made from the wild flax.

The girls made themselves sun-bonnets out of palm-leaves; while
their most fashionable costume was composed of the skins of birds
and marsupials, cunningly stitched together by Yamba. During the
cold winter months of July and August we camped at a more sheltered
spot, a little to the north, where there was a range of mountains,
whose principal peak was shaped like a sugar-loaf.

I frequently accompanied the warriors on their fighting
expeditions, but did not use my stilts, mainly because we never
again met so powerful an enemy as we had battled with on that
memorable occasion. My people were often victorious, but once or
twice we got beaten by reason of the other side having drawn first
blood. My natives took their reverses with a very good grace, and
were never very depressed or inclined to view me with less favour
because of their want of success. We were always the best of
friends, and I even ventured gradually to wean them from
cannibalism.

I knew they ate human flesh, not because they felt hungry, but
because they hoped to acquire the additional valour of the warrior
they were eating. I therefore diplomatically pointed out to them
that, in the first place, all kinds of dreadful diseases which the
dead man might have had would certainly be communicated to them,
and in this I was providentially borne out by a strange epidemic.

The second consideration I mentioned was that by making anklets,
bracelets, and other ornaments out of the dead braves’ hair, they
could acquire for themselves in a much more efficacious manner the
valour and other estimable qualities of the departed warrior.

Whilst I was on this subject I also advised them strongly and
impressively never wantonly to attack white men, but rather to make
friendly advances towards them. I often wonder now whether
explorers who follow in my track will notice the absence of
cannibalism and the friendly overtures of the natives.

Two half painful, half merry years, passed by. We had seen several
ships passing out at sea, and on more than one occasion Yamba and

I, taught by previous lessons, had jumped into our canoe and pulled
for many miles in the direction of the sail, leaving the girls
watching us eagerly from the shore. But it was always useless, and
we were compelled to return without having accomplished our
purpose; we merely inflicted additional pain on ourselves.

I now come to what is possibly the most painful episode of my
career, and one which I find it impossible to discuss, or write
about, without very real pain. Even at this distance of time I
cannot recall that tragic day without bitter tears coming into my
eyes, and being afflicted with a gnawing remorse which can never
completely die in my heart. Do not, I beg of you, in considering
my actions, ask me why I did not do this, or that, or the other.

In terrible crises I believe we become almost mechanical, and are
not responsible for what we do. I have often thought that, apart
from our own volition, each set of nerves and fibres in our being
has a will of its own.

Well, one gloriously fine day we sighted a ship going very slowly
across the gulf, several miles away. Would to God we had never
seen her! We were thrown, as usual, into a perfect frenzy of wild
excitement, and the girls dashed here and there like people
possessed. Of course, I determined to intercept the vessel if
possible, and the girls at once expressed their intention of coming
with me. I attempted earnestly to dissuade them from this, but
they wept pitifully and implored me to let them come. They were
filled with an ungovernable longing to get away—the same longing,
perhaps, that animates a caged bird who, although well fed and
kindly treated, soars away without a moment’s hesitation when an
opportunity occurs. Quite against my better judgment, I let them
come. Every second was precious and every argument futile. While

Yamba was getting ready the canoe I rushed from one group of
natives to the other, coaxing, promising, imploring. I pointed out
to them that they could propel their catamarans faster than I could
paddle my canoe; and I promised them that if I reached the ship I
would send them presents from the white man’s land of tomahawks and
knives; gaily coloured cloths and gorgeous jewellery. But they
were only too ready to help me without any of these inducements;
and in an incredibly short time at least twenty catamarans, each
containing one or two men, put off from the shore in my wake and
made directly towards the ship, whilst I struck off at a tangent so
as to head her off. I now see that without doubt we must have
presented a very formidable appearance to the people on the vessel
as we paddled over the sunlit seas, racing one another, yelling,
and gesticulating like madmen. Of course, the people on board
quite naturally thought they were being attacked by a savage
flotilla. But in the excitement of the moment I never gave this a
thought. Had I only left my faithful natives behind all might have
been well. Yamba and I kept the canoe well ahead, and we reached
the neighbourhood of the ship first.

As we approached, the excitement of the girls was painful to
witness. They could scarcely contain themselves for joy; and as I
forcibly prevented them from standing up in the frail canoe, they
contented themselves with frantically waving their hands and
screaming themselves hoarse.

Nearing the vessel I was surprised to see the top-sail being
hoisted, but, strange to say, the crew kept well out of sight.

This was easy to do, considering the spread of canvas. She was not
a Malay vessel, being decidedly of European rig. She was only a
small craft, of perhaps ten or fifteen tons, with one mast carrying
a mainsail and staysail, in addition to the top-sail that had
been hoisted as we approached. To us, however, she was a “ship.”

We were now about one hundred and fifty yards away, and I suddenly
leapt to my feet and coo-eed several times. Still no one showed
himself, and not a soul was visible on board. My own joyful
excitement speedily turned to heart-sickness, alarm, and even
terror. By this time the flotilla of catamarans was close behind
me; and just as I was about to sit down and take to my paddle
again, so as to advance still closer to the vessel, the loud report
of a gun was heard; and then—well, what followed next is
exceedingly difficult for me to describe accurately. Whether I was
wounded by the shot, or whether the girls suddenly stood up,
causing me to lose my balance and fall on the side of the canoe and
cut my thigh, I do not know.

At any rate, I crashed heavily overboard in spite of Yamba’s
desperate attempt to save me. The next moment I had forgotten all
about the ship, and was only conscious of Yamba swimming close by
my side, and occasionally gripping my long hair when she thought I
was going under. We righted the canoe and climbed in as quickly as
we could. I think I was dazed and incapable of any coherent
thought. As I collapsed in the bottom of the canoe, I suddenly
realised that Yamba and I were alone; and sitting up, I gasped,

“The girls, the girls! Where are they? Oh, where are they? We
must save them!”

Alas! they had sunk beneath the smiling waves, and they never rose
again. True, they were expert swimmers, but I suppose the terrible
excitement, followed by the sudden shock, was too much for them,
and as they sank for the first time they probably clung to each
other in the embrace of death. God knows best. Perhaps it was
better that He should take my loved ones from me than that they
should be dragged through the terrible years that followed.

But for a long time I utterly refused to believe that my darlings
were lost—they were truly as sisters to me; and Yamba and I and
the natives dived for them time after time, searching the sea in
every direction. But at length, seeing that I was exhausted, Yamba
forcibly detained me, and told me that I myself would inevitably
drown if I went into the water again. The wound in my thigh (I am
uncertain to this day whether it was the result of the gun-shot or
mere collision with the rough gunwale of the canoe) was bleeding
freely; and as it was also pointed out to me that there was a very
strong and swift current at this spot, I allowed myself to be taken
away without any further opposition.

I simply COULD not realise my bereavement. It seemed too terrible
and stunning to think, that when God had provided me with these two
charming companions, who were all in all to me every moment of my
existence, as a consolation for the horrors I had gone through—it
seemed impossible, I say, that they should be snatched from me just
at the very moment when salvation seemed within our reach. Every
detail of the incident passed before my mental vision, but I could
not grasp it—I could not seem to think it real. I can never
explain it. These poor girls were more to me than loving sisters.

They turned the black night of my desolate existence into sunshine,
and they were perpetually devising some sweet little surprise—some
little thing which would please me and add additional brightness to
our daily lives. This dreadful thing happened many years ago, but
to this day, and to the day of my death, I feel sure I shall suffer
agonies of grief and remorse (I blame myself for not having
forbidden them to go in the canoe) for this terrible catastrophe.

After we returned to the land, I haunted the seashore for hours,
hoping to see the bodies rise to the surface; but I watched in
vain. When at length the full magnitude of the disaster dawned
upon me, despair—the utter abandonment of despair—filled my soul
for the first time. Never again would my sweet companions cheer my
solitary moments. Never again would I see their loved forms, or
hear their low, musical voices. Never again would we play together
like children on the sand. Never again would we build aerial
castles about the bright and happy future that was in store for us,
looking back from the bourne of civilisation on our fantastic
adventures. Never again should we compare our lot with that of

Robinson Crusoe or the Swiss Family Robinson.

My bright dream had passed away, and with a sudden revulsion of
feeling I realised that the people around me were repulsive
cannibals, among whom I was apparently doomed to pass the remainder
of my hideous days—a fate infinitely more terrible than that of
joining my darlings beneath the restless waves, that beat for ever
on that lonely shore. I was a long time before I could even bring
myself to be thankful for Yamba’s escape, which was no doubt
dreadfully ungrateful of me. I can only ask your pity and sympathy
in my terrible affliction. What made my sorrow and remorse the
more poignant, was the reflection that if I had retained one atom
of my self-possession I would never have dreamed of approaching the
little European vessel at the head of a whole flotilla of
catamarans, filled with yelling and gesticulating savages. As to
the people on board the vessel, I exonerated them then, and I
exonerate them now, from all blame. Had you or I been on board, we
should probably have done exactly the same thing under the
circumstances.

Clearly the only reasonable plan of action was to have gone alone;
but then, at critical times, even the wisest among us is apt to
lose his head. God knows I paid dearly enough for my lack of
judgment on this melancholy occasion.

My wound was not at all serious, and, thanks to Yamba’s care, it
quickly healed, and I was able to get about once more.

But I ought to tell you that when we returned I could not bear to
go into our hut, where every little bunch of withered flowers,
every garment of skin, and every implement, proclaimed aloud the
stunning loss I had sustained. No, I went back direct to the camp
of the natives, and remained among them until the moment came for
my departure. I think it was in the soft, still nights that I felt
it most. I wept till I was as weak as a baby. Oh the torments of
remorse I endured—the fierce resentment against an all-wise

Providence! “Alone! alone! alone!” I would shriek in an agony of
wretchedness; “Gone! gone! gone! Oh, come back to me, come back to
me, I cannot live here now.”

And I soon realised that it was impossible for me to remain there
any longer. There was much weeping and lamentation among the
native women, but I guessed it was not so much on account of the
poor girls, as out of sympathy for the loss the great white chief
had sustained. I think Yamba went among them, and pointed out the
magnitude of the disaster; otherwise they would have failed to
grasp it. What was the loss of a woman or two to them? I felt, I
say, that I could not settle down in my hut again, and I was
consumed with an intense longing to go away into the wilderness and
there hide my grief. In making an attempt to reach civilisation, I
thought this time of going due south, so that perhaps I might
ultimately reach Sydney, or Melbourne, or Adelaide. I argued thus
casually to myself, little dreaming of the vast distances—mountain
ranges and waterless deserts—that separated me from these great
cities. For all I knew, I might have come upon them in a few
weeks! All I was certain of was that they lay somewhere to the
south. Time was no object to me, and I might as well be walking in
the direction of civilisation as remaining in idle misery in my bay
home, brooding over the disaster that had clouded my life and made
it infinitely more intolerable than it was before the girls came.

Yamba instantly agreed to accompany me, and a few weeks after the
loss of the girls we started out once more on our wanderings,
accompanied by my ever faithful dog.

Bruno also missed his young mistresses. He would moan and cry
pitifully, and run aimlessly up and down the beach looking out to
sea. Ah! had I only taken Bruno on that fatal day, he would not
have let my dear ones drown!

As I have said, I remained only a few weeks in my bay home, and
then departed. The blacks, too, left the spot, for they never stay
where the shadow of death lies, fearing the unpleasant attentions
of the spirits of the deceased. The parting between me and my
people was a most affecting one, the women fairly howling in
lamentations, which could be heard a great distance away. They had
shown such genuine sympathy with me in my misfortune that our
friendship had very materially increased; but in spite of this good
feeling, I knew I could never be happy among them again.

So we started off into the unknown, with no more provision or
equipment than if we were going for a stroll of a mile or so.

Yamba carried her yam-stick and basket, and I had my usual weapons-

-tomahawk and stiletto in my belt, and bow and arrows in my hand.

I never dreamed when we started that to strike due south would take
us into the unexplored heart of the continent. Day after day,
however, we walked steadily on our course, steering in a very
curious manner. We were guided by the ant-hills, which are always
built facing the east, whilst the top inclines towards the north;
and we knew that the scratches made on trees by the opossums were
invariably on the north side.

We often steered by the habits of insects, wasps’ nests, and other
curious auguries, fixing our position at night by the stars and in
the daytime by our own shadows. Yamba always went in front and I
followed. The bush teemed with fruits and roots. After leaving
our own camp in the Cambridge Gulf region we struck a fine elevated
land, excellently well watered; and later on we followed the

Victoria River in a south-easterly direction through part of the

Northern Territories of South Australia. We at length struck a
peculiar country covered with coarse grass ten feet or twelve feet
high—not unlike the sugar-cane which I afterwards saw, but much
more dense.

It was, of course, impossible for us to pursue our course due
south, owing to the forests and ranges which we encountered; we
had, as a matter of fact, to follow native and kangaroo tracks
wherever they took us—east, west, and even north occasionally,
generally to water-holes. The progress of the natives is simply
from one water supply to another. But as far as possible we
pursued our way south. You will understand that this kind of
travelling was very different from that which we experienced on the

Victoria River—which, by the way, traversed a very fine country.

As we ascended it we passed many isolated hills of perhaps a few
hundred feet, and nowhere did I see any scrub or spinifex.

After leaving the Victoria we came upon a more elevated plateau
covered with rather fine but short grass; the trees were scarcer
here, but finer and bigger. There was plenty of water in the
native wells and in the hollows, although we frequently had to
remove a few stones to get at it. There were plenty of kangaroos
and emus about, as well as turkeys; these latter provided us with
an unwonted dish, to say nothing of their delicious eggs.

Another reason for our coming round out of our course when we came
to forests was because but little food was found in them.

Kangaroos and other animals were seldom or never found there: they
abounded usually in the more scrubby country. Our progress was
very leisurely, and, as we met tribe after tribe, we ingratiated
ourselves with them and camped at their wells. Occasionally we
came upon curious rivers and lagoons that ran into the earth and
disappeared in the most mysterious way, only to reappear some
distance farther on. Of course, I may be mistaken in this, but
such at any rate was my impression.

One day as we were marching steadily along, Yamba startled me by
calling out excitedly, “Up a tree,—quick! Up a tree!” And so
saying she scampered up the nearest tree herself. Now, by this
time I had become so accustomed to acting upon her advice
unquestioningly, that without waiting to hear any more I made a
dash for the nearest likely tree and climbed into it as fast as I
could. Had she called out to me, “Leap into the river,” I should
have done so without asking a question. When I was safely in the
branches, however, I called out to her (her tree was only a few
yards away), “What is the matter?” She did not reply, but pointed
to a vast stretch of undulating country over which we had just
come; it was fairly well wooded. It lingers in my mind as a region
in which one was able to see a fairly long way in every direction—
a very unusual feature in the land of “Never Never”!

I looked, but at first could see nothing. Presently, however, it
seemed to me that the whole country in the far distance was covered
with a black mantle, WHICH APPEARED TO BE MADE UP OF LIVING

CREATURES.

Steadily and rapidly this great mysterious wave swept along towards
us; and seeing that I was both puzzled and alarmed, Yamba gave me
to understand that WE SHOULD PRESENTLY BE SURROUNDED BY MYRIADS OF

RATS, stretching away in every direction like a living sea. The
phenomenon was evidently known to Yamba, and she went on to explain
that these creatures were migrating from the lowlands to the
mountains, knowing by instinct that the season of the great floods
was at hand. That weird and extraordinary sight will live in my
memory for ever. I question whether a spectacle so fantastic and
awe-inspiring was ever dealt with, even in the pages of quasi-scientific fiction. It was impossible for me to observe in what
order the rats were advancing, on account of the great stretch of
country which they covered. Soon, however, their shrill squeals
were distinctly heard, and a few minutes later the edge of that
strange tide struck our tree and swept past us with a force
impossible to realise. No living thing was spared. Snakes,
lizards—ay, even the biggest kangaroos—succumbed after an
ineffectual struggle. The rats actually ate those of their fellows
who seemed to hesitate or stumble. The curious thing was that the
great army never seemed to stand still. It appeared to me that
each rat simply took a bite at whatever prey came his way, and then
passed on with the rest.

I am unable to say how long the rats were in passing—it might have
been an hour. Yamba told me that there would have been no help for
us had we been overtaken on foot by these migratory rodents. It is
my opinion that no creature in Nature, from the elephant downwards,
could have lived in that sea of rats. I could not see the ground
between them, so closely were they packed. The only creatures that
escaped them were birds. The incessant squealing and the patter of
their little feet made an extraordinary sound, comparable only to
the sighing of the wind or the beat of a great rain-storm. I ought
to mention, though, that I was unable accurately to determine the
sound made by the advancing rats owing to my partial deafness,
which you will remember was caused by the great wave which dashed
me on to the deck of the Veielland, just before landing on the
sand-spit in the Sea of Timor. I often found this deafness a very
serious drawback, especially when hunting. I was sometimes at a
loss to hear the “coo-ee” or call of my natives. Fortunate men!

THEY did not even understand what deafness meant. Lunacy also was
unknown among them, and such a thing as suicide no native can
possibly grasp or understand. In all my wanderings I only met one
idiot or demented person. He had been struck by a falling tree,
and was worshipped as a demi-god!

When the rats had passed by, we watched them enter a large creek
and swim across, after which they disappeared in the direction of
some ranges which were not very far away. They never seemed to
break their ranks; even when swimming, one beheld the same level
brownish mass on the surface of the water. Yamba told me that this
migration of rats was not at all uncommon, but that the creatures
rarely moved about in such vast armies as the one that had just
passed.

I also learned that isolated parties of migrating rats were
responsible for the horrible deaths of many native children, who
had, perhaps, been left behind in camp by their parents, who had
gone in search of water.

Up to this time we had always found food plentiful. On our
southward journey a particularly pleasant and convenient article of
diet turned up (or fell down) in the form of the MARU, as it is
called, which collects on the leaves of trees during the night.

Both in its appearance and manner of coming, this curious substance
may be likened to the manna that fell in the wilderness for the
benefit of the Israelites. This maru is a whitish substance, not
unlike raw cotton in appearance. The natives make bread of it; it
is rather tasteless, but is very nutritious, and only obtained at
certain times—for example, it never falls at the time of full
moon, and is peculiar to certain districts.

During this great southward journey many strange things happened,
and we saw a host of curious sights. I only wish I could trust my
memory to place these in their proper chronological order.

We had several visitations of locusts; and on one occasion, some
months after leaving home, they settled upon the country around us
so thickly as actually to make a living bridge across a large
creek. On several occasions I have had to dig through a living
crust of these insects, six or eight inches thick, in order to
reach water at a water-hole. These locusts are of a yellowish-brown colour (many are grey), and they range in length from two to
four inches.

As they rise in the air they make a strange cracking, snapping
sound; and they were often present in such myriads as actually to
hide the face of the sun. I found them excellent eating when
grilled on red-hot stones.

Yamba, of course, did all the cooking, making a fire with her ever-ready firestick, which no native woman is ever without; and while
she looked after the supply of roots and opossum meat, I generally
provided the snakes, emus, and kangaroos. Our shelter at night
consisted merely of a small GUNYAH made of boughs, and we left the
fire burning in front of this when we turned in.

When we had been fully three months out, a very extraordinary thing
happened, which to many people would be incredible were it not
recognised as a well-known Australian phenomenon. We had reached a
very dry and open grass country, where there was not a tree to be
seen for miles and miles. Suddenly, as Yamba and I were squatting
on the ground enjoying a meal, we saw a strange black cloud looming
on the horizon, and hailed its advent with the very greatest
delight, inasmuch as it presaged rain—which is always so vitally
important a visitation in the “Never Never.” We waited in
anticipation until the cloud was right over our heads. Then the
deluge commenced, and to my unbounded amazement I found that with
the rain LIVE FISH AS BIG AS WHITEBAIT WERE FALLING FROM THE

CLOUDS! When this wonderful rain-storm had passed, large pools of
water were left on the surface of the ground, and most of these
were fairly alive with fish. This surface-water, however,
evaporated in the course of a few days, and then, as the blazing
sun beat down upon the fish-covered country, we found the region
growing quite intolerable on account of the awful stench.

Talking of storms, I have seen it stated that the Australian
natives are in a state of high glee whenever they hear thunder.

This is perfectly true, but I have never seen any explanation of
this joy. It is simple enough. The natives know that thunder
presages rain, which is always a blessing of great price in that
thirsty country.

I think this was the first time I had actually SEEN it rain fish.

But I had often been surprised, to find water-holes, and even the
pools in grassy plains, literally alive with fish a few days after
a storm. And they grew with astounding rapidity, provided the
water did not evaporate. This was in the vicinity of my Cambridge

Gulf home.

We remained in the neighbourhood for some time, living on a most
welcome fish diet. Very frequently in our wanderings we were
provided with another dainty in the shape of a worm, which, when
broiled over charcoal, had the flavour of a walnut.

These worms we found in the grass trees, which grow to a height of
ten to twenty feet, and have bare trunks surmounted by what looks
at a distance like a big bunch of drooping bulrushes. The worms
were of a whitish colour, and were always found in the interior of
a well-matured or decaying stem; so that all we had to do was to
push the tree over with our feet and help ourselves.

In the course of our wanderings we usually went from tribe to
tribe, staying a little time with some, and with others merely
exchanging greetings. With some tribes we would perhaps travel a
little way south, and only part with them when they were about to
strike northwards; and as their course was simply from water-hole
to water-hole, as I have told you, it was always pretty erratic.

CHAPTER XIII

My usual introduction—A serious entertainment—The power of the
bow—Repulsive blacks—Mysterious spears—Waterless wastes—A
battle with snakes—More prestige—Rubies thrown away—Quarrying
extraordinary.

Occasionally one of the tribes would display hostility towards us
at first sight, but I generally managed to ingratiate myself into
their good graces by the exercise of a little diplomacy—and
acrobatics. Curiously enough, many of these tribes did not display
much surprise at seeing a white man, apparently reserving all their
amazement for Bruno’s bark and the white man’s wonderful
performances.

I may here remark that, in the event of our coming across a hostile
tribe who fought shy of my friendly advances, I would, without
ceremony, introduce myself by dashing into their midst and turning
a few somersaults or Catherine-wheels such as the London GAMINS
display for the benefit of easily-pleased excursionists. This
queer entertainment usually created roars of laughter, and set
every one at his ease.

I remember once being surprised by the sudden appearance over the
crest of a hillock of about twenty blacks, all well armed and
presenting rather a formidable appearance. The moment they caught
sight of Yamba and myself they halted, whereupon I advanced and
called out to them that I was a friend, at the same time holding
out my passport stick. By the way, the efficacy of this talisman
varied according to the tribes. Yamba could make neither head nor
tail of these people; they jabbered in a language quite
unintelligible to either of us. I then reverted to the inevitable
sign language, giving them to understand that I wished to sleep
with them a night or two; but they still continued to brandish
their spears ominously. Yamba presently whispered in my ear that
we had better not trouble them any further, as they were evidently
inclined to be pugnacious. This was a very exceptional rencontre,
because I usually induced the natives to sit down and parley with
me, and then I would produce my mysterious stick. In the event of
this proving of little account, both I and Bruno would without a
moment’s hesitation plunge into our performance. It always began
with a few somersaults. Bruno needed no looking after. He knew
his business, and went through his own repertoire with great energy
and excitement. The accompanying barks were probably involuntary,
but they were a great help in astonishing and impressing the
natives.

Even in this instance I was unwilling to retire defeated; so
suddenly pulling out one of my little reed whistles capable of
producing two notes, I commenced a violent jig to my own “music.”

The effect on the scowling and ferocious-looking blacks was quite
magical. They immediately threw down their spears and laughed
uproariously at my vigorous antics. I danced till I was quite
tired, but managed to wind up the entertainment with a few
somersaults, which impressed them vastly.

I had conquered. When I had finished they advanced and greeted me
most heartily, and from that moment we were friends. I had
completely done away with their enmity by my simple efforts to
amuse them. For the most part, this was my invariable experience.

The natives were the easiest people in the world to interest and
amuse, and when once I had succeeded in winning them in this way,
they were our warmest friends. This band of warriors took us back
to their camping-ground, some miles away, and actually gave a great
feast in my honour that evening, chanting the wonderful things they
had seen until far into the night. The place where I met these
blacks was a broken, stony, and hilly country, which, however,
abounded in roots and snakes—especially snakes. My hosts had
evidently had a recent battue, or fire hunt, for they had a most
extraordinary stock of food. So completely had I won them over,
that I actually hung up my bow and arrows along with their spears
before retiring to rest. The expression “hung up” may seem
curious, so I hasten to explain that the natives tied up their
spears in bunches and placed them on the scrub bushes.

Next morning I brought down a few hawks on the wing with my bow and
arrows, and then the amazement of the natives was quite comical to
witness. Shooting arrows in a straight line astonished them
somewhat, but the more bombastic among them would say, “Why I can
do that,” and taking his woomerah he would hurl a spear a long
distance. Not one of them, however, was able TO THROW A SPEAR

UPWARDS, so I scored over even the most redoubtable chiefs. It may
be well to explain, that birds are always to be found hovering
about a native camp; they act as scavengers, and their presence in
the sky is always an indication that an encampment is somewhere in
the vicinity. These birds are especially on the spot when the
blacks set fire to the bush and organise a big battue. At such
times the rats and lizards rush out into the open, and the hawks
reap a fine harvest.

My natives are referred to as “blacks,” or “black-fellows,” but
they are not really BLACK, their hue being rather a brown, ranging
from a very dark brown, indeed, to almost the lightness of a Malay.

I found the coast tribes lightest in hue, while the inland natives
were very much darker. Here I may mention that after having been
on my way south for some months, I began to notice a total
difference between the natives I met and my own people in the

Cambridge Gulf district. The tribes I was now encountering daily
were inferior in physique, and had inferior war implements; I do
not remember that they had any shields.

The blacks I had whistled and jigged before were, perhaps, the
ugliest of all the aborigines I had met, which was saying a very
great deal. The men were very short, averaging little more than
five feet, with low foreheads and hideously repulsive features. I
noticed, however, that the animals they had for food seemed very
much fatter than similar creatures farther north. One thing I was
grateful to these people for was honey, which I urgently required
for medicinal purposes. They were very sorry when we left them,
and a small band of warriors accompanied us on our first day’s
march. We were then handed on from tribe to tribe, smoke signals
being sent up to inform the next “nation” that friendly strangers
were coming.

Nevertheless, I gradually became uneasy. We were evidently getting
into a country where the greatest of our wonders could not save us
from the hostility of the natives. We presently encountered
another tribe, who not only at first refused to accept our friendly
overtures, but even threatened to attack us before I had time to
consider another plan. I tried the effect of my whistle, but even
this failed in its effect; and to my alarm, before I could give
them an exhibition of my acrobatic powers they had hurled one or
two war spears, which whizzed by unpleasantly close to my head.

Without further ado, well knowing that vacillation meant death, I
sent half-a-dozen arrows in succession amongst them, taking care,
however, to aim very low, so as not unduly to injure my opponents.

The hostile blacks came to a sudden halt, as they found the
mysterious spears flying round them, and then watching my
opportunity, I dashed forward right among them, and turned over and
over in a series of rapid and breathless somersaults.

I had conquered again. Do not blame the natives, for with them
every stranger is an enemy until he has proved himself a friend.

Hence it is that when white men suddenly appear among these natives
they run imminent risk of being promptly speared, unless they can
make it quite clear that no harm is intended.

Bruno ran the same risk. Incident after incident of this kind
happened almost daily, and although they involved some peril, yet
they came as a welcome break when life on the march grew too
monotonous. Deliberate treachery was very rare among the natives I
came across, but it was by no means altogether absent; and,
notwithstanding all my knowledge, my wife and I were sometimes in
serious danger of our lives.

One day we came upon a tribe as usual, and after the customary
preliminaries were gone through they became apparently quite
friendly. I was careful never unduly to exhibit my steel tomahawk,
which I always kept in a kind of sheath or covering of opossum-skin, so that it might not arouse envy; a second motive for this
was to prevent its chafing my body. I never used either stiletto
or tomahawk unless absolutely necessary, reserving both for great
emergencies. I knew they could never be replaced, so it behoved me
jealously to guard such precious possessions. I never even used my
stiletto at meal-times, nor even in cutting up animals for food,
lest the blood should rust the blade and eat it away. Many times
already had it come in useful at close quarters—notably in the
case of the fight with the alligator and the killing of the
cannibal chief who owned the white girls.

The chief of the tribe I am discussing saw me using my tomahawk one
day, and eagerly asked me to make over the implement to him as a
gift. I courteously told him that I could not do so. He seemed
somewhat disappointed at my refusal, but did not appear to bear me
any ill-feeling in consequence. The blacks, by the way, seldom cut
down trees except for spears, and the reason for this is very
curious. They imagine the tree to be a thing of life, and when
they are forced to cut one down, quite a religious ceremony is
held, and profuse apologies made to the tree for taking its life.

They never even take a strip of bark right round, knowing that this
will kill the tree; they always leave a little bit of connecting
bark.

As some reason for the refusal of my tomahawk was expected, I told
the chief that it was part of my life—indeed, part of my very
being, which was perfectly true. I also worked on the chief’s
superstitions, assuring him earnestly that if I parted with the
weapon it would so anger the spirits as to bring about a terrible
curse in the country. The tomahawk I declared was a direct gift to
me from the Sun itself, so how could I part with it? I had thought
of offering it, curses and all, but the risk of prompt acceptance
was too great.

That night Yamba warned me that trouble was impending. For myself

I never knew, and I suppose she read the signs among the men and
got certain definite information from the women. We therefore
slept some miles away from the encampment in a makeshift gunyah
built of boughs, in front of which the usual fire was made. After
we had retired to rest, Yamba woke me and said that she detected
strange noises. I immediately sprang to my feet and looked all
round our little shelter. It was much too dark for me to see
anything distinctly, but I fancied I heard retreating footsteps.

Utterly at a loss to account for this strange occurrence, and
fearing that some danger threatened us, Yamba and I covered in the
front of the shelter, and then quietly retired into the bush, where
we lay hidden without a fire until morning. When we returned to
our shelter it was broad daylight, and, as we half expected, we
found three formidable spears buried in the sides of our little
hut. Three others were stuck in the ground near the fire, clearly
proving that an attempt had been made upon our lives during the
night. On examining the spears we found they most certainly
belonged to the tribe we had left the previous day. The spear-heads were of a different kind of flint from anything I had
previously seen, being dark green in colour; and they were
extremely sharp. The individuality of the different tribes is
strongly and decidedly marked in the make of their spears. Our
treacherous hosts had evidently determined to obtain the coveted
tomahawk by force, and when they reached the spot where they
supposed we lay (they could not see into the interior from the
front), they hurled their spears in the hope of killing us, but did
not investigate the result, they being such arrant cowards at
night. Remember, they had actually ventured at night into the bush
in spite of their inveterate fear of “the spirits.”

The precaution adopted on this occasion was always followed by us
when we had any real doubt about the natives; that is to say, we
built a “dummy” gunyah of boughs, which we were supposed to sleep
in; and we covered in the front so as our possible assailants could
not easily detect our absence. We would then creep away into the
bush or hide behind a tree, and, of course, would light no fire.

Many times was that same tomahawk coveted. You see, the natives
would watch me cutting boughs with it, or procuring honey by
cutting down branches with an ease that caused them to despise
their own rude stone axes.

The case of treachery I have just described was not an isolated
one, but I am bound to say such occurrences were rare in the
interior—although more or less frequent about the western shores
of the Gulf of Carpentaria. At any rate, this was my experience.

During our journey from my home to the shores of the Gulf, I
remember coming across a flat country from which the natives had
apparently disappeared altogether. When we did come upon them,
however, in the high ground I was probably guilty of some little
breach of etiquette, such as LOOKING at the women—(for many
reasons I always studied the various types in a tribe)—and Yamba
and I were often in peril of our lives on this account. As a rule,
however, safety lay in the fact that the natives are terribly
afraid of darkness, and they believe the spirits of the dead roam
abroad in the midnight hours.

Month after month we continued our progress in a southerly
direction, although, as I have said before, we often turned north-east and even due west, following the valleys when stopped by the
ranges—where, by the way, we usually found turkeys in great
numbers. We had water-bags made out of the skins of kangaroos and
wallabies, and would camp wherever possible close to a native well,
where we knew food was to be found in plenty.

At this period I noticed that the more easterly I went, the more
ranges I encountered; whilst the somewhat dreary and mostly
waterless lowland lay to the west. We would sometimes fail to
obtain water for a couple of days; but this remark does not apply
to the mountainous regions. Often the wells were quite dry and
food painfully scarce; this would be in a region of sand and
spinifex.

When I beheld an oasis of palms and ti-trees I would make for it,
knowing that if no water existed there, it could easily be got by
digging. The physical conditions of the country would change
suddenly, and my indefatigable wife was frequently at fault in her
root-hunting expeditions. Fortunately, animal life was very seldom
scarce. On the whole, we were extremely fortunate in the matter of
water,—although the natives often told me that the low wastes of
sand and spinifex were frequently so dry, that it was impossible
even for them to cross. What astonished me greatly was that the
line of demarcation between an utter desert and, say, a fine forest
was almost as sharply marked as if it had been drawn with a rule.

A stretch of delightfully wooded country would follow the dreary
wastes, and this in turn would give place to fairly high mountain
ranges.

Once, during a temporary stay among one of the tribes, the chief
showed me some very interesting caves among the low limestone
ranges that were close by. It was altogether a very rugged
country. Always on the look-out for something to interest and
amuse me, and always filled with a strange, vague feeling that
something MIGHT turn up unexpectedly which would enable me to
return to civilisation, I at once determined to explore these
caves; and here I had a very strange and thrilling adventure.

Whilst roaming among the caves I came across a pit measuring
perhaps twenty feet in diameter and eight feet or nine feet in
depth. It had a sandy bottom; and as I saw a curious-looking
depression in one corner, I jumped down to investigate it, leaving

Bruno barking at the edge of the pit, because I knew I should have
some trouble in hoisting him up again if I allowed him to accompany
me. I carried a long stick, much longer than a waddy; perhaps it
was a yam-stick—I cannot remember. At any rate, just as I was
about to probe a mysterious-looking hole, I beheld with alarm and
amazement the ugly head of a large black snake suddenly thrust out
at me from a dark mass, which I presently found was the decayed
stump of a tree. I fell back as far as possible, and then saw that
the reptile had quite uncoiled itself from the stem, and was coming
straight at me. I promptly dealt it a violent blow on the body,
just below that point where it raised its head from the ground. No
sooner had I done this than another dark and hissing head came
charging in my direction. Again I struck at the reptile’s body and
overpowered it. Next came a third, and a fourth, and fifth, and
then I realised that the whole of the dead stump was simply one
living mass of coiled snakes, which were probably hibernating. One
after another they came at me; of course, had they all come at
once, no power on earth could have saved me. I wondered how long
this weird contest would be kept up; and again and again between
the attacks I tried to escape, but had scarcely taken an upward
step when another huge reptile was upon me.

I was aware that Bruno was running backwards and forwards at the
edge of the pit all this time, barking frantically in a most
excited state. He knew perfectly well what snakes were, having
frequently been bitten. I owe my life on this occasion solely to
the fact that the snakes were in a torpid state, and came at me one
at a time instead of altogether. It was the cold season, about the
month of June or July. It is impossible at such moments to take
any account of time, so I cannot say how long the battle lasted.

At length, however, I was able to count the slain. I did this
partly out of curiosity and partly because I wanted to impress the
natives—to boast, if you prefer that phrase. Modesty, where
modesty is unknown, would have been absurd, if not fatal to my
prestige. Well, in all there were SIXTY-EIGHT BLACK SNAKES,

AVERAGING ABOUT FOUR FEET SIX INCHES IN LENGTH.

I do not remember that I was fatigued; I think my excitement was
too great for any such feeling to have made itself felt. When at
length I was able to get away, I and Bruno rushed off to the native
camp a few miles away, and brought back the blacks to see what I
had done. The spectacle threw them into a state of great
amazement, and from that time on I was looked upon with the
greatest admiration. The story of how I had killed the snakes soon
spread abroad among the various tribes for miles round, and was
chanted by many tribes, the means of inter-communication being the
universal smoke-signals. One important consequence of this
adventure was that I was everywhere received with the very greatest
respect.

It may be mentioned here that no matter how unfriendly tribes may
be, they always exchange news by means of smoke-signals. I may
also say that at corroborees and such-like festivities a vast
amount of poetic boasting and exaggeration is indulged in, each

“hero” being required to give practical demonstrations of the
things he has seen, the doughty deeds he has done, &c. He warms up
as he goes along, and magnifies its importance in a ridiculous way.

It amuses me to this day to recall my own preposterous songs about
how I killed the two whales WITH MY STILETTO, and other droll
pretensions. But, ah! I was serious enough then!

In the mountainous region where I encountered the snakes, I also
met a native who actually spoke English. He called himself either

Peter or Jacky Jacky—I cannot remember which; but in any case it
was a name given him by pearlers. He had once lived with some
pearlers near the north-west coast of Western Australia—probably
on the De Grey River. His story was quite unprecedented among the
blacks, and he gave me many terrible instances of the perfidy shown
by white adventurers towards the unfortunate natives. The precise
locality where I met this man was probably near Mount Farewell,
close to the border-line of South Australia and Western Australia.

Well, then, Jacky Jacky—to give him the name which lingers most
tenaciously in my mind—was persuaded to join in a pearling
expedition, together with a number of his companions. They all
accepted engagements from the whites, on the distinct understanding
that they were to be away about three moons. Instead, they were
practically kidnapped by force, and treated—or rather ill-treated-

-as slaves for several years.

First of all, the poor creatures were taken to an island in the
vicinity of North-West Cape, off which the pearling fleet lay.

During the voyage to the pearling grounds the water supply on board
ran short, and so great was the suffering among the blacks—they
were kept on the shortest of short commons, as you may suppose—
that they plotted to steal a cask of the precious fluid for their
own use. The vessel was quite a small one, and the water was kept
in the hold. But the two or three whites who formed the crew
forcibly prevented the black-fellows from carrying out their plan.

This gave rise to much discontent, and eventually the blacks, in
desperation, openly rose and mutinied. Arming themselves with
heavy pieces of firewood they proceeded to attack their masters,
and some of them succeeded in getting at the water, in spite of the
whites, by simply knocking the bungs out of the casks. The captain
thereupon went down to parley with them, but was met by a shower of
blows from the heavy sticks I have just mentioned. Half-stunned,
he dashed out of the hold, got his musket, and fired down among the
mutineers, hitting one black-fellow in the throat, and killing him
instantly. Far from infuriating the rest, as would most certainly
have been the case with any other race, this course of action
terrified the blacks, and they barricaded themselves down below.

Eventually the whites again sought them and made peace, the blacks
promising to conduct themselves more obediently in the future. It
may here be said that the ship had called specially at Jacky

Jacky’s home on the coast to kidnap the natives.

On arriving at the pearling settlement, the blacks found themselves
among a number of other unfortunate creatures like themselves, and
all were compelled to go out in pearling vessels just as the
exigencies of the industry required. Jacky Jacky himself was kept
at this work for upwards of three years; and he told me many
terrible stories of the white man’s indescribable cruelty and
villainy. He and his companions were invariably chained up during
the night and driven about like cattle in the daytime. Many of his
mates at the pearling settlement had been kidnapped from their
homes in a cruel and contemptible manner, and herded off like sheep
by men on horseback armed with formidable weapons.

Their sufferings were very great because, of course, they were
totally unused to work of any kind. The enforced exile from home
and the dreary compulsory labour made the life far worse than death
for these primitive children of Nature. Then, again, they were
exiled from their wives, who would, of course, be appropriated in
their absence—another tormenting thought. They were frequently
beaten with sticks, and when they attempted to run away they were
speared as enemies by other tribes; whilst, in the event of their
escaping altogether, they would not have been recognised even when
they returned to their own homes. One day Jacky Jacky’s ship came
into a little bay on the mainland for water, and then my
enterprising friend, watching his opportunity, struck inland for
home and liberty, accompanied by several other companions in
misery. These latter the coast natives promptly speared, but Jacky

Jacky escaped, thanks probably to his knowledge of the white man’s
wiles. He soon reached the more friendly mountain tribes in the
interior, where he was received as a man and a brother. You see,
he had stolen a revolver from his late masters, and this mysterious
weapon created great terror among his new friends. Altogether he
posed as quite a great man, particularly when his story became
known. He worked his way from tribe to tribe, until at length he
got to the ranges where I met him—quite a vast distance from the
coast.

Many parts of the extensive country I traversed on my southward
journey, after the death of the girls, were exceedingly rich in
minerals, and particularly in gold, both alluvial and in quartz.

As I was making my way one day through a granite country along the
banks of a creek, I beheld some reddish stones, which I at once
pounced upon and found to be beautiful rubies. Having no means of
carrying them, however, and as they were of no value whatever to
me, I simply threw them away again, and now merely record the fact.

I also came across large quantities of alluvial tin, but this,
again, was not of the slightest use, any more than it had been when

I found it in very large quantities in the King Leopold Ranges.

The test I applied to see whether it really WAS tin was to scratch
it with my knife. Even when large quantities of native gold lay at
my feet, I hardly stooped to pick it up, save as a matter of
curiosity. Why should I? What use was it to me? As I have stated
over and over again in public, I would have given all the gold for
a few ounces of salt, which I needed so sorely. Afterwards,
however, I made use of the precious metal in a very practical
manner, but of this more hereafter. At one place—probably near
the Warburton Ranges in Western Australia—I picked up an immense
piece of quartz, which was so rich that it appeared to be one mass
of virgin gold; and when on showing it to Yamba I told her that in
my country men were prepared to go to any part of the world, and
undergo many terrible hardships to obtain it, she thought at first

I was joking. Indeed, the thing amused her ever after, as it did
the rest of my people. I might also mention that up in the then
little-known Kimberley district, many of the natives weighted their
spears with pure gold. I must not omit to mention that natives
never poison their spear-heads. I only found the nuggets, big and
little, near the creeks during and after heavy rains; and I might
mention that having with some difficulty interested Yamba in the
subject, she was always on the look-out for the tell-tale specks
and gleams. In some of the ranges, too, I found the opal in large
and small quantities, but soon discovered that the material was too
light and brittle for spear-heads, to which curious use I essayed
to put this beautiful stone. Talking about spear-heads, in the
ranges where I met Jacky Jacky there was a quarry of that kind of
stone which was used for the making of war and other implements.

It was very much worked, and as you may suppose was a valuable
possession to the tribe in whose territory it was situated. The
stone was a kind of flint, extremely hard and capable of being made
very sharp, and retaining its edge. Natives from far and near came
to barter for the stone with shells, and ornaments which these
inland tribes did not possess. The method of getting out the stone
was by building fires over it, and then when it had become red-hot
throwing large and small quantities of water upon it in an
amazingly dexterous way. The stone would immediately be split and
riven exactly in the manner required.

My very first discovery of gold was made in some crevices near a
big creek, which had cut its way through deep layers of
conglomerate hundreds of feet thick. This country was an elevated
plateau, intersected by deeply cut creeks, which had left the
various strata quite bare, with curious concave recesses in which
the natives took shelter during the wet season. One of the nuggets

I picked up in the creek I have just mentioned weighed several
pounds, and was three or four inches long; it was rather more than
an inch in thickness. This nugget I placed on a block of wood and
beat out with a stone, until I could twist it easily with my
fingers, when I fashioned it into a fillet as an ornament for

Yamba’s hair. This she continued to wear for many years
afterwards, but the rude golden bracelets and anklets I also made
for her she gave away to the first children we met.

In many of the rocky districts the reefs were evidently extremely
rich; but I must confess I rarely troubled to explore them. In
other regions the gold-bearing quartz was actually a curse, our
path being covered with sharp pebbles of quartz and slate, which
made ever step forward a positive agony. Wild ranges adjoined that
conglomerate country, which, as you have probably gathered, is
extremely difficult to traverse. Certainly it would be impossible
for camels.

CHAPTER XIV

An eventful meeting—Civilisation at last—Rage and despair—A
white man’s tracks—Yamba’s find—Good Samaritans—Bitter
disappointment—Bruno as guardian—A heavy burden—A strange
invitation—The mysterious monster—“Come, and be our chief”—I
discover a half-caste girl—The fate of Leichhardt—“In the valley
of the shadow”—A sane white man—Gibson is dying—Vain efforts—

Unearthly voices.

When we had been on the march southwards about nine months there
came one of the most important incidents in my life, and one which
completely changed my plans. One day we came across a party of
about eight natives—all young fellows—who were on a punitive
expedition; and as they were going in our direction (they overtook
us going south), we walked along with them for the sake of their
company. The country through which we were passing at that time is
a dreary, undulating expanse of spinifex desert, with a few
scattered and weird-looking palms, a little scrub, and scarcely any
signs of animal life. The further east we went, the better grew
the country; but, on the other hand, when we went westward we got
farther and farther into the dreary wastes. At the spot I have in
my mind ranges loomed to the south—a sight which cheered me
considerably, for somehow I thought I should soon strike
civilisation.

Had not the blacks we were with taken us to some wells we would
have fared very badly indeed in this region, as no water could be
found except by digging. I noticed that the blacks looked for a
hollow depression marked by a certain kind of palm, and then dug a
hole in the gravel and sandy soil with their hands and yam-sticks.

They usually came upon water a few feet down, but the distance
often varied very considerably.

We were crossing the summit of a little hill, where we had rested
for a breathing space, when, without the least warning I suddenly
beheld, a few hundred yards away, in the valley beneath, FOUR WHILE

MEN ON HORSEBACK! I think they had a few spare horses with them,
but, of course, all that I saw were the four white men. I
afterwards learned that, according to our respective routes, we
would have crossed their track, but they would not have crossed
ours. They were going west. They wore the regulation dress of the

Australian—broad sombrero hats, flannel shirts, and rather dirty
white trousers, with long riding-boots. I remember they were
moving along at a wretched pace, which showed that their horses
were nearly spent. Once again, notwithstanding all previous bitter
lessons, my uncontrollable excitement was my undoing.

“Civilisation at last!” I screamed to myself, and then, throwing
discretion to the winds, I gave the war-whoop of the blacks and
rushed madly forward, yelling myself hoarse, and supremely
oblivious of the fantastic and savage appearance I must have
presented—with my long hair flowing wildly out behind, and my skin
practically indistinguishable from that of an ordinary black-fellow. My companions, I afterwards discovered, swept after me as
in a furious charge, FOR THEY THOUGHT I WANTED TO ANNIHILATE THE

WHITE MEN AT SIGHT. Naturally, the spectacle unnerved the
pioneers, and they proceeded to repel the supposed attack by firing
a volley into the midst of us. Their horses were terrified, and
reared and plunged in a dangerous manner, thereby greatly adding to
the excitement of that terrible moment. The roar of the volley and
the whizz of the shots brought me to my senses, however, and
although I was not hit, I promptly dropped to the ground amidst the
long grass, as also did Yamba and the other blacks. Like a flash
my idiotic blunder came home to me, and then I was ready to dash
out again alone to explain; but Yamba forcibly prevented me from
exposing myself to what she considered certain death.

The moment the horsemen saw us all disappear in the long grass they
wheeled round, changing their course a little more to the south—
they had been going west, so far as I can remember—and their
caravan crawled off in a manner that suggested that the horses were
pretty well done for. On our part, we at once made for the ranges
that lay a little to the south. Here we parted with our friends
the blacks, who made off in an east-south-easterly direction.

The dominant feeling within me as I saw the white men ride off was
one of uncontrollable rage and mad despair. I was apparently a
pariah, with the hand of every white man—when I met one—against
me. “Well,” I thought, “if civilisation is not prepared to receive
me, I will wait until it is.” Disappointment after disappointment,
coupled with the incessant persuasions of Yamba and my people
generally, were gradually reconciling me to savage life; and slowly
but relentlessly the thought crept into my mind that I WAS DOOMED

NEVER TO REACH CIVILISATION AGAIN, and so perhaps it would be
better for me to resign myself to the inevitable, and stay where I
was. I would turn back, I thought, with intense bitterness and
heart-break, and make a home among the tribes in the hills, where
we would be safe from the white man and his murderous weapons. And

I actually DID turn back, accompanied, of course, by Yamba. We did
not strike due north again, as it was our intention to find a
permanent home somewhere among the ranges, at any rate for the
ensuing winter. It was out of the question to camp where we were,
because it was much too cold; and besides Yamba had much difficulty
in finding roots.

Several days later, as we were plodding steadily along, away from
the ranges that I have spoken of as lying to the south, Yamba,
whose eyes were usually everywhere, suddenly gave a cry and stood
still, pointing to some peculiar and unmistakable footprints in the
sandy ground. These, she confidently assured me, were those of a
white man WHO HAD LOST HIS REASON, and was wandering aimlessly
about that fearful country. It was, of course, easy for her to
know the white man’s tracks when she saw them, but I was curious
how she could be certain that the wanderer had lost his reason.

She pointed out to me that, in the first place, the tracks had been
made by some one wearing boots, and as the footprints straggled
about in a most erratic manner, it was clearly evident that the
wearer could not be sane.

Even at this time, be it remembered, I was burning with rage
against the whites, and so I decided to follow the tracks and find
the individual who was responsible for them. But do not be under
any misapprehension. My intentions were not philanthropic, but
revengeful. I had become a black-fellow myself now, and was
consumed with a black-fellow’s murderous passion. At one time I
thought I would follow the whole party, and kill them in the
darkness with my stiletto when opportunity offered.

The new tracks we had come upon told me plainly that the party had
separated, and were therefore now in my power. I say these things
because I do not want any one to suppose I followed up the tracks
of the lost man with the intention of rendering him any assistance.

For nearly two days Yamba and I followed the tracks, which went in
curious circles always trending to the left. At length we began to
come upon various articles that had apparently been thrown away by
the straggler. First of all, we found part of a letter that was
addressed to some one (I think) in Adelaide; but of this I would
not be absolutely certain. What I do remember was that the
envelope bore the postmark of Ti Tree Gully, S.A.

The writer of that letter was evidently a woman, who, so far as I
can remember, wrote congratulating her correspondent upon the fact
that he was joining an expedition which was about to traverse the
entire continent. I fancy she said she was glad of this for his
own sake, for it would no doubt mean much to him. She wished him
all kinds of glory and prosperity, and wound up by assuring him
that none would be better pleased on his return than she.

The country through which these tracks led us was for the most part
a mere dry, sandy waste, covered with the formidable spinifex or
porcupine grass. Yamba walked in front peering at the tracks.

Presently she gave a little cry, and when she turned to me I saw
that she had in her hand the sombrero hat of an Australian pioneer.

A little farther on we found a shirt, and then a pair of trousers.

We next came upon a belt and a pair of dilapidated boots.

At length, on reaching the crest of a sandy hillock, we suddenly
beheld the form of a naked white man lying face downwards in the
sand below us. As you may suppose, we simply swooped down upon
him; but on reaching him my first impression was that HE WAS DEAD!

His face was slightly turned to the right, his arms outstretched,
and his fingers dug convulsively in the sand. I am amused now when

I remember how great was our emotion on approaching this
unfortunate. My first thought in turning the man over on to his
back, and ascertaining that at last he breathed, was one of great
joy and thankfulness.

“Thank God,” I said to myself, “I have at last found a white
companion—one who will put me in touch once more with the great
world outside.” The burning rage that consumed me (you know my
object in following the tracks) died away in pity as I thought of
the terrible privations and sufferings this poor fellow must have
undergone before being reduced to this state. My desire for
revenge was forgotten, and my only thought now was to nurse back to
health the unconscious man.

First of all I moistened his mouth with the water which Yamba
always carried with her in a skin bag, and then I rubbed him
vigorously, hoping to restore animation. I soon exhausted the
contents of the bag, however, and immediately Yamba volunteered to
go off and replenish it. She was absent an hour or more, I think,
during which time I persisted in my massage treatment—although so
far I saw no signs of returning consciousness on the part of my
patient.

When Yamba returned with the water, I tried to make the prostrate
man swallow some of it, and I even smeared him with the blood of an
opossum which my thoughtful helpmate had brought back with her.

But for a long time all my efforts were in vain, and then, dragging
him to the foot of a grass-tree, I propped him up slightly against
it, wetted his shirt with water and wound it round his throat.

Meanwhile Yamba threw water on him and rubbed him vigorously.

At last he uttered a sound—half groan, half sigh (it thrilled me
through and through); and I noticed that he was able to swallow a
few drops of water. The gloom of night was now descending on that
strange wilderness of sand and spinifex, so we prepared to stay
there with our helpless charge until morning. Yamba and I took it
in turns to watch over him and keep his mouth moistened. By
morning he had so far revived that he opened his eyes and looked at
me. How eagerly had I anticipated that look, and how bitter was my
disappointment when I found that it was a mere vacant stare in
which was no kind of recognition! Ever hopeful, however, I
attributed the vacant look to the terrible nature of his
sufferings. I was burning to ply him with all manner of questions
as to who he was, where he had come from, and what news he had of
the outside world; but I restrained myself by a great effort, and
merely persevered in my endeavours to restore him to complete
animation. When the morning was pretty well advanced the man was
able to sit up; and in the course of a few days he was even able to
accompany us to a water-hole, where we encamped, and stayed until
he had practically recovered—or, at any rate, was able to get
about.

But, you may be asking, all this time, did the man himself say
nothing? Indeed, he said much, and I hung upon every syllable that
fell from his lips, but, to my indescribable chagrin, it was a mere
voluble jargon of statements, which simply baffled and puzzled me
and caused me pain. Our charge would stare at us stolidly, and
then remark, in a vulgar Cockney voice, that he was quite SURE we
were going the wrong way. By this time, I should mention, we had
re-clothed him in his trousers and shirt, for he had obviously
suffered terribly from the burning sun.

Many days passed away before I would admit to myself that this
unhappy creature was a hopeless imbecile. I was never absent from
his side day or night, hoping and waiting for the first sane
remark. Soon, however, the bitter truth was borne in upon us that,
instead of having found salvation and comfort in the society of a
white man, we were merely saddled with a ghastly encumbrance, and
were far worse off than before.

We now set off in the direction of our old tracks, but were not
able to travel very fast on account of the still feeble condition
of the white stranger. Poor creature! I pitied him from the
bottom of my heart. It seemed so terrible for a man to lapse into
a state of imbecility after having survived the dreadful hardships
and adventures that had befallen him. I tried over and over again
to elicit sensible replies to my questions as to where he came
from; but he simply gibbered and babbled like a happy baby. I
coaxed; I threatened; I persuaded; but it was all in vain. I soon
found he was a regular millstone round my neck—particularly when
we were on the “walkabout.” He would suddenly take it into his
head to sit down for hours at a stretch, and nothing would induce
him to move until he did so of his own accord.

Curiously enough, Bruno became very greatly attached to him, and
was his constant companion. Of this I was extremely glad, because
it relieved me of much anxiety. You will understand what I mean
when I tell you that, in spite of all our endeavours, our
mysterious companion would go off by himself away from our track;
and at such times were it not for Bruno—whom he would follow
anywhere—we would often have had much trouble in bringing him back
again. Or he might have been speared before a strange tribe could
have discovered his “sacred” (idiotic) condition.

At length we reached a large lagoon, on the shores of which we
stayed for about two years. This lagoon formed part of a big river
at flood-time, but the connecting stretches of water had long since
dried up for many miles both above and below it. The question may
be asked, Why did I settle down here? The answer is, that our
white companion had become simply an intolerable burden. He
suffered from the most exhausting attacks of dysentery, and was
quite helpless. It was, of course, my intention to have continued
my march northward to my old home in the Cambridge Gulf district,
because by this time I had quite made up my mind that, by living
there quietly, I stood a better chance of escape to civilisation by
means of some vessel than I did by attempting to traverse the
entire continent. This latter idea was now rendered impossible, on
account of the poor, helpless creature I had with me. Indeed, so
great an anxiety was he to me and Yamba, that we decided we could
go nowhere, either north or south, until he had become more robust
in health. Needless to say, I never intrusted him with a weapon.

I had found a sheath-knife belonging to him, but I afterwards gave
it away to a friendly chief, who was immensely proud of it.

In making for the shores of the big lagoon we had to traverse some
extremely difficult country. In the first place, we encountered a
series of very broken ridges, which in parts proved so hard to
travel over that I almost gave up in despair. At times there was
nothing for it but to carry on my back the poor, feeble creature
who, I felt, was now intrusted to my charge and keeping. I
remember that native chiefs frequently suggested that I should
leave him, but I never listened to this advice for a moment.

Perhaps I was not altogether disinterested, because already my
demented companion was looked upon as a kind of minor deity by the
natives. I may here remark that I only knew two idiots during the
whole of my sojourn. One of these had fallen from a tree through a
branch breaking, and he was actually maintained at the expense of
the tribe, revered by all, if not actually worshipped.

But the journey I was just describing was a fearful trial.

Sometimes we had to traverse a wilderness of rocks which stood
straight up and projected at sharp angles, presenting at a distance
the appearance of a series of stony terraces which were all but
impassable. For a long time our charge wore both shirt and
trousers, but eventually we had to discard the latter—or perhaps
it would be more correct to say, that the garment was literally
torn to shreds by the spinifex. At one time I had it in my mind to
make him go naked like myself, but on consideration I thought it
advisable to allow him to retain his shirt, at any rate for a time,
as his skin was not so inured to the burning sun as my own.

We had to provide him with food, which he accepted, of course,
without gratitude. Then Yamba had always to build him a shelter
wherever we camped, so that far from being an invaluable assistance
and a companion he was a burden—so great that, in moments of
depression, I regretted not having left him to die. As it was, he
would often have gone to his death in the great deserts were it not
for the ever-vigilant Bruno. Still, I always thought that some day

I would be able to take the man back to civilisation, and there
find out who he was and whence he had come. And I hoped that
people would think I had been kind to him. At first I thought the
unfortunate man was suffering from sunstroke, and that in course of
time he would regain his reason. I knew I could do very little
towards his recovery except by feeding him well. Fortunately the
natives never called upon him to demonstrate before them the
extraordinary powers which I attributed to him. Indeed his strange
gestures, antics, and babblings were sufficient in themselves to
convince the blacks that he was a creature to be reverenced. The
remarkable thing about him was that he never seemed to take notice
of any one, whether it were myself, Yamba, or a native chief. As a
rule, his glance would “go past me,” so to speak, and he was for
ever wandering aimlessly about, chattering and gesticulating.

We placed no restrictions upon him, and supplied all his wants,
giving him Bruno as a guide and protector. I must say that Yamba
did not like the stranger, but for my sake she was wonderfully
patient with him.

It was whilst living on the shores of this lagoon that I received a
very extraordinary commission from a neighbouring tribe. Not long
after my arrival I heard a curious legend, to the effect that away
on the other side of the lagoon there was an “evil spirit”

infesting the waters, which terrified the women when they went down
to fill their skins. Well, naturally enough, the fame of the white
man and his doings soon got abroad in that country, and I was one
day invited by the tribe in question to go and rid them of the evil
spirit. Accordingly, accompanied by Yamba, and leaving Bruno to
look after our helpless companion, we set off in response to the
invitation, and in a few days reached the camp of the blacks who
had sent for me. The lagoon was here surrounded by a finely-wooded
country, slightly mountainous. Perhaps I ought to have stated that

I had already gleaned from the mail-men, or runners, who had been
sent with the message, that the waters of the lagoon in the
vicinity of the camp had long been disturbed by some huge fish or
monster, whose vagaries were a constant source of terror. The
dreaded creature would come quite close inshore, and then endeavour
to “spear” the women with what was described as a long weapon
carried in its mouth. This, then, was the evil spirit of the
lagoon, and I confess it puzzled me greatly. I thought it probable
that it was merely a large fish which had descended in a rain-cloud
among countless millions of others of smaller species. I looked
upon the commission, however, as a good opportunity for displaying
my powers and impressing the natives in that country—I always had
the utmost confidence in myself. Before setting out I had spent
some little time in completing my preparations for the capture of
the strange monster.

The very afternoon I arrived I went down to the shores of the
lagoon with all the natives, and had not long to wait before I
beheld what was apparently a huge fish careering wildly and
erratically hither and thither in the water. On seeing it the
natives appeared tremendously excited, and they danced and yelled,
hoping thereby to drive the creature away. My first move was in
the nature of an experiment—merely with the object of getting a
better view of the monster. I endeavoured to angle for it with a
hook made out of a large piece of sharpened bone. I then produced
large nets made out of strips of green hide and stringy-bark rope.

Placing these on the shores of the lagoon, I directed Yamba to
build a little bark canoe just big enough to hold her and me.

At length we embarked and paddled out a few hundred yards, when we
threw the net overboard. It had previously been weighted, and now
floated so that it promptly expanded to its utmost capacity. No
sooner had we done this than the invisible monster charged down
upon us, making a tremendous commotion in the water. Neither Yamba
nor I waited for the coming impact, but threw ourselves overboard
just as the creature’s white sawlike weapon showed itself close to
the surface only a few yards away. We heard a crash, and then,
looking backward as we swam, saw that the long snout of the fish
had actually pierced both sides of the canoe, whilst his body was
evidently entangled in the meshes of the net. So desperate had
been the charge that our little craft was now actually a serious
encumbrance to the monster. It struggled madly to free itself,
leaping almost clear of the water and lashing the placid lagoon
into a perfect maelstrom.

Several times the canoe was lifted high out of the water; and then
the fish would try to drag it underneath, but was prevented by its
great buoyancy. In the meantime Yamba and I swam safely ashore,
and watched the struggles of the “evil spirit” from the shore,
among a crowd of frantic natives.

We waited until the efforts of the fish grew feebler, and then put
off in another bark canoe (the celerity with which Yamba made one
was something amazing), when I easily despatched the now weakened
creature with my tomahawk. I might here mention that this was
actually the first time that these inland savages had seen a canoe
or boat of any description, so that naturally the two I launched
occasioned endless amazement.

Afterwards, by the way, I tried to describe to them what the sea
was like, but had to give it up, because it only confused them, and
was quite beyond their comprehension. When we dragged the monster
ashore, with its elongated snout still embedded in the little
canoe, I saw at a glance that the long-dreaded evil spirit of the
lagoon was a huge sawfish, fully fourteen feet long, its formidable
saw alone measuring nearly five feet. This interesting weapon I
claimed as a trophy, and when I got back to where Bruno and his
human charge were, I exhibited it to crowds of admiring blacks, who
had long heard of the evil spirit. The great fish itself was
cooked and eaten at one of the biggest corroborees I had ever seen.

The blacks had no theory of their own (save the superstitious one),
as to how it got into the lagoon; and the only supposition I can
offer is, that it must have been brought thither, when very small
and young, either by a rain-cloud or at some unusually big flood
time.

So delighted were the blacks at the service I had done them, that
they paid me the greatest compliment in their power by offering me
a chieftainship, and inviting me to stay with them for ever. I
refused the flattering offer, however, as I was quite bent on
getting back to Cambridge Gulf.

On returning to my friends on the other side of the lagoon I
learned for the first time that there was a half-caste girl living
among them; and subsequent inquiries went to prove that her father
was a white man who had penetrated into these regions and lived for
some little time at least among the blacks—much as I myself was
doing. My interest in the matter was first of all roused by the
accidental discovery of a cairn five feet or six feet high, made of
loose flat stones. My experience was such by this time that I saw
at a glance this cairn was not the work of a native. Drawings and
figures, and a variety of curious characters, were faintly
discernible on some of the stones, but were not distinct enough to
be legible.

On one, however, I distinctly traced the initials “L. L.,” which
had withstood the ravages of time because the stone containing them
was in a protected place.

Naturally the existence of this structure set me inquiring among
the older natives as to whether they ever remembered seeing a white
man before; and then I learned that perhaps twenty years previously
a man like myself HAD made his appearance in those regions, and had
died a few months afterwards, before the wife who, according to
custom, was allotted to him had given birth to the half-caste baby
girl, who was now a woman before me. They never knew the white
stranger’s name, nor where he had come from. The girl, by the way,
was by no means good-looking, and her skin was decidedly more black
than white; I could tell by her hand, however, that she was a half-caste.

On the strength of our supposed affinity, she was offered to me as
a wife, and I accepted her, more as a help for Yamba than anything
else; she was called Luigi. Yamba, by the way, was anxious that I
should possess at least half-a-dozen wives, partly because this
circumstance would be more in keeping with my rank; but I did not
fall in with the idea. I had quite enough to do already to
maintain my authority among the tribe at large, and did not care to
have to rule in addition half-a-dozen women in my own
establishment. This tribe always lingers in my memory, on account
of the half-caste girl, whom I now believe to have been the
daughter of Ludwig Leichhardt, the lost Australian explorer. Mr.

Giles says: “Ludwig Leichhardt was a surgeon and botanist, who
successfully conducted an expedition from Moreton Bay to Port

Essington, on the northern coast. A military and penal settlement
had been established at Port Essington by the Government of New

South Wales, to which colony the whole territory then belonged. At
this settlement—the only point of relief after eighteen months’

travel—Leichhardt and his exhausted party arrived.

“Of Leichhardt’s sad fate, in the interior of Australia, no certain
tidings have ever been heard. I, who have wandered into and
returned alive from the curious regions he attempted and died to
explore, have unfortunately never come across a single record, nor
any remains or traces of the party.”

Leichhardt started on his last sad venture with a party of eight,
including one or two native black-boys. They had with them about
twenty head of bullocks broken in to carry pack loads. “My first
and second expeditions,” says Giles, “were conducted entirely with
horses, but in all subsequent journeys I was accompanied by
camels.” His object, like that of Leichhardt, was to force his way
across the thousand miles of country that lay untrodden and unknown
between the Australian telegraph line and the settlements upon the

Swan River. And Giles remarks that the exploration of 1000 miles
in Australia is equal to at least 10,000 miles on any other part of
the earth’s surface—always excepting the Poles.

I continued residing on the shores of the lagoon in the hope that
my patient would eventually get better, when I proposed continuing
my journey north. I was still quite unable to understand his
babblings, although he was for ever mentioning the names of persons
and places unknown to me; and he constantly spoke about some
exploring party. He never asked me questions, nor did he get into
serious trouble with the natives, being privileged. He never
developed any dangerous vices, but was simply childlike and
imbecile.

Gradually I had noticed that, instead of becoming stronger, he was
fading away. He was constantly troubled with a most distressing
complaint, and in addition to this he would be seized with fits of
depression, when he would remain in his hut for days at a time
without venturing out. I always knew what was the matter with him
when he was not to be seen. Sometimes I would go in to try and
cheer him up, but usually it was a hopeless effort on my part.

Of course he had a wife given him, and this young person seemed to
consider him quite an ordinary specimen of the white man. Indeed,
she was vastly flattered, rather than otherwise, by the attentions
lavished upon her husband by her people. One reason for this
treatment was that she was considered a privileged person to be
related in any way to one whom the natives regarded as almost a
demi-god. She looked after him too, and kept his hut as clean as
possible. One morning something happened. The girl came running
for me to go to her hut, and there lay the mysterious stranger
apparently stretched out for dead. I soon realised that he was in
a fit of some kind.

I now approach the momentous time when this unfortunate man
recovered his senses. When he regained consciousness after the fit

Yamba and I were with him, and so was his wife. I had not seen him
for some days, and was much shocked at the change that had taken
place. He was ghastly pale and very much emaciated. I knew that
death was at hand. Just as he regained consciousness—I can see
the picture now; yes, we were all around his fragrant couch of
eucalyptus leaves, waiting for him to open his eyes—he gazed at me
in a way that thrilled me strangely, and I KNEW I WAS LOOKING AT A

SANE WHITE MAN. His first questions were “Where am I? Who are
you?” Eager and trembling I knelt down beside him and told him the
long and strange story of how I had found him, and how he had now
been living with me nearly two years. I pointed out to him our
faithful Bruno, who had often taken him for long walks and brought
him back safely, and who had so frequently driven away from him
deadly snakes, and warned him when it was time to turn back. I
told him he was in the centre of Australia; and then I told in
brief my own extraordinary story. I sent Yamba to our shelter for
the letter I had found in his tracks, and read it aloud to him. He
never told me who the writer of it was. He listened to all I had
to tell him with an expression of amazement, which soon gave place
to one of weariness—the weariness of utter weakness. He asked me
to carry him outside into the sun, and I did so, afterwards
squatting down beside him and opening up another conversation. HE

THEN TOLD ME HIS NAME WAS GIBSON, AND THAT HE HAD BEEN A MEMBER OF

THE GILES EXPEDITION OF 1874. From that moment I never left him
night or day. He told me much about that expedition which I can
never reveal, for I do not know whether he was lying or raving.

Poor, vulgar, Cockney Gibson! He seemed to know full well that he
was dying, and the thought seemed to please him rather than
otherwise. He appeared to me to be too tired, too weary to live—
that was the predominant symptom.

I introduced Yamba to him, and we did everything we possibly could
to cheer him, but he gradually sank lower and lower. I would say,

“Cheer up, Gibson. Why, when you are able to walk we will make
tracks straightway for civilisation. I am sure you know the way,
for now you are as right as I am.” But nothing interested the
dying man. Shortly before the end his eyes assumed a strained
look, and I could see he was rapidly going. The thought of his
approaching end was to me a relief; it would be untrue if I were to
say otherwise. For weeks past I had seen that the man could not
live, and considering that every day brought its battle for life,
you will readily understand that this poor helpless creature was a
terrible burden to me. He had such a tender skin that at all times

I was obliged to keep him clothed. For some little time his old
shirt and trousers did duty, but at length I was compelled to make
him a suit of skins. Of course, we had no soap with which to wash
his garments, but we used to clean them after a fashion by dumping
them down into a kind of greasy mud and then trampling on them,
afterwards rinsing them out in water. Moreover, his feet were so
tender that I always had to keep him shod with skin sandals.

His deathbed was a dramatic scene—especially under the
circumstances. Poor Gibson! To think that he should have escaped
death after those fearful waterless days and nights in the desert,
to live for two years with a white protector, and yet then die of a
wasting and distressing disease!

He spent the whole day in the open air, for he was very much better
when in the sun. At night I carried him back into his hut, and
laid him in the hammock which I had long ago slung for him. Yamba
knew he was dying even before I did, but she could do nothing.

We tried the effect of the curious herb called “pitchori,” but it
did not revive him. “Pitchori,” by the way, is a kind of leaf
which the natives chew in moments of depression; it has an
exhilarating effect upon them.

On the last day I once more made up a bed of eucalyptus leaves and
rugs on the floor of Gibson’s hut. Surrounding him at the last
were his wife—a very good and faithful girl—Yamba, myself, and

Bruno—who, by the way, knew perfectly well that his friend was
dying. He kept licking poor Gibson’s hand and chest, and then
finding no response would nestle up close to him for half-an-hour
at a time. Then the affectionate creature would retire outside and
set up a series of low, melancholy howls, only to run in again with
hope renewed.

Poor Gibson! The women-folk were particularly attached to him
because he never went out with the men, or with me, on my various
excursions, but remained behind in their charge. Sometimes,
however, he would follow at our heels as faithfully and
instinctively as Bruno himself. For the past two years Bruno and

Gibson had been inseparable, sleeping together at night, and never
parting for a moment the whole day long. Indeed, I am sure Bruno
became more attached to Gibson than he was to me. And so Gibson
did not, as I at one time feared he would, pass away into the Great

Beyond, carrying with him the secret of his identity. Looking at
him as he lay back among the eucalyptus leaves, pale and emaciated,

I knew the end was now very near.

I knelt beside him holding his hand, and at length, with a great
effort, he turned towards me and said feebly, “Can you hear
anything?” I listened intently, and at last was compelled to reply
that I did not. “Well,” he said, “I hear some one talking. I
think the voices of my friends are calling me.” I fancied that the
poor fellow was wandering in his mind again, but still his eyes did
not seem to have that vacant gaze I had previously noticed in them.

He was looking steadily at me, and seemed to divine my thoughts,
for he smiled sadly and said, “No, I know what I am saying. I can
hear them singing, and they are calling me away. They have come
for me at last!” His thin face brightened up with a slow, sad
smile, which soon faded away, and then, giving my hand a slight
pressure, he whispered almost in my ear, as I bent over him, “Good-bye, comrade, I’m off. You will come too, some day.” A slight
shiver, and Gibson passed peacefully away.

CHAPTER XV

Lost in the desert—Gibson’s dying advice—Giles meets Gibson—A
fountain in the desert—A terrible fix—Giles regains his camp—

Gibson’s effects—Mysterious tracks—A treasured possession—A
perfect paradise—Grape vines a failure—A trained cockatoo—An
extraordinary festival—My theory of the “ghosts.”

After the funeral his wife followed out the usual native
conventions. She covered herself with pipeclay for about one
month. She also mourned and howled for the prescribed three days,
and gashed her head with stone knives, until the blood poured down
her face. Gibson’s body was not buried in the earth, but embalmed
with clay and leaves, and laid on a rock-shelf in a cave.

The general belief was that Gibson had merely gone back to the

Spirit Land from whence he had come, and that, as he was a great
and good man, he would return to earth in the form of a bird—
perhaps an ibis, which was very high indeed. I must say I never
attached very much importance to what he said, even in his sane
moments, because he was obviously a man of low intelligence and no
culture. If I remember rightly, he told me that the expedition to
which he was attached left Adelaide with the object of going
overland to Fremantle. It was thoroughly well equipped, and for a
long time everything went well with the party. One day, whilst
some of them were off exploring on their own account, he lost
himself.

He rather thought that the sun must have affected his brain even
then, because he didn’t try to find his companions that night, but
went to sleep quite contentedly under a tree. He realised the
horror of his position keenly enough the next morning, however, and
rode mile after mile without halting for food or water, in the hope
of quickly regaining his friends at the chief camp. But night
stole down upon him once more, and he was still a lonely wanderer,
half delirious with thirst; the supply he had carried with him had
long since given out.

Next morning, when he roused himself, he found that his horse had
wandered away and got lost. After this he had only a vague
recollection of what happened. Prompted by some strange,
unaccountable impulse, he set out on a hopeless search for water,
and went walking on and on until all recollection faded away, and
he remembered no more. How long he had been lost when I found him
he could not say, because he knew absolutely nothing whatever about
his rescue. So far as I remember, he was a typical specimen of the

Australian pioneer—a man of fine physique, with a full beard and a
frank, but unintelligent, countenance. He was perhaps five feet
nine inches in height, and about thirty years of age. When I told
him the story of my adventures he was full of earnest sympathy for
me, and told me that if ever I intended leaving those regions for
civilisation again, my best plan would be to steer more south-east,
as it was in that direction that Adelaide lay.

He also informed me that the great trans-Continental telegraph wire
was being constructed from north to south. This he advised me to
strike and follow to civilisation.

I may be permitted a little digression here to give a few extracts
from Giles’s book, “Australia Twice Traversed” (Sampson Low &

Company), for this contains the version of the leader of the
expedition himself as to the circumstances under which Gibson was
lost. In all, it seems, Giles made five exploring expeditions into
and through Central South Australia and Western Australia from 1872
to 1876. Speaking of his second expedition, Mr. Giles says: “I
had informed my friend, Baron Von Mueller, by wire from the

Charlotte Waters Telegraph station, of the failure and break-up of
my first expedition, and he set to work and obtained new funds for
me to continue my labours. I reached Adelaide late in January

1873, and got my party together. We left early in March of 1873,
and journeyed leisurely up-country to Beltana, then past the Finnis

Springs to the Gregory. We then journeyed up to the Peake, where
we were welcomed by Messrs. Bagot at the Cattle Station, and Mr.

Blood of the Telegraph Department. Here we fixed up all our packs,
sold Bagot the waggon, and bought horses and other things. We now
had twenty pack-horses and four riding-horses.”

We next come to the introduction of Gibson. “Here a short young
man accosted me, and asked me if I didn’t remember him. He said he
was ‘Alf.’ I thought I knew his face, but I thought it was at the

Peake that I had seen him; but he said, ‘Oh, no! Don’t you
remember Alf, with Bagot’s sheep at the north-west bend of the

Murray? My name’s Alf Gibson, and I want to go out with you.’ I
said, ‘Well, can you shoe? Can you ride? Can you starve? Can you
go without water? And how would you like to be speared by the
blacks?’ He said he could do everything I had mentioned, and he
wasn’t afraid of the blacks. He was not a man I would have picked
out of a mob, but men were scarce, and he seemed so anxious to
come, so I agreed to take him.

“Thus, the expedition consisted of four persons—myself (Ernest

Giles), Mr. William Henry Tietkins, Alf Gibson, and James Andrews;
with twenty-four horses and two little dogs. On Monday, 4th

August, we finally left the encampment.”

Now here is the passage in which Mr. Giles describes his dramatic
parting with Gibson. It will be found in the chapter marked “20th

April to 21st May 1874”: “Gibson and I departed for the West. I
rode the ‘Fair Maid of Perth.’ I gave Gibson the big ambling
horse, ‘Badger,’ and we packed the big cob with a pair of water-bags that contained twenty gallons. As we rode away, I was telling

Gibson about various exploring expeditions and their fate, and he
said, ‘How is it that, in all these exploring expeditions, a lot of
people go and die?’ He said, ‘I shouldn’t like to die in this part
of the country, anyhow.’

“We presently had a meal of smoked horse. It was late when we
encamped, and the horses were much in want of water,—especially
the big cob, who kept coming up to the camp all night and trying to
get at our water-bags. We had one small water-bag hung in a tree.

“I didn’t think of that until my mare came straight up to it and
took it in her teeth, forcing out the cork, and sending the water
up, which we were both dying to drink, in a beautiful jet. Gibson
was now very sorry he had exchanged ‘Badger’ for the cob, as he
found the latter very dull and heavy to get along. There had been
a hot wind from the north all day, and the following morning (the

23rd of April), there was a most strange dampness in the air, and I
had a vague feeling, such as must have been felt by augurs and
seers of old, who trembled as they told events to come; FOR THIS

WAS THE LAST DAY ON WHICH I EVER SAW GIBSON.

“As Gibson came along after me, he called out that his horse was
going to die. The hills to the west were twenty-five to thirty
miles away, and I had to give up trying to reach them. How I
longed for a camel! Gibson’s horse was now so bad as to place both
of us in a great dilemma. We turned back in our tracks, when the
cob refused to carry his rider any farther, and tried to lie down.

We drove him another mile on foot, and down he fell to die. My
mare, the ‘Fair Maid of Perth,’ was only too willing to return, but
she had now to carry Gibson’s saddle and things, and away we went,
walking and riding in turns of one half-hour each.

“When we got back to about thirty miles from a place which I had
named ‘The Kegs,’ I shouted to Gibson, who was riding, to stop
until I walked up to him. By this time we had hardly a pint of
water left between us.

“We here finished the supply, and I then said, as I could not speak
before, ‘Look here, Gibson, you see we are in a most terrible fix,
with only one horse. Only one can ride, and one must remain
behind. I shall remain; and now listen to me. If the mare does
not get water soon, she will die; therefore, ride right on; get to
the Kegs, if possible, to-night, and give her water. Now that the
cob is dead, there’ll be all the more water for her. Early to-morrow you will sight the Rawlinson, at twenty-five miles from the

Kegs. Stick to the tracks and never leave them. Leave as much
water in one keg for me as you can afford, after watering the mare
and filling up your own bags; and, remember, I depend upon you to
bring me relief.’

“Gibson said if he had a compass he thought he could go better by
night. I knew he didn’t understand anything about compasses, as I
had often tried to explain them to him. The one I had was a

Gregory’s Patent, of a totally different construction from ordinary
instruments of the kind, and I was loth to part with it, as it was
the only one I had. However, as he was so anxious for it, I gave
it to him, and away he went. I sent one final shout after him to
stick to the tracks, and he said, ‘All right’ and the mare carried
him out of sight almost instantly.

“Gibson had left me with a little over two gallons of water, which

I could have drunk in half-an-hour. All the food I had was eleven
sticks of dirty, sandy, smoked horse, averaging about an ounce and
a half each.

“On the first of May, as I afterwards found out, at one o’clock in
the morning, I staggered into the camp, and awoke Mr. Tietkins at
daylight. He glared at me as if I had been one risen from the
dead. I asked him if he had seen Gibson. It was nine days since I
last saw him. The next thing was to find Gibson’s remains. It was
the 6th of May when we got back to where he had left the right
line. As long as he had remained on the other horses’ tracks it
was practicable enough to follow him, but the wretched man had left
them and gone away in a far more southerly direction, having the
most difficult sand-hills to cross at right angles. We found he
had burnt a patch of spinifex where he had left the other horses’

tracks.

“Whether he had made any mistake in steering by the compass or not
it is impossible to say; but instead of going east, as he should
have done, he actually went south, or very near it.

“I was sorry to think that the unfortunate man’s last sensible
moments must have been embittered by the thought that, as he had
lost himself in the capacity of messenger for my relief, I, too,
must necessarily fall a victim to his mishap.

“I called this terrible region, lying between the Rawlinson Range
and the next permanent water that may eventually be found to the
north, ‘Gibson’s Desert,’—after this first white victim to its
horrors.

“In looking over Gibson’s few effects, Mr. Tietkins and I found an
old pocket-book, a drinking-song, and a certificate of his
marriage. He had never told us he was married.”

And now to resume my own narrative. You will remember that I had
settled down for a considerable time on the shores of the lagoon,
where I had made everything around me as comfortable as possible.

Yamba had no difficulty whatever in keeping us well supplied with
roots and vegetables; and as kangaroos, opossums, snakes, and rats
abounded, we had an ample supply of meat, and the lagoon could
always be relied upon to provide us with excellent fish. The
country itself was beautiful in the extreme, with stately
mountains, broad, fertile valleys, extensive forests,—and, above
all, plenty of water. The general mode of living among the natives
was much the same as that prevailing among the blacks in my own
home at Cambridge Gulf,—although these latter were a vastly
superior race in point of physique, war weapons, and general
intelligence. The people I now found myself among were of somewhat
small stature, with very low foreheads, protruding chins, high
cheek-bones, and large mouths. Their most noteworthy
characteristic was their extreme childishness, which was especially
displayed on those occasions when I gave an acrobatic performance.

My skill with the bow and arrow was, as usual, a never-ending
source of astonishment. I was, in fact, credited with such
remarkable powers that all my ingenuity had sometimes to be brought
into play to accomplish, or to pretend to accomplish, the things
expected of me. I knew that I must never fail in anything I
undertook.

In the interior the natives never seemed to grow very plump, but
had a more or less spare, not to say emaciated, appearance compared
with the tribes near the coast. For one thing, food is not so
easily obtainable, nor is it so nourishing. Moreover, the natives
had to go very long distances to procure it.

Besides the low, receding forehead and protruding chin I have
already hinted at as characteristic of the inland tribes, I also
noticed that these people had abnormally large feet. Also, the
beards of the men were not nearly so full or luxuriant as those of
the blacks at Cambridge Gulf. The average height of the lagoon
tribe was little more than five feet. For myself, I am about five
feet seven and a half inches in height, and therefore I stalked
about among them like a giant.

Now that Gibson was dead I decided to move my home farther north,
and eventually settled down with my family (two children—a boy and
a girl—had been born to me during my residence on the shores of
the lagoon) in a beautiful mountainous and tropical region 200 or

300 miles to the north. It was my intention only to have made a
temporary stay here, but other ties came, and my little ones were
by no means strong enough to undertake any such formidable journey
as I had in contemplation. I also made the fatal mistake of trying
to bring my offspring up differently from the other savage
children. But I must relate here an incident that happened on our
journey north. Yamba came to me one day positively quivering with
excitement and terror, and said she had found some strange tracks,
apparently of some enormous beast—a monster so fearful as to be
quite beyond her knowledge.

She took me to the spot and pointed out the mysterious tracks,
which I saw at once were those of camels. I do not know why I
decided to follow them, because they must have been some months
old. Probably, I reflected, I might be able to pick up something
on the tracks which would be of use to me. At any rate, we did
follow the tracks for several days—perhaps a fortnight—and found
on the way many old meat-tins, which afterwards came in useful as
water vessels. One day, however, I pounced upon an illustrated
newspaper—a copy of the Sydney TOWN AND COUNTRY JOURNAL, bearing
some date, I think in 1875 or 1876. It was a complete copy with
the outer cover. I remember it contained some pictures of horse-racing—I believe at Paramatta; but the “Long Lost Relative” column
interested me most, for the very moment I found the paper I sat
down in the bush and began to read this part with great eagerness.

I could read English fairly well by this time, and as Yamba was
also tolerably familiar with the language, I read the paper aloud
to her. I cannot say she altogether understood what she heard, but
she saw that I was intensely interested and delighted, and so she
was quite content to stay there and listen. You will observe that
in all cases, the very fact that I was pleased was enough for

Yamba, who never once wavered in her fidelity and affection.

Altogether we spent some weeks following up these tracks, but, of
course, never came up with the caravan of camels, which must have
been some months ahead of us. Yamba at length appeared to be a
good deal wearied at my persistency in following up the tracks in
this way; but after all, was it not merely killing time?—a mild
sort of sensation which served to break the eternal monotony that
sometimes threatened to crush me.

How I treasured that soiled copy of the Town and Country—as it is
familiarly called in Sydney! I read and re-read it, and then read
it all over again until I think I could have repeated every line of
it by heart, even to the advertisements. Among the latter, by the
way, was one inserted apparently by an anxious mother seeking
information concerning a long-lost son; and this pathetic paragraph
set me wondering about my own mother. “Well,” I thought, “she at
least has no need to advertise, and I have the satisfaction of
knowing that she must by this time be quite reconciled to my loss,
and have given me up as dead long ago.” Strangely enough, this
thought quite reconciled me to my exile. In fact, I thanked

Providence that my disappearance had been so complete and so
prolonged as to leave not the slightest cause for doubt or hope on
the part of any of my relatives. Had I for a moment imagined that
my mother was still cherishing hopes of seeing me again some day,
and that she was undergoing agonies of mental suspense and worry on
my behalf, I think I would have risked everything to reach her.

But I knew quite well that she must have heard of the loss of the

Veielland, and long ago resigned herself to the certainty of my
death. I can never hope to describe the curious delight with which

I perused my precious newspaper. I showed the pictures in it to my
children and the natives, and they were more than delighted,—
especially with the pictures of horses in the race at Paramatta.

In the course of time the sheets of paper began to get torn, and
then I made a pretty durable cover out of kangaroo hide. Thus the
whole of my library consisted of my Anglo-French Testament, and the
copy of the Town and Country Journal.

But I have purposely kept until the end the most important thing in
connection with this strangely-found periodical. The very first
eager and feverish reading gave me an extraordinary shock, which
actually threatened my reason! In a prominent place in the journal

I came across the following passage: “THE DEPUTIES OF ALSACE AND

LORRAINE HAVE REFUSED TO VOTE IN THE GERMAN REICHSTAG.”

Now, knowing nothing whatever of the sanguinary war of 1870, or of
the alterations in the map of Europe which it entailed, this
passage filled me with startled amazement. I read it over and over
again, getting more bewildered each time. “The Deputies of Alsace
and Lorraine have refused to vote in the German Reichstag!” “But—
good heavens!” I almost screamed to myself, “WHAT were the Alsace
and Lorraine Deputies doing in the German Parliament at all?” I
turned the matter over and over in my mind, and at last, finding
that I was getting worked up into a state of dangerous excitement,

I threw the paper from me and walked away. I thought over the
matter again, and so utterly incomprehensible did it appear to me
that I thought I must be mistaken—that my eyes must have deceived
me. Accordingly I ran back and picked the paper up a second time,
and there, sure enough, was the same passage. In vain did I seek
for any sane explanation, and at last I somehow got it into my head
that the appearance of the printed characters must be due to a kind
of mental obliquity, and that I must be rapidly going mad! Even

Yamba could not sympathise with me, because the matter was one
which I never could have made her understand. I tried to put this
strange puzzle out of my head, but again and again the accursed and
torturing passage would ring in my ears until I nearly went crazy.

But I presently put the thing firmly from me, and resolved to think
no more about it.

It is not an exaggeration to describe my mountain home in the
centre of the continent as a perfect paradise. The grasses and
ferns there grew to a prodigious height, and there were magnificent
forests of white gum and eucalyptus. Down in the valley I built a
spacious house—the largest the natives had ever seen. It was
perhaps twenty feet long, sixteen feet to eighteen feet wide, and
about ten feet high. The interior was decorated with ferns, war
implements, the skins of various animals, and last—but by no means
least—the “sword” of the great sawfish I had killed in the haunted
lagoon. This house contained no fireplace, because all the cooking
was done in the open air. The walls were built of rough logs, the
crevices being filled in with earth taken from ant-hills. I have
just said that I built the house. This is, perhaps, not strictly
correct. It was Yamba and the other women-folk who actually
carried out the work, under my supervision. Here it is necessary
to explain that I did not dare to do much manual labour, because it
would have been considered undignified on my part. I really did
not want the house; but, strangely enough, I felt much more
comfortable when it was built and furnished, because, after all, it
was a source of infinite satisfaction to me to feel that I had a

HOME I could call my own. I had grown very weary of living like an
animal in the bush, and lying down to sleep at night on the bare
ground. It was this same consideration of “home” that induced me
to build a little hut for poor Gibson.

The floor of my house was two or three feet above the ground in
order to escape the ravages of the rats. There was only one
storey, of course, and the whole was divided into two rooms—one as
a kind of sitting-room and the other as a bedroom. The former I
fitted out with home-made tables and chairs (I had become pretty
expert from my experience with the girls); and each day fresh
eucalyptus leaves were strewed about, partly for cleanliness, and
partly because the odour kept away the mosquitoes. I also built
another house about two days’ tramp up the mountains, and to this
we usually resorted in the very hot weather.

Now here I have a curious confession to make. As the months glided
into years, and I reviewed the whole of my strange life since the
days when I went pearling with Jensen, the thought began gradually
to steal into my mind, “Why not wait until civilisation COMES TO

YOU—as it must do in time? Why weary yourself any more with
incessant struggles to get back to the world—especially when you
are so comfortable here?” Gradually, then, I settled down and was
made absolute chief over a tribe of perhaps five hundred souls.

Besides this, my fame spread abroad into the surrounding country,
and at every new moon I held a sort of informal reception, which
was attended by deputations of tribesmen for hundreds of miles
around. My own tribe already possessed a chieftain of their own
but my position was one of even greater influence than his.

Moreover, I was appointed to it without having to undergo the
painful ceremonies that initiation entails. My immunity in this
respect was of course owing to my supposed great powers, and the
belief that I was a returned spirit. I was always present at
tribal and war councils, and also had some authority over other
tribes.

I adopted every device I could think of to make my dwelling home-like, and I even journeyed many miles in a NNE. direction, to
procure cuttings of grape vines I had seen; but I must say that
this at any rate was labour in vain, because I never improved upon
the quality of the wild grapes, which had a sharp, acid flavour,
that affected the throat somewhat unpleasantly until one got used
to them.

When I speak of my “mountain home,” it must not be supposed that I
remained in one place. As a matter of fact, in accordance with my
usual practice, I took long excursions in different directions
extending over weeks and even months at a time. On these occasions

I always took with me a kind of nut, which, when eaten, endowed one
with remarkable powers of vitality and endurance. Since my return
to civilisation I have heard of the Kola nut, but cannot say
whether the substance used by the Australian aboriginal is the same
or not. I remember we generally roasted ours, and ate it as we
tramped along. In the course of my numerous journeys abroad I
blazed or marked a great number of trees; my usual mark being an
oval, in or underneath which I generally carved the letter “L.” I
seldom met with hostile natives in this region, but when I did my
mysterious bow and arrows generally sufficed to impress them. By
the way, I never introduced the bow as a weapon among the blacks,
and they, on their part, never tried to imitate me. They are a
conservative race, and are perfectly satisfied with their own time-honoured weapons.

Wild geese and ducks were plentiful in those regions, and there was
an infinite variety of game. From this you will gather that our
daily fare was both ample and luxurious.

And we had pets; I remember I once caught a live cockatoo, and
trained him to help me in my hunting expeditions. I taught him a
few English phrases, such as “Good-morning,” and “How are you?”;
and he would perch himself on a tree and attract great numbers of
his kind around him by his incessant chattering. I would then
knock over as many as I wanted by means of my bow and arrows. At
this time, indeed, I had quite a menagerie of animals, including a
tame kangaroo. Naturally enough, I had ample leisure to study the
ethnology of my people. I soon made the discovery that my blacks
were intensely spiritualistic; and once a year they held a festival
which, when described, will, I am afraid, tax the credulity of my
readers. The festival I refer to was held “when the sun was born
again,”—I.E., soon after the shortest day of the year, which would
be sometime in June. On these occasions the adult warriors from
far and near assembled at a certain spot, and after a course of
festivities, sat down to an extraordinary SEANCE conducted by
women—very old, wizened witches—who apparently possessed occult
powers, and were held in great veneration. These witches are
usually maintained at the expense of the tribe. The office,
however, does not necessarily descend from mother to daughter, it
being only women credited with supernatural powers who can claim
the position.

After the great corroboree the people would squat on the ground,
the old men and warriors in front, the women behind, and the
children behind them. The whole congregation was arranged in the
form of a crescent, in the centre of which a large fire would be
set burning. Some of the warriors would then start chanting, and
their monotonous sing-song would presently be taken up by the rest
of the gathering, to the accompaniment of much swaying of heads and
beating of hands and thighs. The young warriors then went out into
the open and commenced to dance.

I may as well describe in detail the first of these extraordinary
festivals which I witnessed. The men chanted and danced themselves
into a perfect frenzy, which was still further increased by the
appearance of three or four witches who suddenly rose up before the
fire. They were very old and haggard-looking creatures, with skins
like shrivelled parchment; they had scanty, dishevelled hair, and
piercing, beady eyes. They were not ornamented in any way, and
seemed more like skeletons from a tomb than human beings. After
they had gyrated wildly round the fire for a short time, the chant
suddenly ceased, and the witches fell prostrate upon the ground,
calling out as they did so the names of some departed chiefs. A
deathly silence then fell on the assembled gathering, and all eyes
were turned towards the wreaths of smoke that were ascending into
the evening sky. The witches presently renewed their plaintive
cries and exhortations, and at length I was amazed to see strange
shadowy forms shaping themselves in the smoke. At first they were
not very distinct, but gradually they assumed the form of human
beings, and then the blacks readily recognised them as one or other
of their long-departed chiefs—estimable men always and great
fighters. The baser sort never put in an appearance.

Now the first two or three times I saw this weird and fantastic
ceremony, I thought the apparitions were the result of mere
trickery.

But when I saw them year after year, I came to the conclusion that
they must be placed in the category of those things which are
beyond the ken of our philosophy. I might say that no one was
allowed to approach sufficiently close to touch the “ghosts,”—if
such they can be termed; and probably even if permission had been
granted, the blacks would have been in too great a state of terror
to have availed themselves of it.

Each of these seances lasted twenty minutes or half-an-hour, and
were mainly conducted in silence. While the apparitions were
visible, the witches remained prostrate, and the people looked on
quite spellbound. Gradually the phantoms would melt away again in
the smoke, and vanish from sight, after which the assembly would
disperse in silence. By next morning all the invited blacks would
have gone off to their respective homes. The witches, as I
afterwards learnt, lived alone in caves; and that they possessed
wonderful powers of prophecy was evidenced in my own case, because
they told me when I came among them that I would still be many
years with their people, but I would eventually return to my own
kind. The warriors, too, invariably consulted these oracles before
departing on hunting or fighting expeditions, and religiously
followed their advice.

CHAPTER XVI

A teacher of English—Myself as a black-fellow—I rest content—An
unknown terror—Manufacture of gunpowder—A curious find—The fiery
raft—In the lair of snakes—A dangerous enemy—An exciting scene—

A queer sport—Respect for the victor —A vain hope—Sore
disappointment—Yamba in danger—A strange duel—My opponent greets
me.

My two children were a source of great delight to me at this time,-

-although of course they were half-castes, the colour of their skin
being very little different from that of their mother. The
whiteness of their hands and finger-nails, however, clearly
indicated their origin. They were not christened in the Christian
way, neither were they brought up exactly in the same way as the
native children.

I taught them English. I loved them very dearly, and used to make
for them a variety of gold ornaments, such as bangles and armlets.

They did not participate in all the rough games of the black
children, yet they were very popular, having winning manners, and
being very quick to learn. I often told them about my life in
other parts of the world; but whenever I spoke of civilisation, I
classed all the nations of the universe together, and referred to
them as “my home,” or “my country.” I did not attempt to
distinguish between France and Switzerland, England and America.

Curiously enough, the subject that interested them most was the
animal kingdom, and when I told them that I hoped some day to take
them away with me to see my great country and the animals it
contained, they were immensely delighted. Particularly they wanted
to see the horse, the lion, and the elephant. Taking a yam-stick
as pointer, I would often draw roughly in the sand almost every
animal in Nature. But even when these rough designs were made for
my admiring audience, I found it extremely difficult to convey an
idea of the part in the economy of Nature which each creature
played. I would tell them, however, that the horse was used for
fighting purposes and for travel; that the cow yielded food and
drink, and that the dogs drew sledges. It was absolutely necessary
to dwell only on the utilitarian side of things. Beasts of burden
would be incomprehensible. Both of my children were very proud of
my position among and influence over the blacks.

And really I looked like a black-fellow myself at this time—not so
much on account of exposure, as because my body was constantly
coated with the charcoal and grease which serves as a protection
from the weather and from insects. My children, you may be
interested to learn, never grasped the fact that my exile was other
than quite voluntary on my part.

The children of the blacks continued to interest me as much as ever

(I was always fond of children); and I never grew tired of watching
them at their quaint little games. I think they all loved me as
much as I did them, and I was glad to see that their lives were one
long dream of happiness. They had no school to attend, no work to
perform, and no punishment to suffer. There are no children like
the children of the bush for perfect contentment. They seldom or
never quarrelled, and were all day long playing happily about the
camp, practising throwing their reed spears; climbing the trees
after the honey-pods, and indulging in a thousand and one merry
pranks. Often and often I looked at those robust little rascals,
and compared them sadly with my own children, who were delicate
almost from birth, and who caused me so much anxiety and heartache.

When the combination of circumstances, which is now well known to
my readers, caused me to settle in my mountain home, two or three
hundred miles to the north of Gibson’s Desert, I had no idea that I
should remain there for many years.

But strangely enough, as year after year slipped by, the desire to
return to civilisation seemed to leave me, and I grew quite content
with my lot. Gradually I began to feel that if civilisation—
represented, say, by a large caravan—were to come to me, and its
leader was willing not merely to take me away, but my wife and
children also, then indeed I would consent to go; but for no other
consideration could I be induced to leave those who were now so
near and dear to me. I may as well mention here that I had many
chances of returning ALONE to civilisation, but never availed
myself of them. As I spent the greater part of twenty years in my
mountain home, it stands to reason that it is this part of my
career which I consult for curious and remarkable incidents.

One day a great darkness suddenly came over the face of Nature.

The sombre gloom was relieved only by a strange lurid glare, which
hung on the distant horizon far away across that weird land. The
air was soon filled with fine ashes, which descended in such
quantities as to cover all vegetation, and completely hide exposed
water-holes and lagoons. Even at the time I attributed the
phenomenon to volcanic disturbance, and I have since found that it
was most likely due to an eruption of the volcano of Krakatoa.

This visitation occasioned very great consternation among the
superstitious blacks, who concluded that the spirits had been
angered by some of their own misdeeds, and were manifesting their
wrath in this unpleasant way. I did not attempt to enlighten them
as to its true cause, but gave them to understand vaguely that I
had something to do with it. I also told them that the great
spirit, whose representative I was, was burning up the land.

Another phenomenon that caused much mystification and terror was an
eclipse of the sun. Never have I seen my blacks in such a state of
excitement and terror as when that intense darkness came suddenly
over the world at midday. They came crowding instinctively to me,
and I stood silent among the cowering creatures, not thinking it
politic for a moment to break the strange and appalling stillness
that prevailed on every hand—and which extended even to the animal
world. The trembling blacks were convinced that night had suddenly
descended upon them, but they had no explanation whatever to offer.

They seemed quite unfamiliar with the phenomenon, and it was
apparently not one of those many things which their forefathers
wove superstitious stories around, to hand down to their children.

As the great darkness continued, the natives retired to rest,
without even holding the usual evening chant. I did not attempt to
explain the real reason of the phenomenon, but as I had no
particular end to serve, I did not tell them that it was due to my
power.

Never once, you see, did I lose an opportunity of impressing the
savages among whom I dwelt. On several occasions, having all the
ingredients at my disposal, I attempted to make gunpowder, but
truth to tell, my experiments were not attended with very great
success. I had charcoal, saltpetre, and sulphur ready to my hand,-

-all obtainable from natural sources close by; but the result of
all my efforts (and I tried mixing the ingredients in every
conceivable way) was a very coarse kind of powder with practically
no explosive force, but which would go off with an absurd “puff.”

Now I was very anxious to make an EXPLOSIVE powder, not merely
because it would assist me in impressing the blacks, but also
because I proposed carrying out certain blasting operations in
order to obtain minerals and stones which I thought would be
useful. The net result was that although I could not manufacture
any potent explosive, yet I did succeed in arousing the intense
curiosity of the blacks. My powder burnt without noise, and the
natives could never quite make out where the flame came from.

As there seemed to be a never-ending eagerness on the part of the
blacks to witness the wonders of the white man, I even tried my
hand at making ice—a commodity which is, of course, absolutely
unknown in Central Australia. The idea came to me one day when I
found myself in a very cool cave, in which there was a well of
surprisingly cold water. Accordingly, I filled some opossum skins
with the refreshing fluid, placed them in the coolest part of the
cave, and then covered them with saltpetre, of which there was an
abundance. When I tell you that the experiment was quite
fruitless, you will readily understand that I did not always
succeed in my role of wonder-worker. But whenever I was defeated,
it only had the effect of making me set my wits to work to devise
something still more wonderful—something which I was certain would
be an assured success.

Whilst taking, a stroll in the region of my mountain home one day,
my eyes—which were by this time almost as highly trained as those
of the blacks themselves—suddenly fastened upon a thin stream of
some greenish fluid which was apparently oozing out of the rocky
ground. Closer investigation proved that this was not water. I
collected a quantity of it in a kangaroo skin, but this took a
considerable time, because the liquid oozed very slowly.

I would not have taken this trouble were it not that I was pretty
certain I HAD DISCOVERED A SPRING OF CRUDE PETROLEUM. Immediately,
and by a kind of instinct, it occurred to me that I might make use
of this oil as yet another means of impressing the blacks with my
magical powers. I told no one of my discovery—not even Yamba.

First of all I constructed a sort of raft from the branches of
trees, thoroughly saturating each branch with the oil. I also
placed a shallow skin reservoir of oil on the upper end of the
raft, and concealed it with twigs and leaves. This done, I
launched my interesting craft on the waters of the lagoon, having
so far carried out all my preparations in the strictest secrecy.

When everything was ready I sent out invitations by mail-men, smoke
signals, and message sticks to tribes both far and near, to come
and see me SET FIRE TO THE WATER! In parentheses, I may remark,
that with regard to smoke-signals, white smoke only is allowed to
ascend in wreaths and curls; while black smoke is sent up in one
great volume. As by this time my fame was pretty well established,
the wonder-loving children of Nature lost no time in responding to
the summons; and at length, when the mystic glow of a Central

Australian evening had settled over the scene, a great gathering
established itself on the shores of the lagoon. On such occasions,
however, I always saw to it that my audience were not too near.

But anyhow there was little chance of failure, because the blacks
had long since grown to believe in me blindly and implicitly.

With much ceremony I set fire to the raft, hoisted a little bark
sail upon it, and pushed it off. It lay very low in the water, and
as the amazed onlookers saw it gliding across the placid waters of
the lagoon enveloped in smoke and flames, they did actually believe
that I had set fire to the water itself—particularly when the
blazing oil was seen in lurid patches on the placid surface. They
remained watching till the fire died down, when they retired to
their own homes, more convinced than ever that the white man among
them was indeed a great and powerful spirit.

But, human nature being fundamentally the same all the world over,
it was natural enough—and, indeed, the wonder is how I escaped so
long—that one or other of the tribal medicine-men should get
jealous of my power and seek to overthrow me. Now, the medicine-man belonging to the tribe in my mountain home presently found
himself (or fancied himself) under a cloud,—the reason, of course,
being that my display of wonders far transcended anything which he
himself could do. So my rival commenced an insidious campaign
against me, trying to explain away every wonderful thing that I
did, and assuring the blacks that if I were a spirit at all it was
certainly a spirit of evil. He never once lost an opportunity of
throwing discredit and ridicule upon me and my powers; and at
length I discerned symptoms in the tribe which rendered it
imperatively necessary that I should take immediate and drastic
steps to overthrow my enemy, who, by the way, had commenced trying
to duplicate every one of my tricks or feats. I gave the matter
some little thought, and one day, whilst out on one of my solitary
rambles, I came across a curious natural feature of the landscape,
which suggested to me a novel and, I venture to say, remarkable
solution of a very serious situation.

I suddenly found myself on the brink of a peculiar basin-like
depression, which, from its obvious dampness and profusion of bush
and cover, I at once recognised as the ideal abode of innumerable
snakes. I marked the spot in my mind, and returned home, pondering
the details of the dramatic victory I hoped to win. Day by day I
returned to this depression and caught numerous black and carpet
snakes. From each of these dangerous and poisonous reptiles I
removed the poison fangs only; and then, after scoring it with a
cross by means of my stiletto, I let it go, knowing that it would
never leave a spot so ideal—from a snake’s point of view. I
operated on a great number of the deadly reptiles in this way, but,
of course there remained many who were not so treated; whilst
several of my queer patients died outright under the operation.

Needless to say, I might have met my own death in this
extraordinary business had I not been assisted by my devoted wife.

When we had finished our work, there was absolutely nothing in the
appearance of the place to indicate that it was any different from
its state when I first cast my eyes upon it.

Then, all being ready, I chose a specially dramatic moment at a
corroboree to challenge my rival in a war song, this challenge
being substantially as follows: “You tell the people that you are
as great as I—the all-powerful white spirit-man. Well, now, I
offer you a formal challenge to perform the feat which I shall
perform on a certain day and at a certain spot.” The day was the
very next day, and the spot, the scene of my strange surgical
operations upon the snakes. The effect of my challenge was
magical.

The jealous medicine-man, boldly and openly challenged before the
whole tribe, had no time to make up an evasive reply, and he
accepted then and there. Urgent messages were despatched, by the
fun-loving blacks, to all the tribes, so that we were pretty sure
of a large and attentive audience. It was about midday when the
ridge round the depression was crowded with expectant blacks, every
one of whom dearly loved a contest, or competition, of whatever
kind. I lost no time—for in love or war shilly-shallying is
unknown among the blacks—but boldly leaped down into the hollow
armed only with a reed whistle, which I had made for myself solely
with the view of enticing the snakes from their holes. I cast a
triumphant glance at my impassive rival, who, up to this moment,
had not the faintest idea what the proposed ordeal was. I
commenced to play as lively a tune as the limited number of notes
in the whistle would allow, and before I had been playing many
minutes the snakes came gliding out, swinging their heads backwards
and forwards and from side to side as though they were under a
spell. Selecting a huge black snake, who bore unobtrusively my
safety mark, I pounced down upon him and presented my bare arm.

After teasing the reptile two or three times I allowed him to
strike his teeth deep into my flesh, and immediately the blood
began to run. I also permitted several other fangless snakes to
bite me until my arms and legs, breast and back, were covered with
blood. Personally, I did not feel much the worse, as the bites
were mere punctures, and I knew the selected reptiles to be quite
innocuous. Several “unmarked” snakes, however, manifested an eager
desire to join in the fun, and I had some difficulty in escaping
their deadly attentions. I had to wave them aside with a stick.

All this time the blacks above me were yelling with excitement, and

I am under the impression that several were lamenting my madness,
whilst others were turning angrily upon my rival, and accusing him
of having brought about my death. At a favourable moment I rushed
up the ridge of the hollow and stood before the horrified medicine-man, who, in response to my triumphant demand to go and do
likewise, returned a feeble and tremulous negative. Even he, I
think, was now sincerely convinced that I possessed superhuman
powers; but it would have been awkward had he come along when I was
laboriously and surreptitiously extracting the poison fangs from
the snakes, and placing my “hall mark” upon them.

His refusal cost him his prestige, and he was forthwith driven from
the tribe as a fraud, whilst my fame rose higher than ever. The
blacks now wished me to take over the office of medicine-man, but I
declined to do so, and nominated instead a youth I had trained for
the position. It may be necessary here to remark that the blacks,
under no circumstances, kill a medicine-man. My defeated rival was
a man of very considerable power, and I knew quite well that if I
did not get the best of him he would have ME driven out of the
tribe and perhaps speared.

Mention of the snake incident reminds me of a very peculiar and
interesting sport which the blacks indulge in. I refer to fights
between snakes and iguanas. These combats certainly afford very
fine sport. The two creatures are always at mortal enmity with one
another, but as a rule the iguana commences the attack, no matter
how much bigger the snake may be than himself; or whether it is
poisonous or not. I have seen iguanas attack black snakes from six
feet to ten feet in length, whilst they themselves rarely measured
more than three or four feet. As a rule the iguana makes a
snapping bite at the snake a few inches below its head, and the
latter instantly retaliates by striking its enemy with its
poisonous fangs. Then an extraordinary thing happens. The iguana
will let go his hold and straightway make for a kind of fern, which
he eats in considerable quantities, the object of this being to
counteract the effects of the poison. When he thinks he has had
enough of the antidote he rushes back to the scene of the encounter
and resumes the attack; THE SNAKE ALWAYS WAITS THERE FOR HIM.

Again and again the snake bites the iguana, and as often the latter
has recourse to the counteracting influences of the antidote. The
fight may last for upwards of an hour, but eventually the iguana
conquers. The final struggle is most exciting. The iguana seizes
hold of the snake five or six inches below the head, and this time
refuses to let go his hold, no matter how much the snake may
struggle and enwrap him in its coils. Over and over roll the
combatants, but the grip of the iguana is relentless; and the
struggles of the snake grow weaker, until at length he is stretched
out dead. Then the triumphant iguana steals slowly away.

The spectators would never dream of killing him,—partly on account
of their admiration for his prowess, but more particularly because
his flesh is tainted with poison from the repeated snake bites.

These curious fights generally take place near water-holes.

I have also seen remarkable combats between snakes of various
species and sizes. A small snake will always respond to the
challenge of a much larger one, this challenge taking the form of
rearing up and hissing. The little snake will then advance slowly
towards its opponent and attempt to strike, but, as a rule, the big
one crushes it before it can do any harm. I had often heard of the
joke about two snakes of equal size trying to swallow one another,
and was, therefore, the more interested when I came across this
identical situation in real life. One day, right in my track, lay
two very large snakes which had evidently been engaged in a very
serious encounter; and the victor had commenced swallowing his
exhausted adversary. He had disposed of some three or four feet of
that adversary’s length when I arrived on the scene, and was
evidently resting before taking in the rest. I easily made
prisoners of both.

Not long after this incident a delusive hope was held out to me
that I might be able to return to civilisation. News was brought
one day that the tracks of some strange and hitherto unknown
animals had been found to the north, and, accompanied by Yamba, I
went off to inspect them. I found that they were camel tracks—for
the second time; and as Yamba informed me that, from the appearance
of the trail, there was no one with them, I concluded that in all
probability the creatures were wild, having long ago belonged to
some exploring party which had come to grief.

“Here at length,” I thought, “is the means of returning to
civilisation. If I can only reach these creatures—and why should

I not with so much assistance at my disposal?—I will break them
in, and then strike south across the deserts with my wife and
family.” I returned to the camp, and taking with me a party of the
most intelligent tribesmen, set off after the wild camels. When we
had been several days continuously tracking we came up with the
beasts. There were four of them altogether, and right wild and
vicious-looking brutes they were. They marched close together in a
band, and never parted company. The moment I and my men tried to
separate and head them off, the leader would swoop down upon us
with open mouth, and the result of this appalling apparition was
that my black assistants fled precipitately. Alone I followed the
camels for several days in the hope of being able ultimately to
drive them into some ravine, where I thought I might possibly bring
them into a state of subjection by systematic starvation. But it
was a vain effort on my part. They kept in the track of water-holes, and wandered on from one to the other at considerable speed.

At length I abandoned hope altogether, though not without a feeling
of sore disappointment, as I watched the curious, ungainly
creatures disappearing over the ridge of a sand-hill. Of course I
took good care not to tell any of the natives the real reason of my
desire to possess a camel,—though I did try to explain to them
some of the uses to which people in other parts of the world put
these wonderful animals.

I never lost an opportunity of leaving records wherever I could.

As I have said before, I was constantly blazing trees and even
making drawings upon them; and I would have left records in cairns
had I been able to make any writing material. Talking about this,

I was for a long time possessed with the desire to make myself a
kind of paper, and I frequently experimented with the fibres of a
certain kind of tree. This material I reduced to a pulp, and then
endeavoured to roll into sheets. Here again, however, I had to
confess failure. I found the ordinary sheets of bark much more
suitable for my purpose.

Pens I had in thousands from the quills of the wild swan and goose;
and I made ink from the juice of a certain dark-coloured berry,
mixed with soot, which I collected on the bottom of my gold
cooking-kettle. I also thought it advisable to make myself plates
from which to eat my food—not because of any fastidiousness on my
part, but from that ever-present desire to impress the blacks,
which was now my strongest instinct. In the course of my ramblings
in the northern regions I came across quantities of silver-lead,
which I smelted with the object of obtaining lead to beat out into
plates. I also went some hundreds of miles for the sake of getting
copper, and found great quantities of ores of different kinds in
the Kimberley district.

A very strange experience befell Yamba not long after I had settled
down among the blacks in my mountain home; and it serves to
illustrate the strictness with which the laws against poaching are
observed. The incident I am about to relate concerned me very
nearly, and might have cost me my life as well as my wife. Well,
it happened that Yamba and I were one day returning from one of the
many “walkabouts” which we were constantly undertaking alone and
with natives, and which sometimes extended over several weeks and
even months. We had pitched our camp for the afternoon, and Yamba
went off, as usual, in search of roots and game for the evening
meal. She had been gone some little time when I suddenly heard her
well-known “coo-eey” and knowing that she must be in trouble of
some kind, I immediately grasped my weapons and went off to her
rescue, guiding myself by her tracks.

A quarter of a mile away I came upon a scene that filled me with
amazement. There was Yamba—surely the most devoted wife a man,
civilised or savage, ever had—struggling in the midst of quite a
crowd of blacks, who were yelling and trying forcibly to drag her
away. At once I saw what had happened. Yamba had been hunting for
roots over the boundary of territory belonging to a tribe with whom
we had not yet made friends; and as she had plainly been guilty of
the great crime of trespass, she was, according to inviolable
native law, confiscated by those who had detected her. I rushed up
to the blacks and began to remonstrate with them in their own
tongue, but they were both truculent and obstinate, and refused to
release my now weeping and terrified Yamba. At last we effected a
compromise,—I agreeing to accompany the party, with their captive,
back to their encampment, and there have the matter settled by the
chief. Fortunately we had not many miles to march, but, as I
anticipated, the chief took the side of his own warriors, and
promptly declared that he would appropriate Yamba for himself. I
explained to him, but in vain, that my wife’s trespass was
committed all unknowingly, and that had I known his tribe were
encamped in the district, I would have come immediately and stayed
with them a few nights.

As showing what a remarkable person I was, I went through part of
my acrobatic repertoire; and even my poor eager Bruno, who
evidently scented trouble, began on his own account to give a
hurried and imperfect show. He stood on his head and tumbled
backwards and forwards in a lamentably loose and unscientific
manner, barking and yelling all the time.

I do not know whether the wily chief had made up his mind to see
more of us or not; but at any rate he looked at me very fiercely as
though determined to carry his point, and then replied that there
was but one law—which was that Yamba should be confiscated for
poaching, whether the crime was intentional on her part or not. So
emphatically was this said that I began to think I had really lost
my faithful companion for ever. As this awful thought grew upon
me, and I pondered over the terrible past, I made up my mind that
if necessary I would lose my own life in her defence, and to this
end I adopted a very haughty attitude, which caused the chief
suddenly to discover a kind of by-law to the effect that in such
cases as this one the nearest relative of the prisoner might win
her back by fighting for her. This, of course, was what I wanted,
above all things—particularly as the old chief had not as yet seen
me use my wonderful weapons. And as I felt certain he would choose
throwing spears, I knew that victory was mine. He selected, with a
critical eye, three well-made spears, whilst I chose three arrows,
which I purposely brandished aloft, so as to give my opponent the
impression that they were actually small spears, and were to be
thrown, as such, javelin-fashion. The old chief and his blacks
laughed heartily and pityingly at this exhibition, and ridiculed
the idea that I could do any damage with such toy weapons.

The demeanour of the chief himself was eloquent of the good-humoured contempt in which he held me as an antagonist; and a
distance of twenty paces having been measured out, we took our
places and prepared for the dramatic encounter, upon which depended
something more precious to me than even my own life. Although
outwardly cool and even haughty, I was really in a state of most
terrible anxiety. I fixed my eyes intently upon the spare but
sinewy chief, and without moving a muscle allowed him to throw his
spears first. The formidable weapons came whizzing through the air
with extraordinary rapidity one after the other; but long
experience of the weapon and my own nimbleness enabled me to avoid
them. But no sooner had I stepped back into position for the third
time than, with lightning dexterity, I unslung my bow and let fly
an arrow at my antagonist which I had purposely made heavier than
usual by weighting it with fully an ounce of gold. Naturally he
failed to see the little feathered shaft approach, and it pierced
him right in the fleshy part of the left thigh—exactly where I
intended. The chief leaped from the ground more in surprise than
pain, as though suddenly possessed by an evil spirit. His
warriors, too, were vastly impressed. As blood was drawn in this
way, honour and the law were alike supposed to be satisfied, so

Yamba was immediately restored to me, trembling and half afraid to
credit her own joyful senses.

My readers will, perhaps, wonder why these cannibal savages did not
go back on their bargain and refuse to give her up, even after I
had vanquished their chief in fair fight; but the honourable course
they adopted is attributable solely to their own innate sense of
fair-play, and their admiration for superior prowess and skill.

Why, when the chief had recovered from his astonishment he came up
to me, and greeted me warmly, without even taking the trouble to
remove my arrow from his bleeding thigh! We became the very best
of friends; and Yamba and I stayed with him for some days as his
guests. When at length we were obliged to leave, he gave me quite
an imposing escort, as though I were a powerful friendly chief who
had done him a great service!

CHAPTER XVII

Mosquitoes and leeches—I explain pictures—An awkward admission—

My great portrait—The stomach as a deity—The portrait a success—

A colossal statue of “H. R. H.”—Fish without eyes—A sad
reflection—A strange illusion—A grave danger—I sink a well —

“Universal provider”—A significant phenomenon—Bruno as
accomplice—I find Bruno dead.

I must say I was not very much troubled with mosquitoes in my
mountain home, and as I had endured dreadful torments from these
insects whilst at Port Essington and other swampy places, I had
good reason to congratulate myself. Whilst crossing some low
country on one occasion I was attacked by these wretched pests,
whose bite penetrated even the clay covering that protected my
skin. Even the blacks suffered terribly, particularly about the
eyes. I, however, had taken the precaution to protect my eyes by
means of leaves and twigs. At Port Essington the mosquitoes were
remarkably large, and of a greyish colour. They flew about
literally in clouds, and it was practically impossible to keep
clear of them.

The natives treated the bites with an ointment made from a kind of
penny-royal herb and powdered charcoal. Talking about pests, in
some parts the ants were even more terrible than the mosquitoes,
and I have known one variety—a reddish-brown monster, an inch
long—to swarm over and actually kill children by stinging them.

Another pest was the leech. It was rather dangerous to bathe in
some of the lagoons on account of the leeches that infested the
waters. Often in crossing a swamp I would feel a slight tickling
sensation about the legs, and on looking down would find my nether
limbs simply coated with these loathsome creatures. The remarkable
thing was, that whilst the blacks readily knew when leeches
attacked them, I would be ignorant for quite a long time, until I
had grown positively faint from loss of blood. Furthermore, the
blacks seemed to think nothing of their attacks, but would simply
crush them on their persons in the most nonchalant manner.

Sometimes they scorch them off their bodies by means of a lighted
stick—a kind office which Yamba performed for me. The blacks had
very few real cures for ailments, and such as they had were
distinctly curious. One cure for rheumatism was to roll in the
black, odourless mud at the edge of a lagoon, and then bask in the
blazing sun until the mud became quite caked upon the person.

The question may be asked whether I ever tried to tell my cannibals
about the outside world. My answer is, that I only told them just
so much as I thought their childish imaginations would grasp. Had

I told them more, I would simply have puzzled them, and what they
do not understand they are apt to suspect.

Thus, when I showed them pictures of horse-races and sheep farms in
the copy of the Sydney Town and Country Journal which I had picked
up, I was obliged to tell them that horses were used only in
warfare, whilst sheep were used only as food. Had I spoken about
horses as beasts of burden, and told them what was done with the
wool of the sheep, they would have been quite unable to grasp my
meaning, and so I should have done myself more harm than good.

They had ideas of their own about astronomy; the fundamental “fact”

being that the earth was perfectly flat, the sky being propped up
by poles placed at the edges, and kept upright by the spirits of
the departed—who, so the medicine-man said, were constantly being
sent offerings of food and drink. The Milky Way was a kind of

Paradise of souls; whilst the sun was the centre of the whole
creation.

I had often puzzled my brain for some method whereby I could convey
to these savages some idea of the magnitude of the British Empire.

I always had the BRITISH Empire in my mind, not only because my
sympathies inclined that way, but also because I knew that the
first friends to receive me on my return to civilisation must
necessarily be British. Over and over again did I tell the
childish savages grouped around me what a mighty ruler was the

Sovereign of the British Empire, which covered the whole world.

Also how that Sovereign HAD SENT ME AS a SPECIAL AMBASSADOR, to
describe to them the greatness of the nation of which they formed
part. Thus you will observe I never let my blacks suspect I was a
mere unfortunate, cast into their midst by a series of strange
chances. I mentioned the whole world because nothing less than
this would have done. Had I endeavoured to distinguish between the

British Empire and, say, the German, I should have again got beyond
my hearers’ depth, so to speak, and involved myself in
difficulties.

Half instinctively, but without motive, I refrained from mentioning
that the ruler of the British Empire was A WOMAN, but this
admission dropped from me accidentally one day, and then—what a
falling off was there! I instantly recognised the mistake I had
made from the contemptuous glances of my blacks. And although I
hastened to say that she was a mighty chieftainess, upon whose
dominions the sun never set; and that she was actually the direct
ruler of the blacks themselves, they repudiated her with scorn, and
contemned me for singing the praises of a mere woman. I had to let
this unfortunate matter drop for a time, but the subject was ever
present in my mind, and I wondered how I could retrieve my position

(and her Majesty’s) without eating my words. At length one day

Yamba and I came across a curious rugged limestone region, which
was full of caves. Whilst exploring these we came upon a huge,
flat, precipitous surface of rock, and then—how or why, I know
not—the idea suddenly occurred to me to DRAW A GIGANTIC PORTRAIT

OF HER MOST GRACIOUS MAJESTY QUEEN VICTORIA! At this period, I
should mention, I was a recognised chief, and periodically—once
every new moon—I gave a kind of reception to my people, and also
to the neighbouring tribes. At this interesting function I would
always contrive to have some new wonder to unfold. My visitors
never outstayed their welcome, and I always managed to have an
abundance of food for them.

Well, I came upon the cave region a few weeks after my unfortunate
blunder about the Queen; and I determined to have my great portrait
ready for the next reception day. Taking some blocks of stone of
handy size, I first wetted the surface of the rock and then
commenced to rub it, until I had a pretty smooth face to work upon.

This took some time, but whilst I was doing it Yamba got ready the
necessary charcoal sticks and pigments such as the blacks decorate
themselves with at corroborees. I had a slight knowledge of
drawing, and climbing up on some projecting stones I commenced to
draw in bold, sweeping outline, what I venture to describe as the
most extraordinary portrait of Queen Victoria on record. The
figure, which was in profile, was perhaps seven feet or eight feet
high, and of more than equally extravagant proportions in other
respects. Of course, the figure had to be represented entirely
without clothing, otherwise the blacks would simply have been
puzzled. Now to describe the portrait as much in detail as I dare.

The crown was composed of rare feathers such as only a redoubtable
and cunning hunter could obtain; and it included feathers of the
lyre-bird and emu. The sceptre was a stupendous gnarled waddy or
club, such as could be used with fearful execution amongst one’s
enemies. The nose was very large, because this among the blacks
indicates great endurance; whilst the biceps were abnormally
developed. In fact, I gave her Majesty as much muscle as would
serve for half-a-dozen professional pugilists or “strong men.” The
stomach was much distended, and when I state this fact I am sure it
will excite much curiosity as to the reason why.

Well, as the stomach is practically the greatest deity these
savages know, and as food is often very hard to obtain, they argue
that a person with a very full stomach must necessarily be a daring
and skilful hunter, otherwise he would not be able to get much food
to put into it.

This extraordinary portrait was finally daubed and decorated with
brilliant pigments and glaring splashes of yellow, red, and blue.

I also used a kind of vivid red dye obtained from the sap of a
certain creeper which was bruised between heavy stones. I spent
perhaps a week or a fortnight on this drawing (I could not give all
day to it, of course); and the only persons who knew of its
existence were my own children and women-folk. After the
completion of the great portrait, I went away, and waited
impatiently for my next reception day. When the wonder-loving
blacks were again before me I told them that I had a remarkable
picture of the great British Queen to show them, and then, full of
anticipation and childish delight, they trooped after me to the
spot where I had drawn the great picture on the rocks. It is no
exaggeration to say that the crowd of cannibals stood and squatted
in front of my handiwork simply speechless with amazement.

Eventually they burst out into cries of wonderment, making curious
guttural sounds with their lips, and smacking their thighs in token
of their appreciation. I pointed out every detail—the immense
size of the great Queen, and the various emblems of her power; and
at last, stepping back from the rock, I sang “God save the Queen,”

the beautiful national hymn of Great Britain, which I had learned
from the two ill-fated girls, and which, you will remember, has the
same air as that of a Swiss song.

The general effect not merely removed any bad impression that might
have been created with regard to my damaging admission about the
sex of the great ruler; it more than re-established me in my old
position, and I followed up my success by assuring them that her

Majesty included in her retinue of servants a greater number of
persons than was represented in the whole tribe before me.

Furthermore, I assured them that whilst the mountain home I had
built was very large (judged by their standard), the house of Queen

Victoria was big enough to hold a whole nation of blacks.

In order to give you some idea of the nervous horror I had of
losing prestige, I may tell you that, far from being satisfied with
what I had done to vindicate the great Sovereign whose special
ambassador I was supposed to be, I soon decided to give yet another
demonstration which should impress even those who were inclined to
cavil—if any such existed. I pointed out that whilst the Queen,
great and powerful and beloved ruler though she was, could not lead
her warriors into battle in person, yet she was represented in war
time by her eldest son, who was a most redoubtable warrior and
spear-thrower, and acted on behalf of his illustrious mother on all
occasions when she could not appear. But as mention of the Prince
of Wales called for a demonstration of HIS personality also, I
determined to make another experiment in portraiture,—this time in
the direction of sculpture. I think it was having come across a
very damp country, abounding in plastic clay, that put this idea
into my head. First of all, then, I cut down a stout young
sapling, which, propped up in the ground, served as the mainstay of
my statue; and from it I fastened projecting branches for the arms
and legs.

Round this framework I built up my figure with blocks of clay; and
at length, after, perhaps, three or four weeks’ industrious
modelling, I completed a statue of his Royal Highness which
measured about seven feet six inches in height. The body and limbs
were of abnormal development, much on the lines of my
representation of his august mother. Fuller details would be
interesting, but hardly edifying. This statue I “unveiled” at
another of my monthly receptions, and, judged by its effect, it was
even a greater success than the colossal portrait of the Queen. A
monster corroboree was held alongside the Prince of Wales’s statue,
but, unfortunately, he went to pieces in a day or two, when the
fierce sun beat down upon the clay, and cracked it. This gradual
disintegration of the great ruler’s deputy vastly amused the
blacks, and I eventually had to hasten the Prince’s end, lest their
mirth should compromise my dignity.

You will hardly be surprised when I tell you that the blacks looked
to me for everything. I was judge, wonder-worker, and arbitrator.

Often they would pick up one of my possessions, and, whilst not
exactly coveting it, they would ask for one like it.

Take, for example, the reed flutes which, when played by me, were
such a source of joy to the blacks and their children. Well, I was
soon called upon to make flutes for the natives, which I did out of
long reeds; but these instruments only had two holes in them at
first, as the blacks could not play them when other holes were
added. The great drawback to these flutes was that the reed dried
very quickly and became useless for musical purposes; so I was kept
pretty busy, more especially as I did not want to create jealousy
by refusing some and gratifying others.

Although the immediate country in which I established my home was
fertile and extremely rich in tropical vegetation, the adjoining
ranges were in striking contrast to it; many districts being rugged
and slaty and painfully difficult to traverse on foot. There were,
however, many interesting natural curiosities which beguiled the
time in travelling.

Once I came across a certain kind of spider, whose web was so
strong and thick that it only broke under considerable pressure
from the finger. The spider itself was fully two inches or three
inches long, and had formidable claws. Inland fishing, too, I
found extremely interesting. Of course, the inland blacks have a
very different method of fishing from that adopted by the coast
tribes. Often the inland people would build a fire on the banks of
the lagoon, and throw something into the water to attract the fish
to the surface. When the fish rose they would promptly be speared.

Some of them weighed as much as ten pounds, and proved excellent
eating. The blacks themselves never inquired how the fish came
into these inland holes; it was enough for them to know they were
there and were good eating. The usual fish-hooks were of bone; and
although I experimented with hooks of gold and copper I found them
practically useless, and, in the long run, reverted to articles of
native manufacture. In a certain limestone country, which I struck
in the course of my wanderings, I discovered some extraordinary
caves with water-holes, in which blind fish existed. They
certainly had indications of eyes, but these were hidden beneath a
kind of permanent skin covering. In any case they would have had
no use for eyes, because the water-holes were situated in the most
profound darkness. In other caves I discovered quantities of
extraordinary animal-bones, probably of prehistoric origin.

If I have omitted to mention Bruno in connection with every
incident related in these pages, it must not be supposed that my
faithful companion did not play an important part in my daily life.

He was always with me; but it must be remembered that he was now
growing old, and the natives around me were by no means so keen to
possess him as the tribes of Carpentaria had been in the days gone
by.

All kinds of extraordinary incidents befell me whilst on the “walkabout.” Many a time have I been deceived by mirage. One most
complete deception befell me one day whilst Yamba and I were
tramping over a stretch of low, sandy country. Suddenly I fancied

I descried the boundless ocean in the distance, and with my usual
impetuosity rushed frantically forward in the firm belief that at
last we had reached the coast. Yamba explained that it was only a
mirage, but I would not stay to listen, and must have gone miles
before I gave up in disgust and returned to my patient wife. This
brings me to another and perhaps still more extraordinary illusion.

One day whilst Yamba and I were passing through one of those
eternal regions of sand-hills and spinifex which are the despair of
the Australian explorer, I suddenly saw in the distance what I was
certain was A FLOCK OF SHEEP. There they were apparently—scores
of them, browsing calmly in a depression in a fertile patch where
most probably water existed.

In an instant the old desire to return to civilisation, which I had
thought buried long ago, reasserted itself, and I dashed forward at
full speed yelling back to Yamba, “Sheep, sheep—where sheep are,
men are. Civilisation at last!” When at length I had got near
enough for the creatures to notice me, you may imagine my disgust
and disappointment when quite a little forest of tall heads went
high into the air, and A FLOCK OF EMUS raced off across the country
at full speed. These huge birds had had their heads down feeding,
and not unnaturally, in the distance, I had mistaken them for
sheep.

I think every one is aware that prolonged droughts are of very
common occurrence in Central Australia, and are mainly responsible
for the migratory habits of the aborigines—particularly those of
the remote deserts in the interior. The most terrible drought I
myself experienced whilst in my mountain home was one that extended
over three years, when even the lagoon in front of my dwelling,
which I had thought practically inexhaustible, dried up, with the
most appalling results. Just think—never a drop of rain falling
for over three long years, with a scorching sun darting down its
rays almost every day! During this terrible period the only
moisture the parched earth received was in the form of the heavy
dews that descended in the night. Even these, however, only
benefited the vegetation where any continued to exist, and did not
contribute in the slightest degree to the natural water supply so
necessary for the sustenance of human and animal life. The results
were terrible to witness. Kangaroos and snakes; emus and
cockatoos; lizards and rats—all lay about either dead or dying;
and in the case of animals who had survived, they seemed no longer
to fear their natural enemy, man.

Day by day as I saw my lagoon grow gradually smaller, I felt that
unless I took some steps to ensure a more permanent supply, my
people must inevitably perish, and I with them. Naturally enough,
they looked to me to do something for them, and provide some relief
from the effects of the most terrible drought which even they had
ever experienced. Almost daily discouraging reports were brought
to me regarding the drying up of all the better-known water-holes
all round the country, and I was at length obliged to invite all
and sundry to use my own all but exhausted lagoon. At length
things became so threatening that I decided to sink a well.

Choosing a likely spot near the foot of a precipitous hill, I set
to work with only Yamba as my assistant. Confidently anticipating
the best results, I erected a crude kind of windlass, and fitted it
with a green-hide rope and a bucket made by scooping out a section
of a tree. My digging implements consisted solely of a home-made
wooden spade and a stone pick. Yamba manipulated the windlass,
lowering and raising the bucket and disposing of the gravel which I
sent to the surface, with the dexterity of a practised navvy. What
with the heat, the scarcity of water, and the fact that not one of
the natives could be relied upon to do an hour’s work, it was a
terribly slow and wearying business; but Yamba and I stuck to it
doggedly day after day.

At the end of a week I had sunk a narrow shaft to a depth of twelve
or fourteen feet, and then to my infinite satisfaction saw every
indication that water was to be found a little lower down. In the
course of the following week I hit upon a spring, and then I felt
amply rewarded for all the trouble I had taken. Even when the
lagoon was perfectly dry, and only its parched sandy bed to be
seen, the supply from our little well continued undiminished; and
it proved more than enough for our wants during the whole of the
drought. I even ventured to provide the distressed birds and
animals with some means of quenching their insupportable thirst. A
few yards from the well I constructed a large wooden trough, which

I kept filled with water; and each day it was visited by the most
extraordinary flocks of birds of every size and variety of plumage-

-from emus down to what looked like humming-birds. Huge snakes,
ten and fifteen feet long, bustled the kangaroos away from the
life-giving trough; and occasionally the crowd would be so
excessive that some of the poor creatures would have to wait hours
before their thirst was satisfied,—and even die on the outer
fringe of the waiting throng. I remember that even at the time the
scene struck me as an amazing and unprecedented one, for there was

I doing my best to regulate the traffic, so to speak, sending away
the birds and animals and reptiles whose wants had been satisfied,
and bringing skins full of water to those who had fallen down from
exhaustion, and were in a fair way to die. As a rule, the
creatures took no notice whatever of me, but seemed to realise in
some instinctive way that I was their benefactor. Of course I had
to cover over the top of the well itself, otherwise it would have
been simply swamped with the carcasses of eager animals and birds.

But, it may be asked, why did I take the trouble to supply
everything that walked and flew and crawled with water when water
was so precious? A moment’s thought will furnish the answer. If I
suffered all the animals, birds, and reptiles to die, I myself
would be without food, and then my last state would be considerably
worse than the first.

I think the snakes were the most ungrateful creatures of all.

Sometimes they would deliberately coil themselves up in the trough
itself, and so prevent the birds from approaching. I always knew
when something of this kind had happened, because of the frightful
screeching and general uproar set up by the indignant birds—that
is to say, such as had the power to screech left. I would hurry to
the spot and drag out the cause of the trouble with a forked stick.

I never killed him, because there were already enough of his kind
dead on every side. The very trees and grass died; and in this
originated another almost equally terrible peril—the bush fires,
of which more hereafter. Talking about snakes, one day I had a
narrow escape from one of these ungrateful reptiles. A number of
baby snakes had swarmed into the trough, and I was in the very act
of angrily removing them when I heard a shout of horror from Yamba.

I swung round, instinctively leaping sideways as I did so, and
there, rearing itself high in the air, was an enormous snake, fully
twenty feet long. Yamba, without a moment’s hesitation, aimed a
tremendous blow at it and smashed its head.

The drought was productive of all kinds of curious and remarkable
incidents. The emus came in great flocks to the drinking-trough,
and some of them were so far gone that they fell dead only a few
yards from the fount of life. I picked up a great number of these
huge birds, and made their skins into useful bed coverings, rugs,
and even articles of clothing. When this terrible visitation was
at its height Yamba made a curious suggestion to me. Addressing me
gravely one night she said, “You have often told me of the Great

Spirit whom your people worship; He can do all things and grant all
prayers. Can you not appeal to Him now to send us water?” It was
a little bit awkward for me, but as I had often chatted to my wife
about the Deity, and told her of His omnipotence and His great
goodness to mankind, I was more or less obliged to adopt this
suggestion. Accordingly she and I knelt down together one night in
our dwelling, and offered up an earnest prayer to God that He would
send water to the afflicted country. Next morning that which
seemed to me a miracle had been wrought. Incredible though it may
appear, all the creeks, which until the previous night had been
mere dry watercourses for an untold number of months, were rippling
and running with the much-needed water, and we were saved all
further anxiety, at any rate for the time. There may be, however,
some scientific explanation of this extraordinary occurrence.

No sooner had we recovered from the delight caused by this
phenomenally sudden change than the rain came—such rain! and the
tremendous tropical downpour lasted for several weeks. The country
soon reverted to something like its normal appearance.

The bush fires were extinguished, and even my lagoon came into
existence again.

Talking about bush fires, we often saw them raging madly and
sublimely in the mountains. They would burn for weeks at a
stretch, and devastate hundreds of miles of country. For
ourselves, we always prepared for such emergencies by “ringing” our
dwelling —that is to say, laying bare a certain stretch of country
in a perfect circle around us. Often we were almost choked by the
intense heat which the wind occasionally wafted to us, and which,
combined with the blazing sun and scarcity of water, rendered life
positively intolerable.

I now wish to say a few words about Bruno—a few last sorrowful
words—because at this period he was growing feeble, and, indeed,
had never been the same since the death of Gibson. Still, I was
constantly making use of his sagacity to impress the blacks. My
usual custom was to hide some article (such as my tomahawk), near
the house in Bruno’s presence, and then start off on a tramp
accompanied by the blacks.

After we had gone a few miles I would suddenly call a halt, and
pretend to my companions that I had forgotten something. Then I
would order Bruno to go back and fetch it, with many mysterious
whisperings. The dear, sagacious brute always understood what I
wanted him to do, and in the course of perhaps an hour or two he
would come and lay the article at my feet, and accept the
flattering adulation of my black companions with the utmost
calmness and indifference. Bruno never forgot what was required of
him when we encountered a new tribe of blacks. He would always
look to me for his cue, and when he saw me commence my acrobatic
feats, he too would go through his little repertoire, barking and
tumbling and rolling about with wonderful energy.

His quaint little ways had so endeared him to me that I could not
bear to think of anything happening to him. On one occasion, when
going through a burning, sandy desert, both he and I suffered
terribly from the hot, loose sand which poured between our toes and
caused us great suffering. Poor Bruno protested in the only way he
could, which was by stopping from time to time and giving vent to
the most mournful howls. Besides, I could tell from the gingerly
way he put his feet down that the burning sand would soon make it
impossible for him to go any farther. I therefore made him a set
of moccasins out of kangaroo skin, and tied them on his feet.

These he always wore afterwards when traversing similar deserts,
and eventually he became so accustomed to them that as soon as we
reached the sand he would come to me and put up his paws
appealingly to have his “boots” put on!

But now age began to tell upon him; he was getting stiff in his
limbs, and seldom accompanied me on hunting expeditions. He seemed
only to want to sleep and drowse away the day. He had been a
splendid kangaroo hunter, and took quite an extraordinary amount of
pleasure in this pursuit. He would run down the biggest kangaroo
and “bail him up” unerringly under a tree; and whenever the doomed
animal tried to get away Bruno would immediately go for his tail,
and compel him to stand at bay once more until I came up to give
the coup de grace. Of course, Bruno received a nasty kick
sometimes and occasionally a bite from a snake, poisonous and
otherwise. He was not a young dog when I had him first; and I had
now made up my mind that he could not live much longer. He paid
but little attention in these days to either Yamba or myself, and
in this condition he lingered on for a year or more.

One morning I went into the second hut—which we still called

Gibson’s, by the way, although he had never lived there—when to my
dismay and horror (notwithstanding that I was prepared for the
event), I beheld my poor Bruno laid out stiff and stark on the
little skin rug that Gibson had originally made for him. I do not
think I knew how much I loved him until he was gone. As I stood
there, with the tears coursing down my cheeks, all the strange
events of my wondrous career seemed to rise before my mind—events
in which poor dead Bruno always took an active part. He was with
me on the wreck; he was with me on the island; he was with me in
all my wanderings and through all my sufferings and triumphs. He
got me out of many a scrape, and his curious little eccentricities,
likes, and dislikes afforded me never-ending delight. But now he
was gone the way of all flesh; and although I had expected this
blow for many months, I do not think this mitigated my poignant
grief. Yamba, too, was terribly grieved at his death, for she had
become most devotedly attached to him and he to her. I rolled the
body of the faithful creature in a kind of preservative earth and
then in an outer covering of bark. This done I laid him on a shelf
in one of the caves where the wild dogs could not get at him, and
where the body of Gibson, similarly treated, had also been placed.

CHAPTER XVIII

I make a perambulator—Meeting with whites—A dreadful habit—The
miracle of Moses—Preparing a demonstration—An expectant audience-

-Yamba growing feeble—One tie snapped—Yamba’s pathetic efforts—

Vain hopes—Yamba dying—Nearing the end—My sole desire—A mass of
gold—I seek trousers and shirt—An interesting greeting—A
startling question—Towards Mount Margaret—The French Consul—I
reach London.

I always felt instinctively that any attempt at missionary
enterprise on my part would be dangerous, and might besides afford
jealous medicine-men and other possible enemies an excellent
opportunity of undermining my influence.

Sometimes, however, when all the tribe was gathered together, I
would bring up the subject of cannibalism, and tell them that the

Great Spirit they feared so much had left with me a written message
forbidding all feasting off the bodies of human beings. The

“written message” I referred to on these occasions was my old

Bible. Of course the blacks failed to understand its purport as a
book, having no written language of their own; but my manner and
words served to impress them.

My natives seemed ever to manifest the keenest interest in the
accounts I gave them of the wonderful resources of civilisation;
but experience showed that I must adapt my descriptions to the
intellect of my hearers. For example, I used to tell them that in
the great cities (“camps” I called them) there was never any real
darkness if men chose, because there were other lights at command
which could be turned off and on at will. The most effective
analogy in this respect was the twinkling of the stars in the
heavens; but my hearers were greatly amazed to think that such
lights could be under the command of man.

The blacks had long since put me down as a great spirit come to
visit them, and they even located by common consent a certain star
in the heavens which they decided was at one time my home, and to
which I should eventually return. Every time I made a false step,

I had to devise some new “miracle” by way of counterblast.

On one occasion I actually made a perambulator for the conveyance
of children! It was the very first time that these primitive
savages had seen the principle of the wheel applied to locomotion,
and it passed their comprehension altogether. With childish
delight and an uproar that baffles all description, both men and
women almost fought with one another for the honour of pushing the
crude little conveyance about. The perambulator was made out of
logs, and was a four-wheeled vehicle; the rims of the wheels being
cut from a hollow tree. My blacks were also much amazed at the
great size of my mountain home; but their wonderment increased
greatly when I explained to them that some of the buildings in the
great “camps” of the white man were as large as the hills, and much
more numerous.

Elsewhere I have spoken of the extraordinary system of telegraphy
that exists among the blacks. Well, in the early eighties news
began to reach me that numbers of white men had appeared in the
north; and in one of my many long tramps I one day came upon a
party of white men engaged in prospecting. I speak of this
remarkable meeting thus abruptly because their tent met my gaze in
the most abrupt manner possible. It is ever so in the Australian
bush.

I found that this party was by no means an isolated one, and I
actually stayed in various camps for a few days, before returning
to my mountain home. I need hardly remark that the white men were
far more astonished to see me than I was at meeting them. Of
course I could have joined them and gone back to civilisation, but
this I would not do without my native wife and family. It was in
the Kimberley district that I met these parties of prospectors; and

I may here remark that I had for some time been aware of the
existence of this auriferous region. I learned afterwards that the

Kimberley was geographically the nearest point I might have made
for in order to reach civilisation.

When I settled down again in my mountain home I soon fell into my
old way of living, which was practically identical with that of the
blacks, save that I did not always accompany them when they shifted
camp. Parties of natives were constantly calling upon me, and
would stay perhaps three or four days at a time. I encouraged
these visits, and invariably prepared some entertainment for my
guests,—even going to the extent of providing them with wives,
according to native custom. But, you will ask, where did I get
wives to hand round in this convenient fashion? A very interesting
question this, and one which requires a somewhat lengthy answer.

Now, the blacks do not look upon the advent of a female child with
any favour; on the contrary, they frequently get rid of it at once
in order to save themselves the trouble of taking it with them when
on the walkabout.

As I was always very fond of children, I decided to try and put a
stop to this dreadful habit of child-murder, so I made it known far
and wide that parents could pass their girl-babies on to me, and I
would rear and look after them. The result of this widely-advertised offer was that I soon had quite an orphan asylum
established—an institution which was valuable to me in many ways.

Quite apart from the satisfaction I derived from knowing I had
saved these children from a terrible death, I was looked upon as a
kind of prospective father-in-law on a gigantic scale, and young
men came from all parts to treat with me for wives.

As I have said before, my regular reception days were held at the
new moon.

My visitors, as well as my own people, gradually grew to have quite
a reverence for the Bible; but I am afraid it was not on account of
the sacredness of the book, but rather owing to the wonderful
things it contained, and which were interpreted by me in such a way
as would appeal directly to the primitive minds of these people.

Oftentimes I made mistakes. For instance, what seemed to interest
them enormously was the story of how Moses struck the rock and
obtained a miraculous supply of water. Anything in the way of
fresh water procured in the desert interested them keenly. Only,
unfortunately, they floored me by asking me to accomplish a similar
miracle!

Another Bible story which brought me some discomfiture was about

Balaam and his ass. Now, when I decided to tell the story of

Balaam, I knew from experience that if I mentioned an “ass,” that
animal would require all kinds of tedious explanation, which would
probably result in needless mystification and consequent suspicion;
so I boldly plunged into the story of BALAAM AND HIS KANGAROO! But
what staggered the blacks altogether was that Balaam’s kangaroo
should be able to speak. Now, it seems that a talking animal is
the greatest possible joke known to the blacks, and so my narrative
was greeted with uproarious mirth; and my “impossible” story even
spread from tribe to tribe. I found it was no use telling the
blacks anything they could not readily comprehend.

One day I told them about the destruction of Sodom and Gomorrah by
fire and brimstone, and this again landed me in disaster, for I was
promptly asked how could any one, Great Spirit or other, burn up

THE STONES of which the houses were composed? And, of course, each
instance of this kind would be pounced upon by a tribal medicine-man or some other jealous enemy, and used to discredit me. A few
days after telling the Sodom and Gomorrah story, I was on a walkabout with Yamba in my mountain region, when I suddenly discovered
that shale existed in very considerable quantities, and I thereupon
conceived the idea of demonstrating to the blacks that, not only
was the Bible narrative a true one, but that it was quite possible
to ignite stone; AND I WOULD EVEN SHOW THEM HOW IT WAS DONE!

Aided by Yamba and other members of my family, I constructed an
immense shaft-like cairn, mainly composed of loose pieces of shale
intermixed with sandstone. I put in the sandstone and other
stones, partly in order that the blacks might not notice the
uniform construction of the cairn; and partly also because I knew
that when the ordinary stones were heated, they would probably
burst or explode with a loud sound, and so terrify the
superstitious onlookers. The cairn was about fifteen feet high,
with an opening at the summit and other small openings at the sides
in order to ensure a good draught. At the base I left an opening
sufficiently large for me to crawl through. Then I placed inside a
quantity of inflammable material—such as wood and dry bark;—and
as all these preparations went forward in a very leisurely manner,
my monthly reception was quite due when everything was ready.

Wishing to have an exceptionally large gathering, I sent out
invitations to all the surrounding tribes to come and see my
wonderful performance at which I would “set fire to the rocks and
stones.”

A perfectly enormous crowd assembled at the time appointed, for my
previous achievements had led the black-fellows to suppose I had
some marvellous manifestation in store for them. Never can I
forget the keenness with which that great assembly anticipated the
entertainment in store for them. And remember, they were growing
pretty blase by this time, having witnessed so many miracles.

In the twilight of the evening, when the murmur of the multitude
was hushed, I crawled cautiously into the cairn (I should have been
buried alive had it collapsed), and at once commenced operations
with the flint and steel and tinder which I had taken care to leave
there. In another minute I had set fire to the wood and dry
material that filled the bottom of the shaft. When I was satisfied
that it was thoroughly alight, I discreetly withdrew and joined the
wondering crowd, which I had forbidden to approach too close.

Dense clouds of smoke were now rolling from the apertures of the
great cairn, and in a short time the shaft was a fierce and raging
furnace, with the ordinary stones red hot and occasionally bursting
with loud explosions, which threw showers of glowing slag high into
the air.

The blacks were almost paralysed with fear, and many of them threw
themselves prostrate on the ground, ignoring the hail of stones
that fell upon their naked bodies. I stalked about majestically
among them, exulting in my power and the success of my
manifestation. The big cairn burnt for many days more fiercely
than even a stack of coal would do; and I never ceased to wonder
that the blacks themselves had not long ago found out the
inflammable nature of the “stone.”

By this time Yamba could speak English tolerably well, but we did
not invariably use that language.

Gradually and half unconsciously I fell into the habit of speaking
the native tongue, until I suddenly found that the practice was
obtaining such a firm hold upon me that I was forgetting French
altogether; whilst it was only with difficulty that I could form
grammatical sentences in English. I soon came to the conclusion,
therefore, that it was necessary for me to hold much more converse
in English than I had hitherto done; and from the moment that this
curious “scare” suggested itself to my mind, Yamba and I and our
children spoke nothing but English when we were by ourselves in the
evening. I cultivated my knowledge of English in preference to any
other language, because I knew that if ever we should reach
civilisation, English and not French would be the language spoken.

It may be interesting also to mention that one of the first
indications I had that I was losing my English was an inability to

THINK in that language.

In general appearance I was now absolutely like a black, and wore
only an apron of emu skin as a protection against the scrub I
encountered when on the walkabout. In the ordinary way I never
had any marks upon me with the exception of these scratches. Of
course, on festive occasions, I was gaily painted and decorated,
and no doubt I would have been initiated into manhood, and borne
the tribal and other marks, were it not for the fact that I was a
man when I came among the blacks.

It is obviously impossible for me to record minutely the happenings
of every day, mainly because only the salient incidents stand out
in my mind. Besides, I have already dealt with the daily routine,
and have probably repeated myself in minor details.

A constant source of grief to me was the weakly condition of my two
children, who I knew could never attain mature age. And knowing
they were doomed, I think I loved them all the more.

Yet so incomprehensible is human nature that I often found myself
speculating on what I should do after they—and Yamba—were gone;
because by this time my faithful helpmate was growing ominously
feeble. You must remember that when I first met her on the desert
island she was an oldish woman, judged by the native standard; that
is to say, she was about thirty.

The deathbed of my boy is a scene I can never forget. He called
me to him, and said he was very glad he was dying, because he felt
he would never have been strong enough to fight his way through
life, and endure daily what the other black boys endured.

Therefore, he argued wistfully, and half inquiringly, he would only
be a burden to me. He was a very affectionate and considerate
little fellow, with an intelligence far beyond that of the ordinary
aboriginal child. He spoke in English, because I had taught both
him and his sister that language. At the last I learned—for the
first time—that it was always worrying him, and almost breaking
his little heart, that he could never compete with the black boys
in their games of strength and skill; and no doubt he would have
become an outcast were it not that he was my son.

Almost his last whispered words to me were that he would be able to
assist me more in the Spiritland than ever he could hope to do in
the flesh. He was perfectly conscious to the last, and as I knelt
down by his couch of fragrant eucalyptus leaves, and stooped low to
catch his whispered message, he told me he seemed to be entering a
beautiful new country, where the birds always sang and the flowers
bloomed for ever. Spirit voices kept calling him, he said, and he
felt himself being irresistibly drawn away from me.

Upon my own feelings I do not wish to dwell. All I will say is I
kissed my boy on the eyes and mouth, and then, with a soft “Good-bye, they have come for me,” he closed his eyes for ever.

I felt it was to be. A few days afterwards the little girl, my
remaining child, was taken ill, and so feeble was she, that she
soon joined her brother in the better land. I seemed to be
overwhelmed with misfortunes, but the greatest of all was yet to
come. I have hinted that Yamba was beginning to show signs of
infirmity through advancing years. I could not help noticing, with
a vague feeling of helpless horror and sickening foreboding, that
she had lost her high spirits and keen perception—to say nothing
about the elasticity of her tread and her wonderful physical
endurance generally. She was no longer able to accompany me on the
long and interesting tramps which we had now taken together for so
many years. Her skin began to wither and wrinkle, and she
gradually took on the appearance of a very old woman. The result
of this was I began to have fits of frightful depression and acute
misery. I stayed at home a good deal now, partly because I knew
the country thoroughly and no longer cared to explore, and partly
also because I missed the companionship and invaluable assistance
of my devoted wife. I constantly buoyed myself up with the hope
that Yamba was only ailing temporarily, and that her enfeebled
condition had been brought on mainly by the misfortunes that had
befallen us of late. But she grew more and more feeble, and both
she and I knew that the end was not far off. Never once, however,
did we allude to such a catastrophe; and whenever I fixed my eyes
earnestly upon her in the vain hope of discerning some more
favourable symptom, she would pretend not to notice me.

I would sometimes take her for a long walk, which was really much
beyond her strength, solely in order that we might delude ourselves
with vain hopes. And she, poor creature, would tax herself far
beyond her strength in order to afford me a happiness which the
real state of things did not justify.

For instance, she would run and leap and jump in order to show that
she was as young as ever; but after these strange and pathetic
demonstrations she would endeavour to conceal her great exhaustion.

Very soon my poor Yamba was obliged to remain at home altogether;
and as she grew more and more infirm, she plucked up courage to
tell me that she knew she was going to die, and was rather glad
than otherwise, because then I would be able to return to
civilisation—that goal for which I had yearned through so many
years. She pointed out to me that it would not be so difficult
now, as I had already been brought into contact with parties of
white men; and, besides, we had long ago had news brought to us
about the construction of the Trans-Continental Telegraph Line from

Adelaide to Port Darwin. No sooner had she spoken of death than I
broke down again altogether. The thought that she should be taken
from me was so cruel that its contemplation was quite
insupportable, and I threw myself down beside her in a perfect
agony of grief and dread.

I told her I did not mind how long I remained among the blacks so
long as she was with me; and I tried to persuade her, with all the
eloquence I could muster, that, far from dying, she would return to
civilisation with me, so that I might spread abroad to the whole
world the story of her devotion and her virtues. As she continued
merely to smile pityingly, I changed my tone and dwelt upon the
past. I went through the whole story of my life, from the time she
was cast upon the desert island in the Sea of Timor, and at the
recital of all the hardships and dangers, joys and troubles, which
we had passed through together, she broke down also, and we wept
long and bitterly in one another’s arms.

By this time she had become a convert to Christianity, but this was
entirely a matter of her own seeking. She had such implicit belief
in my wisdom and knowledge, that she begged me to tell her all
about my religion in order that she might adopt it as her own.

Like most converts, she was filled with fiery zeal and enthusiasm,
and tried to soften the approaching terror by telling me she was
quite happy at the thought of going, because she would be able to
look after me even more than in the past. “How different it would
have been with me,” she used to say, “had I remained with my old
tribe. I should still be under the belief that when I died my
highest state would be to be turned into an animal; but now I know
that a glorious future awaits us, and that in due time you will
join me in heaven.”

Yamba did not suffer any physical pain, nor was she actually
confined to her bed until four days before her death. As the
various tribes knew the love and admiration I had for her, the fact
that she lay dying spread rapidly, and crowds of natives flocked to
my mountain home.

Widespread sympathy was expressed for me; and all kinds of tender
consideration were evinced by these savages. All day long an
incessant stream of women-folk kept coming to the hut and inquiring
after my dying wife.

It seemed to be Yamba’s sole anxiety that I should be well equipped
for the journey back to civilisation. She would rehearse with me
for hours the various methods adopted by the black-fellows to find
water; and she reminded me that my course at first was to be in a
southerly direction until I came to a region where the trees were
blazed, and then I was to follow the track that led westward. She
had elicited this information for me from the blacks with
remarkable acuteness.

These last days seemed to pass very quickly, and one night the
dying woman had a serious relapse. Hitherto she had always
addressed me as “Master,” but now that she stood in the Valley of
the Shadow she would throw her arms about my neck and whisper
softly, “Good-bye, MY HUSBAND. Good-bye, I am going—going—going.

I will wait for you—there.”

For myself I could not seem to realise it. Sometimes I would rise
up with the sole intention of finding out whether this frightful
thing was or was not a ghastly dream. Then my memory would go back
over the long years, and every little instance of unselfishness and
devotion would rise before my mind. As I looked at the prostrate
and attenuated form that lay silent on the couch of eucalyptus
leaves, I felt that life was merely the acutest agony, and that I
must immediately seek oblivion in some form or the other, or lose
my reason. It seemed, I say, impossible that Yamba could cease to
be. It seemed the cruellest and most preposterous thing that she
could be taken from me.

Frantically I put my arms around her and actually tried to lift her
on to her feet, begging of her to show how robust she was as in the
days of yore. I whispered into her ears all the memories of the
past, and the poor creature would endeavour to respond with a
series of feeble efforts, after which she sank back suddenly and
breathed a last pitiful sigh.

Language is utterly futile to describe my horror—my distraction.

I felt as I imagined a man would feel after amputation of all his
members, leaving only the quivering and bleeding trunk. I felt
that life held no more joy, no more hope; and gladly would I have
welcomed death itself as a happy release from the wretchedness of
living. In my delirium of grief I often besought the repulsive
savages about me to spear me where I stood.

Upon this subject I can dwell no more, because of what followed I
have only the vaguest recollection.

For days I seemed to live in a kind of dream, and was not even sure
that the people I met day by day were real beings. As to my awful
loss, I am sure I did not realise it. What I did realise, however,
was the necessity for immediate action. Like a dream to me also is
the memory of the sincere grief of my blacks and their well-meant
endeavours to console me. The women kept up a mournful howl, which
nearly drove me crazy, and only strengthened my resolve to get away
from that frightful place. So dazed did I become, that the blacks
concluded some strange spirit must have entered into me.

They seemed to take it for granted that I left all arrangements for
the funeral to them; the sole idea that possessed me being to
complete my arrangements for the great journey I had before me. I
told the natives frankly of my intention, and immediately forty of
them volunteered to accompany me on my travels as far as I chose to
permit them to come. I readily accepted the kindly offer, partly
because I knew that alone I should have gone mad; and partly also
because I instinctively realised that with such a bodyguard I would
have nothing to fear either from human foes or the tortures of
thirst.

I left everything. I cut off my long hair with my stiletto and
distributed it among the natives to be made into bracelets,
necklaces, and other souvenirs; and then I departed with little
ceremony from the place where I had spent so many years of weird
and strange exile. Most of my belongings I gave away, and I think

I turned my back upon my mountain home with little or no regret.

My dress consisted solely of the usual covering of emu skin; whilst
attached to a belt round my waist were my tomahawk and stiletto.

My bow and arrows were slung over my shoulder. Day after day we
marched steadily on, precisely as though we were on a walkabout.

The conditions of the country were constantly changing, and I came
across many evidences of its natural richness in minerals—more
particularly gold.

One day as we were all resting near the base of a rock, which was a
kind of huge outcrop from the plain, I began idly to chip the stone
with my tomahawk. Suddenly the edge glanced aside, revealing a
bright, shining, yellow metal. I sprang to my feet in
astonishment, and realised in a moment that this great mass of rock
was auriferous to an enormous degree, and there was one gigantic
nugget, spread out tentacle-wise in it, which if removed would, I
am sure, be as much as a couple of men could carry.

Week after week passed by, and still we continued our southward
march. In time, of course, my companions returned to their own
country; but so leisurely had our progress been that I had ample
time thoroughly to ingratiate myself with other tribes,—so that,
as usual, I went from tribe to tribe practically armed only with my
own knowledge of the savages and my invaluable repertoire of
tricks. In the course of months I came upon the blazed or marked
trees, and then struck due west.

Very few incidents worth recording befell me, and I kept steadily
on my way for eight or nine months. At last—at last—I came upon
unmistakable signs of the proximity of “civilisation”; for strewn
along the track we were now following were such things as rusty
meat-tins; old papers; discarded and very much ant-eaten clothing;
tent-pegs; and numerous other evidences of pioneer life. One day,
about noon, I espied an encampment of tents 500 or 600 yards ahead
of me, and I promptly brought my men to a halt whilst I went
forward a little to reconnoitre. Curiously enough, the sight of
these tents did not cause me any great emotion. You see, I had met
prospectors before in the Kimberley region, and besides, I had been
looking for these tents so long from the time I first came across
the evidences of civilisation aforesaid, that my only surprise was

I had not reached them before. Walking about were Europeans in the
usual dress of the Australian prospector. Suddenly a strange
feeling of shyness and hesitancy came over me. Almost stark naked
and darkened as I was—a veritable savage, in fact—I realised I
could not go and introduce myself to these men without proper
clothing. I knew the value of caution in approaching so-called
civilised men, having had bitter experience with the Giles
expedition. Returning to my blacks, I told them that at last I had
come up with my own people, but did not want to join them for some
little time yet. Then I selected a couple of my companions, and
explained to them that I wanted some white man’s clothing.

I instructed them to creep quietly into the camp, take a pair of
trousers and shirt that were hanging outside one of the tents, and
bring back these articles to me. They undertook the commission
with evident delight, but when they returned in the course of a few
minutes they brought only the shirt with them; the trousers, it
seemed having been removed no doubt by the owner, a few minutes
before they arrived. My blacks were intensely amused when I donned
the shirt; and considering that this was practically the only
article of wearing apparel I possessed, I have no doubt I did cut a
very ludicrous figure. Then came another difficulty. I reflected

I could not possibly go and show myself among these white men
wearing one of their own shirts. Finally I decided to bid farewell
then and there to my escort, and continue my march alone until I
reached another encampment.

In the course of another day or so I reached a second camp. Into
this I decided to venture and explain who I was. Before taking
this step, however, I rubbed off all the clayey coating on my skin,
trimmed my hair and beard to a respectable length by means of a
firestick, and threw away my bow, which was now my only remaining
weapon; then I marched boldly into the camp. Some five or six
bronzed prospectors were seated at supper round the fire in front
of the tent as I approached; and when they caught sight of me they
stared, astounded for the moment, and then burst into laughter,
under the impression that I was one of their own black servants
playing some joke upon them. When I was but a few yards away,
however, I called out in English -

“Halloa, boys! have you room for me?”

They were too much taken aback to reply immediately, and then one
of them said -

“Oh yes; come and sit down.”

As I seated myself among them they asked -

“Have you been out prospecting?”

“Yes,” I said quietly, “and I have been away a very long time.”

“And where did you leave your mates?” was the next question.

“I had no mates,” I told them. “I undertook my wanderings
practically alone.”

They looked at one another, winked, and smiled incredulously at
this. Then one of them asked me if I had found any gold.

I said, “Oh yes, plenty of gold,” and then the next query—a most
natural one—was, “Well, why have you not brought some of the stuff
back with you? How far have you travelled?”

I told them I had been tramping through the heart of the Continent
for eight or nine months, and that I had no means of carrying
nuggets and quartz about with me. But this explanation only served
to renew their merriment, which reached its climax when, in an
unguarded moment, I put a question which I had been burning to ask

-

“What year is this?”

“This is Bellamy’s ‘Looking Backward’ with a vengeance,” cried one
of the prospectors—a sally that was heartily appreciated by the
whole of the company, with the exception of myself. I began to
think that if this was the reception civilisation had for me, it
were better for me to have remained among my faithful savages.

But in a few minutes the men’s demeanour changed, and it was
obvious that they looked upon me as a harmless lunatic just emerged
from the bush. I was assured that this conclusion was correct when

I saw the diggers looking at one another significantly and tapping
their foreheads. I resolved to tell them nothing further about
myself, well knowing that the more I told them the more convinced
they would be that I was a wandering lunatic. I learned that these
men were a party of decent young fellows from Coolgardie. They
offered me a meal of tea and damper, and pressed me to stay the
night with them, but I declined their hospitality. I gratefully
accepted a pair of trousers, but declined the offer of a pair of
boots, feeling certain that I could not yet bear these on my feet.

My rough benefactors told me that I should find many other camps to
the south and west; so I wandered off into the bush again and spent
the night alone.

My next move was in the direction of Mount Margaret; and along the
road which I traversed I came across an interesting variety of
picks, shovels, and other mining tools, which had evidently been
discarded by disappointed prospectors. I decided not to enter this
town but to go round it; then I continued my tramp alone towards

Coolgardie and thence to Southern Cross.

After working for some time in the last-named town (my impressions
of “civilisation” would make another whole book), I made my way to

Perth, the capital of Western Australia. In Perth I was advised
that it would be better for me to go to Melbourne, as I would stand
a much better chance there of getting a ship on which I might work
my passage to Europe. Accordingly I proceeded to Melbourne as soon
as I could, and the only noteworthy incident there was my humorous
interview with the French Consul. I addressed that dignified
functionary in execrable French, telling him that I was a French
subject and wanted to be sent back to Europe. I bungled a great
deal, and when my French failed I helped myself out with English.

The Consul waited patiently till I had finished, stroking his beard
the while, and looking at me in the most suspicious manner.

“You claim this because you are a Frenchman?” he said.

“That is so,” I replied, involuntarily relapsing into English once
more.

“Well,” he said coldly, as he turned away, “the next time you say
you are a Frenchman you had better not use any English at all,
because you speak that language better than I do.”

I tried to argue the point with him, and told him I had been
shipwrecked, but when I went on to explain how long ago that
shipwreck was, he smiled in spite of himself, and I came away.

From Melbourne I went to Sydney, and from Sydney to Brisbane.

About May 1897, I found myself in Wellington, New Zealand, where I
was advised I stood an excellent chance of getting a ship to take
me to England. I sailed in the New Zealand Shipping Company’s

Waikato, and landed in London in March 1898.

End of the Project Gutenberg eText The Adventures of Louis De

Rougemont

Table of Contents

- CHAPTER I
- CHAPTER II
- CHAPTER III
- CHAPTER IV
- CHAPTER V
- CHAPTER VI
- CHAPTER VII
- CHAPTER VIII
- CHAPTER IX
- CHAPTER X
- CHAPTER XI
- CHAPTER XII
- CHAPTER XIII
- CHAPTER XIV
- CHAPTER XV
- CHAPTER XVI
- CHAPTER XVII
- CHAPTER XVIII